WALES

Departmental Public Expenditure

Mark Hoban: To ask the Secretary of State for Wales how much capital spending is planned to be brought forward by his Department to  (a) 2008-09 and  (b) 2009-10.

Paul Murphy: I refer the hon. Gentleman to my answer of 24 March 2009,  Official Report, column 185W.

Departmental Training

Greg Hands: To ask the Secretary of State for Wales pursuant to the answer of 29 January 2009,  Official Report, column 689W, on departmental training, which Minister took the course Action Learning Set—National School of Government; and at what cost.

Wayne David: The Action Learning Set—National School of Government course referred to in my earlier answer cost £250. Identifying Ministers who undertake training may discourage participation in future training sessions, acting as a disincentive for Ministers to undertake formal professional development.

Energy: Prices

Philip Hollobone: To ask the Secretary of State for Wales what recent discussions he has had with the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change on energy prices in Wales.

Paul Murphy: I take a close interest in energy prices in Wales. Along with the Welsh Assembly Government I asked Ofgem when undertaking its review into the energy market to investigate why people in Wales appeared to be paying more for their energy. In its initial findings Ofgem concluded that people in Wales did pay more for their electricity due to a number of factors. I understand that Ofgem will be publishing new licensing conditions to help tackle some of these issues next month with a view to introducing them by the autumn.

TRANSPORT

Airports

Michael Ancram: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport if he will make an estimate of the airport runway capacity required in the South of England to remove the need for aircraft to be held in stacks.

Jim Fitzpatrick: The Government recognise the negative impacts of stacking on operational efficiency and the environment. The 'Future of Air Transport' White Paper encourages making better use of existing airport capacity and supports the delivery of two new runways in the south-east. Implementing that policy should reduce the need for stacking. In particular, the Government's recent confirmation of its support for a third runway at Heathrow should help to reduce the need for stacking at that airport where lack of runway capacity is a significant contributory factor. However, runway capacity is not the only relevant factor, and that is why the UK also strongly supports optimising the use of airspace, including through implementation of the Single European Sky.

Aviation

Justine Greening: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport what objectives and sub-objectives were contained in his Department's Aviation Directorate's business plan in  (a) 2006-07,  (b) 2007-08 and  (c) 2008-09; and which of these were contained in Project Heathrow project delivery and risk reports in each such year.

Jim Fitzpatrick: The Aviation Directorate's business plan for each of the years 2006-07, 2007-08 and 2008-09 included objectives relating to the delivery of 'The Future of Air Transport' White Paper. Heathrow project delivery and risk reports refer to those objectives. The Department's business plans are available on its website.

Departmental Billing

Mark Oaten: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport what percentage of its suppliers his Department has paid within 10 days of receipt of invoice in the last four months.

Geoff Hoon: holding answer 20 March 2009
	The Department for Transport collects and monitors its payment performance on a monthly basis against a target to pay all valid invoices within 30 days of receipt unless different payment terms exist. The Department's overall payment performance is reported to BERR at the end of each financial year.
	Following the Prime Minister's statement on 8 October 2008 the Department has implemented new monitoring arrangements to report on its payment performance for all suppliers against a 10 day deadline. The new arrangements came into effect on 1 January 2009 with the first set of data available for the month of January.
	Payment performance information is published each month on the Department's website at:
	www.dft.gov.uk/AboutDfT/Procurement/ProcurementPolicies/PromptPaymentStatistics
	Data are available for January and February 2009 for the percentage of valid invoices paid within 10 days as follows:
	
		
			   Total 
			  January 2009  
			 Percentage paid on time 61.19 
			 Volume 17569 
			   
			  February 2009  
			 Percentage paid on time 65.42 
			 Volume 17248 
			  Note: Data from the Vehicle Certification Agency is excluded—this will not be available until the next financial year.

Departmental Internet

Mark Hoban: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport pursuant to the answer of 3 February 2009,  Official Report, column 1124W, how many hits each of the websites maintained by the Department received in each of the last 12 months.

Geoff Hoon: Tables have been placed in the Libraries of the House showing websites currently maintained by the Department and the page hits received in each of the last 12 months.
	Data are unavailable in some instances, either for technical reasons or because the website was not live at the time.
	The Department intends to measure website usage in line with the proposed guidance issued by the Central Office of Information, 'Measuring website usage (TG116)', starting from the financial year 2009-10.

Departmental Public Expenditure

Robert Goodwill: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport what estimate he has made of the cost of managing the estates of the  (a) Vehicle and Operator Services Agency and  (b) Driving Standards Agency in the last year for which figures are available.

Geoff Hoon: holding answer 19 March 2009
	The information is as follows:
	 (a) The Vehicle and Operator Services Agency (comprising 180 sites ranging from testing stations to headquarters and administration offices) estimates that the cost of managing its estates is £740,000 for the current financial year.
	 (b) The Driving Standards Agency (comprising 413 sites ranging from testing stations to headquarters and administration offices) estimates that expenditure for management of the estate incurred in 2008-09 will amount to £2.64 million.

Driving: Multiple Sclerosis

James Gray: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport what his policy is on the application of the provisions of the Road Traffic Act 1988 relating to the physical fitness of drivers to persons with multiple sclerosis.

Jim Fitzpatrick: Multiple sclerosis is a prospective disability under section 92(2) of the Road Traffic Act 1988. A prospective disability is defined as a medical condition, which by virtue of the progressive or intermittent nature of the disability or otherwise, may become a relevant disability in the course of time.
	For Group 1 licence holders/applicants (cars and motorcycles), providing a medical investigation confirms that driving performance is not impaired, a driver with multiple sclerosis can be licensed. A one, two or three-year licence may be required.
	For Group 2 licence holders/applicants (buses and lorries), a licence will be refused or revoked if the condition is progressive. If driving would not be impaired and the condition is stable, licensing can be considered on a case by case basis subject to satisfactory reports and an annual review.

M25

Theresa Villiers: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport how much his Department spent on consultants in respect of proposals to widen stretches of the M25 in each of the last 11 years.

Paul Clark: The cost of consultants engaged on M25 widening schemes for each of the previous 11 years is set out as follows.
	
		
			   £000 
			 1997-98 632 
			 1998-99 481 
			 1999-2000 544 
			 2000-01 583 
			 2001-02 609 
			 2002-03 1,257 
			 2003-04 1,229 
			 2004-05 7,925 
			 2005-06 16,068 
			 2006-07 15,037 
			 2007-08 13,350 
			 2008-09 10,447 
		
	
	The above costs relate to consultancy work on the following activities:
	M25 J12-15 widening studies
	M25 J7-8 anti-clockwise widening
	25 J8-10 widening
	25 Orbit Multimodal Study
	25 J12-15 Widening Preparation
	 Preparation of the M25 DBFO Contract, specifically:
	Traffic and Environmental Studies
	Illustrative Design
	Contract Preparation
	Environmental Statement Publication
	Public Exhibitions
	Contract negotiations

M25

Theresa Villiers: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport when he plans to award contracts for the next phase of the widening of the M25.

Paul Clark: The widening of the M25 between Junctions 16 to 23, and Junctions 27 to 30, is included in the scope of the M25 Design, Build Finance and Operate (DBFO) Contract currently in the final stages of procurement.
	It is expected that this contract will be awarded in late April 2009, subject to satisfactory completion of statutory processes and completion of the ongoing competition to raise finance for the project.

Motor Vehicles: Environment Protection

Michael Ancram: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport what recent steps he has taken to encourage the use of environmentally-friendly cars.

Jim Fitzpatrick: In January 2009, the Secretary of State for Transport announced £250 million towards consumer incentives for ultra-low carbon cars. This is in addition to £100 million the Government are already providing to support research, development and demonstration of key technologies for such vehicles.
	The UK was in the vanguard of EU member states lobbying for a long term target, which was added to the New Car CO2 regulation agreement reached in December 2008 between the European Council, Parliament and Commission. The target for 2020 is provisionally set at 95g/km.
	The latest strand of the Government's 'Act on CO2' consumer awareness campaign continues to promote the purchase of more environmentally friendly vehicles as well as the benefits of smarter driving.
	Finally, the use and purchase of environmentally friendly vehicles is supported through the current UK taxation system, which is also the basis for the new car fuel economy labelling scheme now used in most car showrooms.

Redundancy

Justine Greening: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport with reference to the answer of 26 November 2008,  Official Report, column 1370W, on redundancy, how many staff left his Department under staff exit schemes with a severance package worth  (a) between £100,000 and £125,000,  (b) between £125,001 and £150,000,  (c) between £150,001 and £200,000,  (d) between £200,001 and £250,000,  (e) between £250,001 and £500,000,  (f) between £500,001 and £1,000,000 and  (g) over £1,000,000 in each year since 2005-06.

Geoff Hoon: Unfortunately a detailed breakdown of staff exits cannot be provided as there are fewer than five exits in most cases. In these cases, the information is suppressed on the grounds of confidentiality.
	
		
			   Number of exits 
			  Size of severance package  2005-06  2006-07  2007-08 
			 £100,000 to £125,000 — — — 
			 £125,001 to £150,000 — — — 
			 £150,001 to £200,000 7 — — 
			 £200,001 to £250,000 — — — 
			 £250,001 to £500,000 — — — 
			 500,001 to £1,000,000 — — — 
			 Over £1,000,000 — — — 
			 Total 19 8 7

Transport: Finance

Stephen Hammond: To ask the Secretary of State for Transport what assessment he has made of the effect of the economic downturn on his Department's Comprehensive Spending Review target to double real terms spending on transport over the 20 years from 1997.

Geoff Hoon: Comprehensive Spending Review 2007 (Meeting the aspirations of the British people cm 7227) announced a 2.25 per cent. real growth in the Long-Term Funding Guideline to 2018-19, meaning that over the 20 years from 1997 UK spending on transport would have more than doubled in real terms.
	Assessment of the future means of the Long-Term Funding Guideline will be made, as normal, in any future spending review.

SCOTLAND

Departmental Public Consultations

Shailesh Vara: To ask the Secretary of State for Scotland how many public consultations his Department has conducted in the last 12 months; how long each consultation was open for; how many responses were received in each case; and what the cost of conducting each consultation was.

Ann McKechin: In the last 12 months, the Scotland Office has undertaken one public consultation, "Sorting the Ballot". This public consultation began on 13 December 2007 and ended on 7 March 2008; an analysis of the 39 responses was published on 24 June 2008. The consultation paper was printed by the Stationery Office at a cost of £1,727 and vetted by the Plain English Campaign at a cost of £311, making a total of £2,038.

ENVIRONMENT FOOD AND RURAL AFFAIRS

Biofuels

Bill Wiggin: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs when the Environment Agency plans to determine whether used cooking oil may be used as a fuel; and when he plans to determine his policy on this matter.

Jane Kennedy: The Government have made funding available to enable the Environment Agency to develop an end-of-waste protocol for waste cooking oils. Waste cooking oil which is treated to the standards set out in the protocol is accepted by the agency to have been fully recovered and to have ceased to be waste. The protocol applies to the production of biodiesel for use in automotive engines. The question of whether waste cooking oil has been fully recovered so that it ceases to be waste before it is used as fuel in other circumstances is one that must be determined on the facts of each case and taking into account relevant case law on the definition of waste.
	Used cooked oil which has not been fully recovered may also be used as a fuel. However, the use of waste as a fuel is subject to the requirements of the waste framework directive and the waste incineration directive.

Bluetongue Disease: Vaccination

Martyn Jones: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what assessment he has made of the adequacy of supplies of bluetongue vaccine to respond effectively to an outbreak of the disease in 2009.

Jane Kennedy: DEFRA underwrote 28 million doses of BTV8 vaccine in 2008, enough for all susceptible animals in England. 12 million of these doses formed the supply at the start of 2009. This along with free market vaccine supplies from the three manufacturers authorised to market vaccine in the UK, Intervet, Merial and Fort Dodge should meet the demand for BTV8 vaccine in 2009.
	DEFRA continues to closely monitor the situation in Europe, and engage with experts and manufacturers on the issue of vaccine development and authorisation for other serotypes of bluetongue.
	However, currently BTV8 is the only vaccine that can legally be used in the UK, and farmers should not wait for BTV1 or bivalent vaccine to become available this year. We remain at risk from BTV8 and we are working with the industry-led JAB campaign to encourage farmers to vaccinate to protect themselves at the earliest convenient opportunity.

Bovine Tuberculosis

James Paice: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs which  (a) counties and  (b) parishes had been free of bovine tuberculosis in the four years prior to (i) 1997 and (ii) 2007.

Jane Kennedy: The information requested is provided in the tables.
	
		
			  (a)(i) Table 1—Counties( 1)  in England without a bovine TB incident (unconfirmed or confirmed) 1994-97 inclusive 
			  Animal health region  County with no bovine TB (unconfirmed or confirmed) 
			 East Greater London 
			 East Isle of Wight 
			 East Middlesex 
			 West Isles of Scilly 
		
	
	
		
			  (a)(ii) Table 2—Counties( 1)  in England without a bovine TB incident (unconfirmed or confirmed) 2004-07 inclusive 
			  Animal health region  County with no bovine TB (unconfirmed or confirmed) 
			 East Hertfordshire 
			 North Tyne and Wear 
			 West Isles of Scilly 
		
	
	
		
			  (b)(i) Table 3—Number of parishes without a bovine TB incident (unconfirmed or confirmed) by county( 1)  1994-97 inclusive 
			  Animal health region  County  Number of parishes with no bovine TB (unconfirmed or confirmed)  Percentage of parishes with no bovine TB (unconfirmed or confirmed) 
			 East Bedfordshire 116 95.1 
			 East Berkshire 102 94.4 
			 East Buckinghamshire 202 97.6 
			 East Cambridgeshire 267 99.3 
			 East East Sussex 97 85.8 
			 East Essex 293 98.3 
			 East Greater London 14 100.0 
			 East Hampshire 263 98.1 
			 East Hertfordshire 135 99.3 
			 East Isle of Wight 28 100.0 
			 East Kent 324 98.8 
			 East Leicestershire 269 92.1 
			 East Middlesex 19 100.0 
			 East Norfolk 542 99.6 
			 East Northamptonshire 261 97.0 
			 East Oxfordshire 315 97.5 
			 East Suffolk 475 99.6 
			 East Surrey 99 96.1 
			 East Warwickshire 214 96.0 
			 East West Midlands 27 96.4 
			 East West Sussex 161 96.4 
			 North Cheshire 315 93.5 
			 North Cleveland 34 94.4 
			 North Cumbria 252 87.8 
			 North Derbyshire 252 88.7 
			 North Durham 162 96.4 
			 North Greater Manchester 69 90.8 
			 North Humberside 246 97.2 
			 North Lancashire 209 88.6 
			 North Lincolnshire 526 97.0 
			 North Merseyside 35 94.6 
			 North Yorkshire 984 99.4 
			 North Northumberland 149 90.9 
			 North Nottinghamshire 239 96.4 
			 North Staffordshire 171 86.8 
			 North Tyne and Wear 29 96.7 
			 West Avon 69 50.7 
			 West Cornwall 61 29.0 
			 West Devon 250 57.6 
			 West Dorset 214 77.8 
			 West Gloucestershire 128 48.9 
			 West Hereford and Worcester 309 70.7 
			 West Isles of Scilly 5 100.0 
			 West Shropshire 218 88.3 
			 West Somerset 222 66.3 
			 West Wiltshire 209 74.9 
			 Total number of parishes with no TB  9,580  
		
	
	
		
			  (b)(ii) Table 4—Number of parishes without a bovine TB incident (unconfirmed or confirmed) by county( 1)  2004-07 inclusive 
			  Animal health region  County  Number of parishes with no bovine TB (unconfirmed or confirmed)  Percentage of parishes with no bovine TB (unconfirmed or confirmed) 
			 East Bedfordshire 120 98.4 
			 East Berkshire 98 90.7 
			 East Buckinghamshire 185 89.4 
			 East Cambridgeshire 267 99.3 
			 East East Sussex 87 77.0 
			 East Essex 297 99.7 
			 East Greater London 14 100.0 
			 East Hampshire 236 88.1 
			 East Hertfordshire 136 100.0 
			 East Isle of Wight 26 92.9 
			 East Kent 317 96.6 
			 East Leicestershire 236 80.8 
			 East Middlesex 18 94.7 
			 East Norfolk 533 98.0 
			 East Northamptonshire 240 89.2 
			 East Oxfordshire 294 91.0 
			 East Suffolk 470 98.5 
			 East Surrey 95 92.2 
			 East Warwickshire 160 71.7 
			 East West Midlands 24 85.7 
			 East West Sussex 158 94.6 
			 North Cheshire 248 73.6 
			 North Cleveland 32 88.9 
			 North Cumbria 209 72.8 
			 North Derbyshire 159 56.0 
			 North Durham 159 94.6 
			 North Greater Manchester 69 90.8 
			 North Humberside 234 92.5 
			 North Lancashire 216 91.5 
			 North Lincolnshire 528 97.4 
			 North Merseyside 34 91.9 
			 North Yorkshire 934 94.3 
			 North Northumberland 139 84.8 
			 North Nottinghamshire 235 94.8 
			 North Staffordshire 79 40.1 
			 North Tyne and Wear 30 100.0 
			 West Avon 40 29.4 
			 West Cornwall 22 10.5 
			 West Devon 60 13.8 
			 West Dorset 134 48.7 
			 West Gloucestershire 59 22.5 
			 West Hereford and Worcester 110 25.2 
			 West Isles of Scilly 5 100.0 
			 West Shropshire 113 45.7 
			 West Somerset 150 44.8 
			 West Wiltshire 131 47.0 
			 Total number of parishes with no TB  8,140  
			 (1) Counties as recorded on the Animal Health Vetnet system.  Source: Data for Tables 1-4 have been drawn from the Animal Health Vetnet system, the TB in Cattle System and the Veterinary Laboratories Agency's TB Culture System.

Departmental Rail Travel

Michael Penning: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what the cost to his Department was of travel by train by its staff in each year since 1997.

Huw Irranca-Davies: DEFRA came into being in June 2001. From available information held centrally the cost of travel by train by staff from April 2006 to January 2009 inclusive was as follows:
	April 2006 to March 2007: £2,135,127
	April 2007 to March 2008: £2,450,197
	April 2008 to January 2009: £2,232,893

Fisheries: International Cooperation

Mark Williams: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs pursuant to the answer to the hon. Member for Stoke-on-Trent North (Joan Walley) of 9 October 2008,  Official Report, column 732W, on fisheries: international co-operation, whether he plans to make an assessment of the effectiveness of the Joint Committee.

Huw Irranca-Davies: holding answer 20 March 2009
	 UK officials have attended these meetings and have found them a useful forum to discuss potential difficulties and agree practical solutions.

Floods: Canvey Island

Bob Spink: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs pursuant to the answer of 9 March 2009,  Official Report, columns 5-6W, on floods: Canvey Island, if he will place in the Library a copy of the recent letter from Councillor Ray Howard to the Environment Agency on development in flood risk areas such as Canvey Island; on what dates the Environment Agency  (a) received and  (b) replied to communications from Councillor Howard on the issue in the last three years; what the content of such communications was; and if he will make a statement.

Huw Irranca-Davies: I have placed a copy of Councillor Ray Howard's recent letter in the Library. The Environment Agency's Eastern Area of Anglian Region has no record of having received or replied to other correspondence from Councillor Ray Howard in the last three years on the subject of development in flood risk areas such as Canvey Island.

Incinerators: Hazardous Substances

Andrew Smith: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs with reference to the answer of 14 July 2008,  Official Report, column 32W, on incinerators: waste disposal, if he will publish the results of the public consultation on H14 ecotoxicity testing held in October 2007.

Jane Kennedy: holding answer 18 March 2009
	The results of the consultation were a revision to the Environment Agency's guidance on hazardous waste, WM2 which is published on its website.

Tourism: Rural Areas

Tobias Ellwood: To ask the Secretary of State for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs what funding his Department makes available to assist tourism in rural areas; and on what criteria such funds are allocated.

Huw Irranca-Davies: The Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs (DEFRA) does not hold lead responsibility for supporting or promoting rural tourism. This sits with the Department for Culture, Media and Sport, DCMS.
	However, the Rural Development Programme for England 2007-13, a joint EU-DEFRA funded programme, provides support to improve quality of life in rural areas and diversify the rural economy. This includes support to encourage rural tourism. Over the seven year life of the programme around €38 million (around £35 million), has been allocated to this measure.
	This funding has been devolved to regional development agencies to decide how it is spent in their regions to create a sustainable countryside and communities where people want to live, work and visit, now and in the future. The funding will help business to make use of the natural and cultural resources in England's rural areas to attract visitors and create new employment opportunities through the development of the tourism sector. Around £5.8 million has already been committed by the regional development agencies to projects and programmes of investment that support rural tourism.

CULTURE MEDIA AND SPORT

Cycling

Andrew Rosindell: To ask the Secretary of State for Culture, Media and Sport how many velodromes he has visited on official business in the last 12 months.

Andy Burnham: In the last 12 months I have visited two velodromes on official business.

Departmental Disciplinary Proceedings

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Culture, Media and Sport how many incidences of  (a) bullying and (ii) harassment were recorded in his Department in each of the last three years; and how many staff have been subject to disciplinary procedures as a result of such incidents.

Gerry Sutcliffe: There have been no bullying or harassment cases in the last three years in DCMS.

Gaming Machines

Don Foster: To ask the Secretary of State for Culture, Media and Sport how much and what percentage of the Tote's revenue came from category B2 gaming machines in 2007-08.

Gerry Sutcliffe: The Tote switched to a new generation of gaming machines in the middle of the 2008 financial year. In its annual report and accounts for 2008, the Tote did not report the mix of revenue between over the counter betting and gaming machine business in its licensed betting offices. This was because the information was deemed by the Tote to be commercially sensitive as it would allow its competitors to benchmark machine performance and inform their choices. That position has not altered and the Tote remains of the view that machine revenue is commercially sensitive information.

Licensing Laws: Music

Tobias Ellwood: To ask the Secretary of State for Culture, Media and Sport when he plans to hold a consultation on exemptions from the Licensing Act 2003 for low risk music events.

Gerry Sutcliffe: holding answer 24 March 2009
	 No date has been set for a consultation on this matter. The Department for Culture, Media and Sport continues to consider how best to encourage live music, including the possibility of workable exemptions from the Licensing Act 2003. Any exemption would maintain necessary public protections in accordance with the licensing objectives.

Metal Detecting

Tim Loughton: To ask the Secretary of State for Culture, Media and Sport whether the Government plan to respond to English Heritage's Nighthawking Survey report; and if he will make a statement.

Barbara Follett: English Heritage is preparing an implementation plan to take forward the recommendations of the Nighthawking Survey; English Heritage expects this to be ready before the summer.

Swimming

Andrew Rosindell: To ask the Secretary of State for Culture, Media and Sport how many swimming pools he has visited on official business in the last 12 months.

Andy Burnham: In the last 12 months I have visited five swimming pools on official business.

Swimming: Finance

Andy Reed: To ask the Secretary of State for Culture, Media and Sport whether local authorities which have currently opted out of the Government's free swimming scheme will have the opportunity to access funding from it at a later date.

Andy Burnham: We have given those local authorities who withdrew their expression of interest in the under 16s element of the scheme one final opportunity to opt back in before the Free Swimming Programme launches on 1 April. When the scheme is launched, there will not be an opportunity for non-participating local authorities to participate. We will be closely monitoring the impact of the scheme over its two year duration to inform any future funding and delivery arrangements.

HOME DEPARTMENT

Airguns: Children

Anne McIntosh: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what restrictions are in place on the sale of ball-bearing guns to children.

Alan Campbell: Ball-bearing guns which fire small plastic pellets are usually referred to as airsoft or BB guns. They are not lethal and are treated in law as imitation firearms. The Violent Crime Reduction Act 2006 made it an offence to sell an imitation firearm to someone aged under 18, and for someone aged under 18 to buy one.

Children: Safety

Paul Goodman: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what finance and support her Department provided for the production of series  (a) one,  (b) two and  (c) three of the Kids Taskforce Watch over me DVD.

Alan Campbell: The Home Office provided the following support and finance for the production of the Kids Taskforce Watch over me DVD.
	 (a) Series One—No Funding
	 (b) Series Two—£400,000 (with a small amount going towards research for the third series).
	 (c) Series Three—No funding outside that mentioned above.
	 Other support
	Additionally, in 2008-09, £480,000 was given from the Home Office and DCSF to the Association of Chief Police Officers (ACPO) to pay for the copyright of The Kids Taskforce Watch Over Me DVDs for three years supplemented by 60 training days for teachers and partners. ACPO, DCSF and the Home Office are working with The Kids Taskforce on the national roll out of the DVD.
	The Minister for Security, Counter-Terrorism, Crime and Policing also attended the launch of the third series at a reception at the CEOP Centre on 5 December 2006.

Crime: Motor Vehicles

David Amess: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how many vehicles of each type have been seized in each police force area under section 165A of the Road Traffic Act 1988 in each year since 2005.

Alan Campbell: This information is not collected centrally.
	I understand from information submitted by police forces to the motor insurance industry's Motor Insurance Database that in 2007 153,822 vehicles were seized under this power for being driven without insurance and that approximately 185,000 were seized in 2008. The type of vehicle is not identified.

Crimes of Violence: Females

Theresa May: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department which Ministers attended her summit on violence against women on 9 March 2009.

Alan Campbell: The cross-Government consultation paper entitled 'Together We Can End Violence Against Women and Children' was launched at a breakfast roundtable on Monday 9 March, 2009. Ministers who attended this launch event are:
	Rt. Hon. Jacqui Smith, Home Secretary
	Rt. Hon. Alan Johnson, Secretary of State for Health
	Baroness Morgan of Drefelin, Parliamentary Under-Secretary of State and Government Spokesperson, Department for Children, Schools and Families
	Vera Baird, Solicitor-General
	Vernon Coaker, Minister of State for the Home Office
	Alan Campbell, Parliamentary Under-Secretary of State for the Home Office

Crimes of Violence: Telephone Services

David Burrowes: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what freephone 24-hour telephone lines her Department provides for victims of violent crime.

Alan Campbell: holding answer 23 March 2009
	The Government provide funds to a matrix of national helplines which provide support and information to the public who may be experiencing problems related to violent crime. Of these, the National Domestic Violence Helpline is the only freephone 24-hour telephone line.
	In addition, the Government provide funding to Victim Support to provide services to victims of crime and witnesses. Part of the annual Grant in Aid provides funding for the national Victim Support line. This is a telephone helpline offering emotional support and practical advice to victims who call. An annual grant is also provided to SAMM (Support After Murder and Manslaughter). This charity provides support and advice to those bereaved by homicide. Both of these are national helplines but not 24 hours and calls are charged at a local rate.

Detection Rates

Frank Field: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what the detection rate was for incidents of violence against the person reported to the police in each month in the last two years.

Alan Campbell: holding answer 9 March 2009
	Police forces in England and Wales are asked to provide monthly cumulative data for use in the Home Office's quarterly and annual crime statistics publication. However, the validation processes relate to quarterly rather than monthly data and therefore quarterly data for detection rates for violence against the person are given in the table. Detection rates are a ratio of crimes detected in a period to crimes recorded in a period. They are not based on tracking individual crimes recorded in a period as to whether they are eventually detected.
	From 1 April 2007 the rules governing recording of non-sanction detections were revised to reduce the scope within which they can be claimed to a very small limited set of circumstances. This has significantly reduced the number of non-sanction detections which has been reflected in the overall detection rates.
	
		
			  Quarterly detection rates for offences of violence against the person recorded by the police, 2006-07 and 2007-08 
			  Quarter  Detection rate ( Percentage ) 
			  2006-07  
			 April to June 2006 47 
			 July to September 2006 49 
			 October to December 2006 52 
			 January to March 2007 55 
			   
			  2007-08  
			 April to June 2007 47 
			 July to September 2007 48 
			 October to December 2007 50 
			 January to March 2008 50

Human Trafficking

Anthony Steen: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department how much funding was made available to the Metropolitan Police for its Human Trafficking Unit in 2008-09; how much she plans to allocate in 2009-10; what assessment she has made of the unit's work; and if she will make a statement.

Alan Campbell: holding answer 4 March 2009
	In 2008-09 a total of £600,000 was given by the ACPO lead for Organised Immigration Crime to the Metropolitan Police towards the costs of Operation Maxim, including the dedicated human trafficking team.
	The work of the team, as part of the wider Operation Maxim, is highly regarded. But the grant is time-limited with an expectation that this work will be mainstreamed into existing police budgets as part of core business.

Human Trafficking

Anthony Steen: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department pursuant to the answer of 4 March 2009 to Question 260378, when she expects to reply to the letters from the hon. Member for Totnes of 24 November 2008 and 22 January 2009 on advice to the Government on the implementation of the Council of Europe Convention on Action Against Trafficking in Human Beings.

Alan Campbell: holding answer 19 March 2009
	A reply was sent to the hon. Member on 19 March 2009.

Human Trafficking: Europol

Keith Vaz: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what Europol's targets are for tackling international human trafficking offences.

Alan Campbell: Europol's work is central to the United Kingdom's European-wide efforts to combat this heinous crime. In this respect Europol has an excellent working relationship with both the UKHTC and SOCA.
	Detailed information on the work carried out by Europol is contained in their Annual Report which we anticipate will be published in the near future.

Human Trafficking: Southampton

Sandra Gidley: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what her latest estimate is of the numbers of  (a) people who have been trafficked into the UK through Southampton and  (b) victims of human trafficking in Southampton and the surrounding area; what steps are being taken to reduce those numbers; and if she will make a statement.

Alan Campbell: The nature of the crime makes it very difficult to estimate the problem faced by the United Kingdom through its ports. However, we have previously estimated that at any one time in 2003 there were up to 4,000 victims of trafficking for sexual exploitation in the UK. We hope to have a new figure by the end of the year.
	All estimates are national in scale however. More robust data on the geographical location of victims will be collected with the introduction of the National Referral Mechanism which comes into force on 1 April 2009.

Immobilisation of Vehicles

Greg Knight: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what changes to regulations regarding wheel clamping on private land she plans to make; and if she will make a statement.

Alan Campbell: holding answer 18 March 2009
	Ministers have recently received the results of the feasibility study undertaken by the Security Industry Authority (SIA) on the options for the compulsory licensing of vehicle immobilisation companies who work on private land in England and Wales. We are now working with the SIA to develop further their proposals.

Licensed Premises

Roberta Blackman-Woods: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what assessment she has made of the effects of premises with late alcohol licences on levels of disorderly behaviour in the surrounding area.

Alan Campbell: The most recently published report, The impact of the Licensing Act 2003 on levels of crime and disorder: an evaluation (2008) by Hough et al, found that violent offences between 3 am and 6 am had increased by 236 incidents in the first year following the introduction of the Act. These offences represent 4 per cent. of all night time offences. Overall the review found that crimes involving violence during the whole evening and night-time had reduced.
	To understand what is happening in the 3 am to 6 am period, we will undertake further comprehensive research into post-midnight drinking patterns and their impact on crime and disorder.
	The Government are determined to tackle alcohol related crime and disorder, this is why the Home Secretary recently announced a new mandatory code of practice to target the most irresponsible retail practices, a £3 million cash injection for CDRPs for partnership activities in 190 areas and a further £1.5 million for police enforcement in our priority areas.

Licensed Premises

Roberta Blackman-Woods: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what assessment she has made of the effects of the operation of the Licensing Act 2003 on levels of disorderly behaviour.

Alan Campbell: The first review of the Licensing Act reveals a mixed picture. Some people appear to be using the freedoms and are not sufficiently using the considerable powers granted by the Act to tackle problems. There is a need to rebalance action towards enforcement to tackle irresponsible behaviour.
	Actions in response to the review of the Licensing Act include: increase the fine for anyone not obeying an instruction to stop drinking in a DPPO area to £2500 from £500, make it easier for the Police to disperse antisocial drinkers, extend the use of acceptable behaviour contracts and to extend the arrest referral pilots to include under 18s. We are working across Government to take these actions forward.
	The Government are determined to tackle further alcohol related crime and disorder, this is why the Home Secretary recently announced a new mandatory code of practice to target the most irresponsible retail practices, a £3 million cash injection for CDRPs for partnership activities in 190 areas and a further £1.5 million for police enforcement in our priority areas.

Penalty Notices

Anne McIntosh: To ask the Secretary of State for the Home Department what guidance she has issued to police officers on the issuing of penalty notices for disorder in  (a) police stations and  (b) other locations.

David Hanson: I have been asked to reply.
	The Government have issued operational guidance on the issuing of penalty notices for disorder (pnds) to police forces under section 6 of the Criminal Justice and Police Act 2001. This guidance sets out the criteria which should be considered by police officers before issuing a pnd in police stations and other locations.
	The current guidance was published in March 2005; a copy can be found at:
	www.police.homeoffice.gov.uk/pnd
	This is now subject to review.

FOREIGN AND COMMONWEALTH AFFAIRS

Bahrain: Asylum

Michael Ancram: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs what recent representations he has received from the Government of Bahrain on the granting of asylum to Bahraini citizens in the UK.

Bill Rammell: The issue of asylum was most recently discussed between the Bahraini Minister of the Interior, Sheikh Rashid, and my hon. Friend the Minister for Borders and Immigration in the Home Office on 12 March.
	The Government have received no formal representations but the subject has occasionally been discussed at official level with Bahraini Interlocutors.

Burma: Religious Freedom

John Bercow: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs 
	(1)  what representations he has made to the Burmese Government over the recent closure of house churches and Christian-run orphanages in Rangoon;
	(2)  what reports he has received of the number of orphanages and child care centres run by Christian groups in Rangoon that have recently closed down.

Bill Rammell: We are concerned by reports that the Burmese authorities have closed places of worship for religious minorities and child care centres run by Christian groups in Rangoon. We condemn the marginalisation or persecution of any community based on their religious beliefs or ethnic background. Although it makes the reported abuses no less serious, we believe that the persecution of religious minority groups by the Burmese authorities is often based on their ethnicity and perceived threat to security rather than their faith. We view the regime's actions as part of a wider deterioration in the human rights situation in Burma.
	The issue of religious freedom is within the mandate of UN Special Rapporteur for Human Rights in Burma, Tomas Ojea Quintana, which covers human rights and fundamental freedoms. We hold regular discussions with Mr. Quintana and his team concerning the human rights abuses we believe to be taking place in Burma, and fully support his efforts. Our ambassador in Burma regularly raises the issue of human rights in his meetings with Burmese Government officials.

Hezbollah

Andrew Dismore: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs for what reasons the Government have changed their policy on engaging with Hezbollah's political wing.

Bill Rammell: This is in light of more positive recent political developments in Lebanon, which have moved Lebanon away from the polarised and tense political scene of previous years. This includes progress in national reconciliation talks and the formation of the National Unity Government in which Hezbollah are participating. We believe that occasional and carefully considered contacts with Hezbollah's political representatives will best advance our objective of urging Hezbollah to reject violence and play a constructive, democratic and peaceful role in Lebanese politics in line with UN Security Council Resolutions.

Hezbollah

Andrew Gwynne: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs what information his Department holds on violations of UN Security Council resolutions 1559 (2004) and 1701 (2006) by Hezbollah and other armed groups in Lebanon.

Bill Rammell: The UN Secretary General reports quarterly to the Security Council on the implementation of United Security Council Resolution (UNSCR) 1701. The latest report was issued in March 2009.
	The UN Secretary General's final report to Members on UNSCR 1559 was issued in October 2008. This provided an update on progress in the implementation of the resolution and highlights areas of concern that continue to impede efforts to strengthen Lebanon's sovereignty, territorial integrity and political independence.
	All these reports are available on the UN website at:
	http://www.un.org/Docs/sc/sgrep09.htm.

Hezbollah

Andrew Gwynne: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs what reports he has received of Hezbollah's renunciation of the use of violence.

Bill Rammell: We regret that Hezbollah has not yet renounced the use of violence. However we assess that there is a distinction between those members of Hezbollah who are legitimately involved in Lebanese politics and those who are involved in violence and terrorism. We proscribed the military wing in July 2008. We continue to urge Hezbollah to reject violence and play a constructive, democratic and peaceful role in Lebanese politics, in line with UN Security Council Resolutions.

Hezbollah

Andrew Gwynne: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs 
	(1)  what steps he has taken to encourage the Governments of  (a) Syria and  (b) Iran to prevent the replenishment of missile stocks held by Hezbollah in Lebanon;
	(2)  what steps he has taken to prevent funding being provided to Hezbollah by the Governments of  (a) Syria and  (b) Iran.

Bill Rammell: We call on both the Governments of Syria and Iran to cease their support for Hezbollah, which only increases instability in the region. During my right hon. Friend the Foreign Secretary's visit to Syria in November 2008, he raised this issue with President Assad. We have serious concerns about Iranian support for Hezbollah. Such support is unacceptable and only serves to undermine regional security. Funding for arms supplies to Hezbollah is contrary to the arms embargo established by United Nations Security Council Resolution 1701.

Hezbollah

Andrew Gwynne: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs what estimate he has made of the number of  (a) long- and  (b) short-range missiles held by Hezbollah in Lebanon.

Bill Rammell: Since the end of the 2006 Lebanon conflict, we estimate that Hezbollah has replenished its holdings of short and long-range rockets and missiles. This is based upon both statements by Hassan Nasrallah, Secretary General of Hezbollah and other sources of information. However, we lack definitive figures.

Hezbollah

Andrew Gwynne: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs what discussions he had with  (a) President Assad and  (b) Foreign Minister Muallem on establishing contact with Hezbollah during his visit to Syria in November 2008; and what response was received from each.

Bill Rammell: My right hon. Friend the Foreign Secretary did not raise the issue of establishing contact with Hezbollah during his visit to Syria in November 2008.

Hezbollah

Andrew Gwynne: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs when his Department last made an assessment of Hezbollah's involvement in terrorist activity; and what the findings of that assessment were.

Bill Rammell: In July 2008 a thorough assessment of all the components of Hezbollah was carried out to establish a distinction between those members of Hezbollah who are legitimately involved in Lebanese politics and those who are involved in violence and support terrorism. As a result of this assessment the decision was made by the Home Office to proscribe the military wing, which we specified as the Jihad Council and all units reporting to it.

Hezbollah

Andrew Gwynne: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs what his latest estimate is of the  (a) size and  (b) strength of Hezbollah's militia; and what reports he has received on progress towards its disarmament.

Bill Rammell: Hezbollah has not revealed its armed strength publicly, and estimates vary widely. These estimates suggest that Hezbollah's militia consists of a small core of experienced fighters supplemented with much larger numbers of volunteers/reservists.
	The latest Secretary General Report on United Nations Security Council Resolution (UNSCR) 1701 stated that Hezbollah continues to maintain a substantial military capacity distinct from that of the Lebanese State, in direct contravention of UNSCRs 1559 and 1701. The report welcomes the national dialogue as a means to take forward disarmament through a Lebanese-led political process.
	All these reports are available on the UN website at:
	http://www.un.org/Docs/sc/sgrep09.htm.

Middle East: Armed Conflict

Jeff Ennis: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs 
	(1)  what reports he has received on the  (a) physical and  (b) psychological effects of rocket and mortar attacks fired from the Gaza Strip on residents in southern Israel;
	(2)  what reports he has received on the disruption to the education of the school pupils of southern Israel as a result of rocket and mortar attacks fired from the Gaza Strip.

Bill Rammell: Our ambassador and officials from our embassy in Tel Aviv frequently travel to towns in southern Israel that have been subject to indiscriminate rocket fire from terrorist groups in Gaza. They have called on schools, hospitals, families and community leaders in and around Sderot and Ashkelon to assess the impact of rocket and mortar attacks. My right hon. Friend the Foreign Secretary also visited Sderot in November 2008, and I went to Ashkelon in December 2008. In recent months the frequency and indiscriminate nature of the attacks that target citizens has had a highly damaging impact on people's everyday lives in these areas. The extent of the psychological damage, especially to children, is clear. In addition to the psychological damage to children, the need to shelter from attacks whilst at school has had a disruptive effect on education. Likewise, the general disruption and physical threat of rocket fire has impeded economic growth and deterred investment. We continue to condemn all terrorist attacks, on southern Israel and elsewhere.

Middle East: Peace Negotiations

Michael Ancram: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs if he will discuss with the US Administration the likely effects of recent developments in the political situation in Israel on the middle east peace process.

Bill Rammell: We are in regular dialogue with the US Administration. My right hon. Friend the Foreign Secretary met with both the US Secretary of State Hillary Clinton and Senator Mitchell on 18 March 2009. They discussed a number of issues related to the middle east peace process. Both the US and the UK look forward to working with a new Israeli Government towards a lasting peace in the region.

North Korea: Politics and Government

Michael Ancram: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs what recent discussions he has had with the US Administration on the political situation in North Korea.

Bill Rammell: My right hon. Friend the Foreign Secretary has regular conversations with the US Secretary of State, but they have not discussed North Korea recently. However, our embassy in Washington is in regular contact with US officials dealing with North Korea and we are co-ordinating positions closely in response to North Korea's plan to launch a satellite next month.

Pakistan: Foreign Relations

Michael Ancram: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs what discussions he has had with the President of Pakistan in the last four weeks.

Bill Rammell: I have been in regular contact with President Zardari. My discussions covered a number of issues including the appointment of Sir Sherard Cowper-Coles as the UK's Special Representative for Afghanistan and Pakistan, stability in Pakistan's federally administered tribal areas and the Swat region, prosecuting those responsible for the attacks in Mumbai and the recent political crisis in Pakistan. On the latter I encouraged all parties to come together in the interests of Pakistan and seek a peaceful resolution.

Palestinians: Politics and Government

Andrew Turner: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs what assessment he has made of the implications for the future of the Palestinian Government of Prime Minister Fayyad's decision to stand down; and if he will take steps to ensure that the Middle East peace process includes a unified Palestinian Government.

Bill Rammell: Mr Fayyad is still the Prime Minister of the Palestinian Government. The UK will continue to work towards a unified Palestinian Government. In Cairo, on 25 February 2009, my right hon. Friend the Foreign Secretary stated his support for Egyptian-sponsored efforts towards building a non-partisan, technocratic Government capable of working productively with the international community, which would allow Palestinians to focus jointly on economic development and preparation for elections. I re-emphasised this during the Foreign Affairs Committee evidence session on 4 March 2009.

Washington

David Heathcoat-Amory: To ask the Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs how many visits were made by Ministers to Washington DC in the financial year 2007-08.

Bill Rammell: There were 36 ministerial visits to Washington DC from April 2007 through to March 2008.

OLYMPICS

Inspire Mark

Andy Reed: To ask the Minister for the Olympics 
	(1)  how many sports clubs have been awarded the Inspire mark;
	(2)  how many sports projects have been awarded the Inspire mark;
	(3)  how many projects have been awarded the Inspire mark.

Tessa Jowell: The Inspire mark is awarded by the London Organising Committee of the Olympic Games and Paralympic Games (LOCOG) to high quality non-commercial projects and programmes inspired by 2012 that deliver achievements in sport, culture, volunteering, the environment and promoting business opportunities.
	So far, 93 projects have been awarded the Inspire mark, of which 18 have a significant sporting element.
	This first pilot phase for the mark has been predominantly cultural where, alongside nationwide projects and programmes from across all legacy themes, local projects across the nations and regions have been joining the Cultural Olympiad from its launch in September 2008. LOCOG will be targeting and supporting activity across all themes, including sport, this year.

Olympic Games 2012: Construction

Tom Brake: To ask the Minister for the Olympics how many people over the age of 21 defined by the Government Olympic Executive as local have undertaken training placements as part of the Olympic construction process.

Tessa Jowell: For the month of December 2008, 303 people on the Olympic Park declared themselves as a trainee or an apprentice; 69 of these held a permanent address in one of the five host boroughs and stated that they were over 21 years of age.
	In addition to this, to date 315 other individuals have benefited from training at the Plant Training centre on the Olympic Park operated by the National Construction College (NCC). As the centre is managed by a third party we do not hold the age data of candidates. However, 313 of these held a permanent address in one of the five host boroughs.
	Both sets of activity form part of the of the Olympic Delivery Authority's aim to place at least 2,250 people into trainee, apprenticeship, and work placements up to 2012.

Olympic Games 2012: Construction

Jamie Reed: To ask the Minister for the Olympics how many companies are engaged in building venues for the London 2012 Olympics; and how many of these businesses are based in the UK.

Tessa Jowell: There are currently seven Tier One contractors engaged in building venues for the London 2012 Olympic Games and Paralympic Games and all of these are registered in the UK. These include:
	
		
			  Company  Venue 
			 Balfour Beatty Group Ltd. Aquatics Centre 
			 Carillion plc International Broadcast Centre/Main Press Centre 
			 Dean & Dyball Ltd. Weymouth and Portland Sailing Academy 
			 ISG InteriorExterior plc Velodrome 
			 Sir Robert McAlpine Ltd. Olympic Stadium 
			 Galliford Try Infrastructure Ltd (trading as Morrison Construction) White Water Canoe Centre 
			 Lend Lease Ltd. Olympic Village 
		
	
	The Tier One contractors for Eton Dorney and the shooting venue are yet to be confirmed.
	To the end of January 2009, 881 businesses had won over £3.5 billion of work supplying the Olympic Delivery Authority; 98 per cent. are UK-based businesses, and just under half are based outside of London (45 per cent.).

Olympic Games 2012: Construction

Anne McIntosh: To ask the Minister for the Olympics what recent discussions she has had with the Minister responsible for horticulture on landscaping projects for the London Olympics 2012.

Tessa Jowell: The Landscape and Public Realm project has developed through extensive planning, consultation and design work involving local, metropolitan and national stakeholders, as well as the expertise of internationally recognised individuals and organisations.
	As part of this consultation programme, the Olympic Delivery Authority has consulted regularly with Natural England—the Government body tasked with the promotion of nature conservation and the enhancement of the natural landscape—and other stakeholders including the Environment Agency, British Waterways, the Lee Valley Regional Park Authority, the GLA's Biodiversity Unit and the Forestry Commission. The ODA, with the latter two organisations, has funded research into species selection in relation to climate change.
	We are committed to inclusive consultation and have encouraged as many people as possible to take the opportunity to contribute to the design of the emerging Olympic Park.

Olympic Games 2012: Construction

Jamie Reed: To ask the Minister for the Olympics how many non-UK European Union nationals are employed in the construction of the venues for the London 2012 Olympics.

Tessa Jowell: The figures for the contracted workforce at the end of October 2008, and released by the Olympic Delivery Authority (ODA) in December 2008, show that 86 per cent. of those employed on the Olympic Park were EU nationals, 63 per cent. of these were British and 8 per cent. were Irish. The number of non-UK European nationals employed on the Olympic Park at that time was therefore 23 per cent. These figures are a snap shot of the workforce at a particular point in time. All vacancies are advertised locally. The ODA and its partners have a range of measures in place to ensure local people can benefit from the employment and training opportunities that arise on the park.

Olympic Games 2012: Cumbria

Jamie Reed: To ask the Minister for the Olympics what assessment the Government Olympic Executive has made of the economic effects of the London 2012 Olympics on  (a) Cumbria and  (b) Copeland constituency.

Tessa Jowell: We are fully committed to maximising the economic benefits of the London 2012 Games across the UK particularly in these challenging economic times.
	We aim to do this through direct business opportunities from the London Organising Committee and Olympic Delivery Authority's (ODA) procurement. London 2012 expects to procure directly in the region of £6 billion worth of contracts, which will generate 75,000 supply chain opportunities.
	The London 2012 Business Network was specifically set up to provide businesses across the UK with access to contracts in the London 2012 supply chains, and any support they need to compete for them.
	I would encourage my hon. Friend to urge businesses in his constituency to register on CompeteFor, the electronic brokerage service for buyers and suppliers. Encouraging more businesses to register will ensure that they are in the running for Games related business. To the end of January 2009, 35 businesses registered in the North West had won a contract directly supplying the ODA. This includes one business registered in Cumbria. To date, no businesses registered in Copeland have won direct contracts.
	There are also wider opportunities for businesses beyond those in the construction supply chains, such as those arising in the tourism and media sectors and through inward investment and export.
	In addition, there will be skills initiatives such as the Personal Best programme which uses Games-inspired volunteering to help people to develop their skills for work. Building on the success of London, the North West will be one of the first regions to benefit by introducing this programme.

Olympic Games 2012: Cumbria

Jamie Reed: To ask the Minister for the Olympics what plans she has to involve schools  (a) in Copeland constituency,  (b) in Cumbria and  (c) elsewhere in the UK in events organised in as part of the London 2012 Olympics.

Tessa Jowell: We committed in our Legacy Action Plan to get thousands of schools and colleges throughout the country inspiring young people through the Olympic and Paralympic values and taking part in sport and other activities.
	We are creating a world class PE and sport system, able to offer every child five hours per week of quality sporting opportunities, including a broader range of non-traditional activities. Schools are central to our offer, and School Sports Partnerships—such as Copeland SSP, where 92 per cent. of pupils now participate in at least two hours per week—are playing a leading role in expanding the numbers of young people participating in sport.
	The London Organising Committee of the Olympic Games and Paralympic Games (LOCOG) has developed 'Get Set', the London 2012 Education programme which was launched in September 2008. This provides a variety of online resources for teachers and schools to use, as well as information on getting involved in Olympic-related events, such as last year's 'Make Your Mark' challenge which involved some 56,000 young people. LOCOG has also just launched a national competition for 16 to 21-year-olds in full or part-time education to create a new design to infill the London 2012 brand, creating a new official London 2012 education logo.
	According to LOCOG's latest figures, 3,676 schools, colleges and other education providers throughout the UK have registered to be part of 'Get Set'. 300 of these are based within the north-west region, and 47 within Cumbria itself. Statistics are not collated on a constituency basis. A full list of registered schools, and of activities, is available at
	www.london2012.com/getset

Olympic Games 2012: Expenditure

Andrew Rosindell: To ask the Minister for the Olympics how much had been spent on the Olympic stadium at the latest date for which figures are available; and what the estimated final cost of the stadium is.

Tessa Jowell: At the end of December 2008 £72 million had been spent on the Olympic Stadium project.
	The budget announced at the end of 2007 for the Olympic Stadium was £496 million. This was increased to £504 million to include £8 million of structural enhancements to the roof in relation to loading requirements for the opening and closing ceremonies.
	A number of potential cost pressures, estimated at £43 million, have been identified arising from:
	Possible scope requirements, including separate amendments to roof loading and provision for an external wrap;
	Contract negotiations and the development of the design.

Olympic Games 2012: Job Creation

Jamie Reed: To ask the Minister for the Olympics what her most recent estimate is of the number of permanent full-time jobs likely to result from the London 2012 Olympics.

Tessa Jowell: The latest stage of the Legacy Masterplan Framework (which will provide the blueprint for the regeneration of the Olympic Park and its surroundings) indicates that as a direct result of the London 2012 games the Olympic Park site has the potential to deliver 9,000-10,000 permanent jobs after the games. This is part of wider regeneration plans contained in the Lower Lea Valley Opportunity Area Planning Framework to deliver 50,000 jobs in the Lower Lea Valley area.
	Additionally, we anticipate significant employment opportunities during the lifetime of the programme. The Olympic Delivery Authority expects that 30,000 people will be employed on the Olympic Park and the Village over the life of the build project. This number will peak at 11,000 in 2010.

PRIME MINISTER

Future Aircraft Carriers

Julian Lewis: To ask the Prime Minister what factors he has identified as causing delays in the construction of the future aircraft carriers.
	 Question number missing in Hansard, possibly truncated question.

Harriet Harman: I have been asked to reply.
	I refer the hon. Member to the written statement made by my right hon. Friend the Secretary of State for Defence on 11 December 2008,  Official Report, columns 65-66WS.

INTERNATIONAL DEVELOPMENT

Darfur

Tony Baldry: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what recent assessment he has made of the humanitarian situation in Darfur; and if he will make a statement.

Ivan Lewis: The humanitarian situation in Darfur remains critical. The expulsion of 13 international NGOs and the closure of three national NGOs risks having a devastating impact. The UN Office for Humanitarian Affairs initially estimated that up to 1 million people could lose access to drinking water and sanitation, and up to 1.5 million will lose access to healthcare. We believe the Government of Sudan should reconsider this decision for the sake of their own people.

Gaza

Hugo Swire: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what recent assessment he has made of the humanitarian situation in Gaza.

Rosie Cooper: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what assessment he made of the humanitarian situation in the Gaza strip upon his recent visit to the region.

Douglas Alexander: I was horrified by what I saw in Gaza. It is clear that the humanitarian situation remains dire. Even now, nine weeks after the conflict ended, 97 per cent. of the population receive food aid, 50,000 people remain without running water and 10 per cent. of people still have no access to electricity. Over 15,000 homes have been destroyed or badly damaged and some families are housing up to 40 people in their homes.

Gaza

Lynda Waltho: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what recent assessment he has made of the humanitarian situation in Gaza.

Douglas Alexander: The humanitarian situation in Gaza remains dire. According to United Nations (UN) figures, even now, nine weeks after the conflict ended, 97 per cent. of the population receive food aid, 50,000 people remain without running water and 10 per cent. of people still have no access to electricity. Over 15,000 homes have been destroyed or badly damaged, as well as businesses and farms.
	I have pledged £30 million to support the first phase of reconstruction, known as 'early recovery'. This will help the most vulnerable people in Gaza rebuild their lives and ensure delivery of basic services.

G20 Summit

Andrew George: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what discussions he has had with ministerial colleagues on the Government's approach to the development agenda for the G20 summit.

Douglas Alexander: I have regular discussions with the Prime Minister, the Chancellor of the Exchequer and other members of the Cabinet as part of our ongoing preparations for the April 2 London summit. These discussions include international development issues.
	Our goal for the London summit is for leaders to agree to immediate action to support the global economy, safeguard jobs and protect the poorest. We know from past crises that it is the poorest who suffer most. The Government are working hard to make sure that the London summit agrees concrete actions to protect the poorest countries and most vulnerable people.

China

Adam Holloway: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what funding his Department has allocated to its bilateral aid programme for China for the next three years; and if he will make a statement.

Michael Foster: The allocations to China in 2009-10 and 2010-11 are £30 million and £20 million respectively. Any allocations for subsequent years will be determined during the next comprehensive spending round.

China

Andrew Robathan: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what funding his Department has allocated to its bilateral aid programme for China for 2009-10; and if he will make a statement.

Michael Foster: The allocation for China in 2009-10 is £30 million.

Aid Distribution Mechanisms

Nia Griffith: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what recent steps his Department has taken to improve its mechanisms for public accountability for its distribution of aid; and if he will make a statement.

Douglas Alexander: In line with the 2006 International Development (Reporting and Transparency) Act, the Department for International Development (DFID) provides annual reports to Parliament on the provision and use made of aid, and on aid-effectiveness and transparency. DFID has also established the Independent Advisory Committee on Development Impact to ensure independent, open, and transparent scrutiny of our development assistance. DFID is also committed to the International Aid Transparency Initiative, launched at the Accra High Level Forum on Aid Effectiveness in September 2008, which will make information about aid more available and accessible, helping the public to hold donors and Governments to account for the effective use of aid.

Burma: EU Aid

John Bercow: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what estimate he has made of the amount of EU cross-border aid to Burma in  (a) 2007 and  (b) 2008; and if he will make a statement.

Michael Foster: Comprehensive information on cross-border aid to Burma is not available.
	In 2007 the Department for International Development (DFID) agreed that its funding to the Thailand Burma Border Consortium (TBBC) may be used for cross-border programmes of support to internally displaced people in eastern Burma. DFID's contribution to TBBC was £770,000 in 2007-08 and £1 million in 2009-09. DFID has not stipulated what proportion of these contributions should be allocated to cross-border programmes. DFID plans to give £1.1 million to TBBC in 2009-10, a 10 per cent. increase over 2008-09.
	Several other EU member states, as well as the European Commission, give funding to TBBC. Overall the EU contributed about 55 per cent. of TBBC's income in 2008. The Commission does not allow its contributions to be used for Thailand Burma cross-border programmes. Other member states have their own individual policies on how their funding to TBBC may be used.
	DFID and the European Commission both contribute to cross-border health care provision from China to Kachin and Shan States in Burma. We estimate that spending on this programme, by UK financial year, was approximately:
	2007-08—£571,000 (£235,000 from the Commission; and £336,000 from DFID)
	2008-09—£426,000 (£204,000 from the Commission; and £222,000 from DFID)

Overseas Aid

James Gray: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what mechanisms to ensure co-ordination between countries which give aid to developing nations the UK participates in; and if he will make a statement.

Michael Foster: The UK Government strongly support and promote co-ordination among donors on both policy and implementation. At the global level the UK participates fully in co-ordination, for example through the Development Assistance Committee of the Organisation of Economic Co-operation and Development and the UN Development Co-operation Forum. The UK strongly supports the 2005 Paris Declaration on Aid Effectiveness and the 2008 Accra Agenda for Action (AAA) which contain specific commitments by donor countries and recipients to better co-ordinate development efforts. The UK is on target to meet all Paris Declaration targets by 2010.
	In accordance with Paris targets, UK seeks to align its country programmes with partner country priorities and to harmonise and co-ordinate with other donors. This is achieved through Joint Assistance Strategies with other donors, in support of partner Governments setting out their development policies and how they wish donors to provide development assistance. The UK also co-ordinates closely with other donors in co-financing partner country programmes.

Overseas Aid: Water

Claire Curtis-Thomas: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development pursuant to the Answer of 16 March 2009,  Official Report, column 873W, on Africa: water, how his Department's budget for its five-year water, sanitation and hygiene education programme is to be distributed.

Ivan Lewis: The Department for International Development (DFID) in 2008 committed £1 billion over five years to increase our efforts to improve access to water and sanitation in Africa. This funding will be distributed through our country programmes in those African countries that are currently most off-track in making progress against the millennium development goals (MDGs)—most notably, the Democratic Republic of Congo, Ethiopia, Nigeria, Sierra Leone and the Sudan.
	Further information on DFID's water and sanitation policy is available in the 2008 strategy "Water: an increasingly precious resource, Sanitation: a matter of dignity" which is on the DFID website:
	http://www.dfid.gov.uk/pubs/files/water-sanitation-policy-08.pdf

Sudan: Armed Conflict

John Bercow: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what estimate he has made of the monthly death rate in Darfur from  (a) violence and  (b) disease or malnutrition.

Ivan Lewis: It is not possible to obtain regular mortality figures in Darfur or to disaggregate by cause. The UN Emergency Relief Co-ordinator, John Holmes, has suggested that the conflict in Darfur may have caused up to 300,000 deaths since the beginning of the conflict in 2003.

Sudan: Internally Displaced Persons

John Bercow: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what estimate he has made of the number of displaced persons in Darfur in each of the last five years.

Ivan Lewis: The UN Office for the Co-ordination of Humanitarian Affairs (OCHA) has estimated that the number of people still internally displaced in Darfur at the end of each of the last five years as follows:
	
		
			   Number 
			 2004 1,843,091 
			 2005 1,790,096 
			 2006 2,060,420 
			 2007 2,420,970 
			 2008 2,667,682

Sudan: Internally Displaced Persons

John Bercow: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what recent estimate he has made of the number of internally displaced persons in camps in Darfur.

Ivan Lewis: The most recent estimate for internally displaced people (IDPs) in Darfur was undertaken by the UN Office for the Co-ordination of Humanitarian Affairs (OCHA) in January 2009, which reported 2,667,682 IDPs.

Sudan: Overseas Aid

John Bercow: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what the level of UK humanitarian aid to Darfur was in each of the last five years.

Ivan Lewis: The Department for International Development (DFID) does not systematically disaggregate humanitarian aid by region within Sudan. Most of DFID's humanitarian funding is channelled through the Common Humanitarian Fund (CHF) or appeal funding to the International Committee of the Red Cross (ICRC). According to Good Humanitarian Donorship principles, we cannot earmark funding by region within these instruments.

Sudan: Politics and Government

John Bercow: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what representations he has made to the Sudanese Government on the expulsion of aid agencies from Sudan.

Ivan Lewis: The British ambassador has urged the Government of Sudan (GoS) to allow NGOs to continue their work. The European Union (EU) issued a statement on 10 March calling upon GoS to urgently reconsider their decision, and ensure that continued humanitarian assistance to the most vulnerable people in Sudan be restored. European Foreign Ministers discussed the situation again on 16 March and reiterated this message. We have, through official and ministerial level contacts, urged China, Russia, and Sudan's African and Arab neighbours to press GoS to reverse their decision. The Secretary of State discussed this issue with regional African leaders, including Prime Minister Meles of Ethiopia, in the margins of the Africa Outreach meeting on 16 March. We have both had meetings with John Holmes, the UN's Emergency Relief Co-ordinator. The UN is having extensive discussions with GoS in country.

Zimbabwe: Overseas Aid

John Bercow: To ask the Secretary of State for International Development what the level of UK humanitarian aid to Zimbabwe will be in 2009-10.

Ivan Lewis: The UK has provided approximately £49 million in the financial year 2008-09 to Zimbabwe to tackle the humanitarian crisis. We envisage a similar scale of support for 2009-10 dependent on the political situation.

NORTHERN IRELAND

Departmental Official Hospitality

Robert Wilson: To ask the Secretary of State for Northern Ireland 
	(1)  what his Department's entertainment budget was in each of the last five years;
	(2)  how much his Department has spent on  (a) alcohol and  (b) food in each of the last five years.

Shaun Woodward: The Northern Ireland Office (NIO) records expenditure for entertainment, alcohol and food, under the description of either hospitality or catering. Due to the high volume of transactions within these expenditure areas it would be possible to extract the information only at disproportionate cost.
	The Northern Ireland Office's finance system is unable to provide prior year budget figures for five years, however, the following table shows the NIO's expenditure, excluding agencies and executive NDPBs, on hospitality and catering in the last five years:
	
		
			   Hospitality and catering expenditure (£000) 
			 2007-08 326 
			 2006-07 575 
			 2005-06 271 
			 2004-05 236 
			 2003-04 336 
		
	
	Hospitality events include Royal Garden Parties and receptions hosted at Hillsborough Castle, which acknowledge the contribution made by a wide range of people to life in Northern Ireland. These include representatives from the voluntary and business sectors and also the police and armed forces. The additional spending in 2006-07 is due to hospitality and catering costs relating to the political talks held at St. Andrews.
	All expenditure has to be incurred in accordance with the principles of Managing Public Money and the Treasury handbook on Regularity and Propriety.

Departmental Public Consultation

Shailesh Vara: To ask the Secretary of State for Northern Ireland how many public consultations his Department has conducted in the last 12 months; how long each consultation was open for; how many responses were received in each case; and what the cost of conducting each consultation was.

Shaun Woodward: My Department, excluding agencies and non-departmental public bodies, conducted 13 public consultations in the last 12 months. Of the 13 consultations, all were 12 weeks long with the exception of number seven and nine which were 19 and 16 weeks respectively. The following table shows how many responses were received in each case and what the cost of conducting each consultation was.
	
		
			  Consultation number  Number of responses received in each consultation  Cost of conducting each consultation( 1)  (£) 
			 1 0 92.52 
			 2 8 0 
			 3 4 356.54 
			 4 11 2,681.22 
			 5 3 0 
			 6 15 0 
			 7 22 2,235.83 
			 8 6 0 
			 9 82 31,994.84 
			 10 11 2,126.77 
			 11 13 2,088.09 
			 12 15 250.00 
			 13 29 109.30 
			 (1) In the cost of conducting each consultation staff time has not been taken into account.

Political Parties: Finance

Andrew MacKinlay: To ask the Secretary of State for Northern Ireland with reference to the letter from the hon. Member for Thurrock of 12 March 2009, on donations by Irish citizens and bodies to Northern Ireland political parties, if he will bring forward legislative proposals to prohibit a registered political party in Great Britain from transferring or donating funds to a registered political party in Northern Ireland.

Paul Goggins: Irish citizens and bodies may donate to Northern Ireland political parties but not to parties in Great Britain. To ensure that donations from Irish citizens and bodies cannot be made indirectly to parties in Great Britain, section 71C of the Political Parties, Elections and Referendums Act 2000 prevents Northern Ireland political parties from donating to recipients in Great Britain. There are no plans to bring forward legislative proposals to prevent parties in Great Britain from donating to Northern Ireland recipients.

Political Parties: Finance

Andrew MacKinlay: To ask the Secretary of State for Northern Ireland with reference to the letter from the hon. Member for Thurrock of 12 March 2009, on donations by Irish citizens and bodies to Northern Ireland political parties, if he will bring forward legislative proposals to restrict the list of permissible donors to registered political parties in Northern Ireland to those who are  (a) resident and  (b) registered as electors in (i) the UK and (ii) the Irish Republic.

Paul Goggins: The list of those permitted to donate to registered political parties in Northern Ireland includes those specified in section 54(2) of the Political Parties, Elections and Referendums Act 2000. In 2007, Parliament also agreed that the list should be extended to include Irish citizens and bodies specified in the Political Parties, Elections and Referendums Act 2000 (Northern Ireland Political Parties) Order 2007. There are no plans to further amend the list of permissible donors who may donate to Northern Ireland political parties.

TREASURY

Bank Notes

Gordon Prentice: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer what estimate he has made of the value of the monetary notes of each denomination of sterling paper currency in circulation on the latest date for which figures are available.

Ian Pearson: The following table summarises the total value of Bank of England notes in circulation as of 27 February 2009.
	
		
			   Bank of England notes in circulation (value in £ million) 
			 £5 1,302 
			 £10 6,304 
			 £20 28,089 
			 £50 8,691 
			 Total 44,386 
		
	
	The following table shows the figures reported for commercial banks that issue their own banknotes. These are estimates based on information reported to HM Revenue and Customs for the average of the four-week period ending 24 January 2009. Where numbers do not sum this is due to rounding.
	
		
			   Total value of notes of denomination £5 and upwards  Total value of notes of denomination under £5  Estimated commercial notes in circulation (value in £ million)  t otal 
			 Bank of Ireland 614.8 0.3 615.0 
			 First Trust Bank 333.8 0 333.8 
			 Northern Bank Ltd 304.9 0.4 305.3 
			 Ulster Bank Ltd 466 7 0 466.7 
			 Bank of Scotland 954.1 4.0 958.1 
			 Royal Bank of Scotland 1.147.1 16.8 1,163.9 
			 Clydesdale Bank 1,158.2 0 1,158.2

Banks: Finance

Dai Davies: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer what restrictions  (a) his Department and  (b) the Financial Services Authority have placed on the use of public money used to recapitalise British banks to provide loans made by banking subsidiaries of those banks operating outside the United Kingdom.

Ian Pearson: On 8 October 2008 the Government announced measures to support the stability of the financial system, protect ordinary savers, depositors, businesses and borrowers, and to safeguard the interests of the taxpayer.
	As part of their investment, the Government agreed with the banks supported by the recapitalisation scheme a range of commitments. Details are available at
	http://www.hm-treasury.gov.uk/press_105_08.htm.
	The Government's investment is managed on a commercial basis by UK Financial Investments Ltd. (UKFI), a company which is wholly owned by the Government. Its overarching objectives are to protect and create value for the taxpayer as a shareholder, with due regard to financial stability and acting in a way that promotes competition.

Borrowing: Insurance

Dai Davies: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer what recent complaints his Department has received from recipients of financial loans regarding payment protection insurance; and what recent investigations the Financial Services Authority has carried out on reported mis-selling of payment protection insurance on loans.

Ian Pearson: The Department has not received any complaints from recipients of financial loans regarding payment protection insurance in 2009.
	The second part of the question, on recent investigations, is a matter for the Financial Services Authority, and I have asked them to reply to the hon. Member.

Departmental Databases

Eleanor Laing: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer how many  (a) records and  (b) data categories there are in (i) the pay as you earn database, (ii) the Self Assessment database, (iii) the Tax Credits database, (iv) the Employment Framework, (v) the Citizen Identification Framework, (vi) the Primary and Secondary Tracking Framework, (vii) the National Insurance Recording system and (vii) the Child Benefit system.

Stephen Timms: The following table shows the number of records within the identified systems. There are many data categories of different kinds within each of the identified systems. A count of them all could be produced only at disproportionate cost.
	
		
			   Number (million) 
			 PAYE 58 
			 Self Assessment 15.5 
			 Tax Credits System 11.1 
			 Citizen Identification Framework 77 
			 Primary Tracing Framework (1)77 individuals 
			  (2)7.7 employers 
			 Secondary Tracing Framework (1)80 individuals 
			 Employments Framework (3)282 employments 
			  (2)7.7 employers 
			 National Insurance Recording System 71 
			 Child Benefit System 11 
			 (1) Individuals (2) Employers (3) Employments

Departmental Training

Greg Hands: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer pursuant to the Answer of 28 January 2009,  Official Report, column 585W, which Ministers attended each of the three courses; what the names of the courses were; and how much these courses cost.

Angela Eagle: As previously answered, identifying Ministers who undertake training would, or would be likely to, discourage participation in future training sessions, acting as a disincentive for Ministers to undertake formal professional development. Ministers have undertaken one Action Learning Set course and two media training courses. As previously disclosed, the cost of the three courses was £1,285.

Financial Services Authority: Standards

Justine Greening: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer 
	(1)  how many firms did not meet the Financial Services Authority's December 2008 Treating Customers Fairly scheme deadline; and what steps the authority took as a consequence;
	(2)  what criteria the Financial Services Authority used to determine whether a firm used unfair arrears management practice in its Treating Customers Fairly scheme;
	(3)  how many Arrow assessments the Financial Services Authority has  (a) conducted to date and  (b) planned for 2009 under its Treating Customers Fairly scheme;
	(4)  what mechanisms are in place to deal with firms which did not meet the Financial Services Authority's December 2008 deadline for its Treating Customers Fairly scheme;
	(5)  which firms are on the Financial Services Authority's Arrow Firm watch list; and how many have had  (a) one assessment,  (b) two assessments,  (c) three assessments,  (d) four assessments and  (e) more than five assessments since the implementation of the Authority's Treating Customers Fairly scheme;
	(6)  what review processes are used in an Arrow assessment by the Financial Services Authority;
	(7)  what estimate he has made of the number of customers dealt with by firms that did not comply with the Financial Services Authority's Treating Customers Fairly scheme in each of the last three years;
	(8)  what estimate he has made of the number of customers dealt with by firms on the Financial Services Authority's Arrow firm watch list in each of the last three years;
	(9)  how many  (a) mainstream and  (b) specialist lenders have been subject to Financial Services Authority investigation of their arrears management practices in each of the last three years; and how many were subsequently penalised;
	(10)  how many  (a) mainstream and  (b) specialist lenders were under supervision by the Financial Services Authority over their arrears management practices in each of the last three years;
	(11)  how many  (a) mainstream and  (b) specialist lenders have not met the Financial Services Authority's Treating Customers Fairly scheme conditions since the scheme's inception;
	(12)  what the targets to assess a firm's compliance with the Financial Services Authority's Treating Customers Fairly scheme are.

Ian Pearson: The matters raised in these questions are the responsibility of the Financial Services Authority, whose day to day operations are independent from Government control and influence. I have asked the FSA to write to the hon. Member.

Public Works Loan Board

Greg Hands: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer pursuant to the answer of 11 March 2009,  Official Report, column 420W, on the Public Works Loan Board, how much local authority debt borrowed from the Public Works Loan Board has been repaid in each of the last 18 months.

Angela Eagle: The amount of Public Works Loan Board debt repaid in each of the 18 months from 1 September 2007 is listed as follows:
	
		
			  £ 
			  Date  Total repayments 
			 September 2007 412,584,781.86 
			 October 2007 563,850,128.68 
			 November 2007 415,834,729.99 
			 December 2007 413,830,421.43 
			 January 2008 47,483,918.05 
			 February 2008 199,675,819.66 
			 March 2008 89,419,576.25 
			 April 2008 651,801,918.32 
			 May 2008 46,457,906.64 
			 June 2008 223,444,893.01 
			 July 2008 188,963,829.36 
			 August 2008 34,531,557.91 
			 September 2008 102,715,176.96 
			 October 2008 441,690,409.52 
			 November 2008 716,463,247.15 
			 December 2008 113,386,943.43 
			 January 2009 2,726,948,213.64 
			 February 2009 193,517,071.47

Quantitative Easing

Brooks Newmark: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer for what purposes his Department plans to use the £75 billion of Bank of England gilt purchases.

Ian Pearson: The Government's annual financing requirement is unaffected by purchases of gilts by the Bank of England. The impact of the Bank of England's purchases of gilts, which are bought by the Bank on the secondary market, is to increase the volume of gilts that are held by the Bank of England's Asset Purchase Facility Fund (BEAPFF) and to increase cash in the hands of the entities that have sold the gilts

Trident

Nick Harvey: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer when his Department's Major Projects Review Group is expected to complete its review of the future nuclear deterrent capability programme.

Yvette Cooper: Major Projects Review Group reviews are timetabled to suit the overall timetable of the project being reviewed. The Major Projects Review Group is expected to review the future nuclear deterrent programme in the second half of 2009. Each review takes approximately six to eight weeks to complete.

Written Questions: Government Responses

Justine Greening: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer when he plans to answer Question 244470, on the Modernisation Fund, tabled on 11 December 2008.

Yvette Cooper: I have now replied to the hon. Member and apologise for the delay.

Written Questions: Government Responses

Justine Greening: To ask the Chancellor of the Exchequer when he plans to answer Question 242249, on staff severance packages, tabled on 5 December 2008.

Angela Eagle: I have now done so.

JUSTICE

Alternatives to Prison: Finance

Dominic Grieve: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice what the budget for custody diversion teams was in  (a) 2008-09,  (b) 2007-08,  (c) 2006-07 and  (d) 2005-06.

Jack Straw: The Government believe that serious, dangerous and seriously persistent offenders should be sent to prison. A range of initiatives offer alternatives to custody where appropriate. None bears the name 'custody diversion team'.
	The Youth Justice Board runs two programmes delivering high intensity community alternatives to custody for young offenders under 18 years of age. These are the intensive supervision and surveillance programme (ISSP) and the intensive fostering (IF) programme. ISSP is available nationally; intensive fostering is being piloted in a programme that commenced in 2006-07. The budget for these programmes is listed in the table.
	
		
			  Budgets for intensive supervision and surveillance (ISSP) and intensive fostering (IF) programmes 2005-06 to 2008-09 
			  £ million 
			  Programme  2008-09  2007-08  2006-07  2005-06 
			 ISSP 34.0 33.4 32.0 32.0 
			 IF 4.1 1.5 1.5 — 
		
	
	The seven intensive alternative to custody (IAC) projects, outlined in my announcement on 5 December 2007, provide courts with enhanced community sentencing options, combining intensive supervision and demanding interventions to punish and reform adult offenders. The projects are designed to use current legislation to maximise the use of the community order in those cases where the court may be considering custody but where a community sentence may be more effective in reducing reoffending. The Government have made available a total of £13.9 million over three years (£2.7 million in 2008-09; £5.5 million in 2009-10 and £5.7 million in 2010-11).
	Adult offenders sentenced to Community Payback have, since 1 December 2008, been required to wear distinctive high visibility clothing to ensure that members of the public are aware when Community Payback by offenders is taking place. Intensive Community Payback of a minimum of 18 hours per week over three days is now available in all probation areas for unemployed offenders convicted of knife crime offences.
	The Government announced on 13 February 2009 investment of £15.6 million over two years to divert vulnerable women, who are not serious or dangerous offenders, from custody.
	There are other related strands of work including the Bail Accommodation and Support Service and mental health services.

Departmental Training

Greg Hands: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice pursuant to the answer of 29 January 2009,  Official Report, columns 740-1W, which Ministers in his Department attended the six action learning set training courses; and how much those courses cost.

Michael Wills: The Parliamentary Under-Secretary of State for Justice my hon. Friend the Member for Lewisham, East (Bridget Prentice) and my noble Friend, Lord Hunt of Kings Heath, then Parliamentary Under-Secretary of State for Justice attended the six action learning set courses, at a total cost of £1,400.

Driving Offences: Hampshire

Sandra Gidley: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice how many people in each age group have been  (a) charged and  (b) convicted of driving offences of each type in (i) Southampton and (ii) the ceremonial county of Hampshire in each of the last five years.

Shahid Malik: The number of proceedings at magistrates courts and findings of guilt at all courts for driving offences in Hampshire from 2003 to 2007 (latest available), broken down by age group are given in the following tables.
	Charging data are not collected centrally and prosecutions data are given in lieu. Information is collected at police force area level; figures for Southampton are not available.
	Data for 2008 will be available in the autumn of 2009.
	
		
			  Table 1: Number of persons proceeded against at magistrates courts for various motoring offences within Hampshire police force area by age group, 2003-07( 1, 2) 
			  Number of offences 
			2003  2004  2005 
			  Offences group  Offence type  under 21  21 and over  Total  under 21  21 and over  Total  under 21  21 and over  Total 
			 1 Causing death or bodily harm — 11 11 6 4 10 2 12 14 
			 2 Dangerous driving 87 181 268 93 191 284 60 156 216 
			 3 Driving etc, after consuming alcohol or taking drugs 557 3,484 4,041 563 3,558 4,121 493 3,206 3,699 
			 4 Careless driving 290 1,097 1,387 249 1,158 1,407 240 926 1,166 
			 5 Accident offences 177 709 886 165 695 860 123 493 616 
			 6 Unauthorised taking or theft of motor vehicle 663 480 1,143 579 359 938 500 348 848 
			 7 Driving licence related offences 3,111 9,528 12,639 2,649 9,005 11,654 2,103 7,099 9,202 
			 9 Vehicle insurance offences 3,571 11,721 15,292 3,057 11,311 14,368 2,481 8,953 11,434 
			 10 Vehicle registration and excise licence offences 354 8,482 8,836 347 8,237 8,584 253 5,756 6,009 
			 11 Work record and employment offences — 745 745 — 633 633 — 274 274 
			 12 Operator's licence offences — 63 63 1 68 69 — 27 27 
			 13 Vehicle test offences 2,140 7,929 10,069 1,671 6,861 8,532 1,189 4,926 6,115 
			 14 Fraud, forgery etc., associated with vehicle or driver records 44 380 424 38 348 386 27 176 203 
			 15 Vehicle or part in dangerous or defective condition 266 973 1,239 181 724 905 137 476 613 
			 16 Speed limit offences 333 5,344 5,677 286 4,339 4,625 333 5,178 5,511 
			 17 Motorway offences(other than speeding) 9 78 87 8 96 104 7 57 64 
			 18 Neglect of traffic directions 108 654 762 156 577 733 151 646 797 
			 19 Neglect of pedestrian rights 30 71 101 13 78 91 34 62 96 
			 20 Obstruction, waiting and parking offences 1 151 152 1 99 100 — 30 30 
			 21 Lighting offences 101 377 478 58 166 224 17 48 65 
			 22 Noise offences 26 109 135 22 80 102 19 50 69 
			 23 Load offences 6 213 219 1 138 139 — 55 55 
			 24 Offences peculiar to motor cycles 72 11 83 61 20 81 102 27 129 
			 25 Miscellaneous motoring offences 139 1,479 1,618 137 1,808 1,945 112 2,172 2,284 
			  Total all offences 12,085 54,270 66,355 10,342 50,553 60,895 8,383 41,153 49,536 
		
	
	
		
			  Number of offences 
			2006  2007 
			  Offences group  Offence type  under 21  21 and over  Total  under 21  21 and over  Total 
			 1 Causing death or bodily harm 3 3 6 3 22 25 
			 2 Dangerous driving 40 134 174 56 123 179 
			 3 Driving etc, after consuming alcohol or taking drugs 464 2,782 3,246 425 2,730 3,155 
			 4 Careless driving 192 818 1,010 253 1,273 1,526 
			 5 Accident offences 103 399 502 135 495 630 
			 6 Unauthorised taking or theft of motor vehicle 425 245 670 544 352 896 
			 7 Driving licence related offences 1,390 5,077 6,467 1,202 4,204 5,406 
			 9 Vehicle insurance offences 1,721 6,767 8,488 1,458 5,567 7,025 
			 10 Vehicle registration and excise licence offences 244 5,113 5,357 167 3,447 3,614 
			 11 Work record and employment offences 1 268 269 — 73 73 
			 12 Operator's licence offences — 16 16 — 10 10 
			 13 Vehicle test offences 594 2,765 3,359 275 1,252 1,527 
			 14 Fraud, forgery etc., associated with vehicle or driver records 10 128 138 12 95 107 
			 15 Vehicle or part in dangerous or defective condition 82 322 404 62 241 303 
			 16 Speed limit offences 299 4,680 4,979 433 4,891 5,324 
			 17 Motorway offences(other than speeding) 5 57 62 6 36 42 
			 18 Neglect of traffic directions 100 590 690 108 510 618 
			 19 Neglect of pedestrian rights 25 62 87 25 45 70 
			 20 Obstruction, waiting and parking offences 2 45 47 1 41 42 
			 21 Lighting offences 26 52 78 23 66 89 
			 22 Noise offences 9 20 29 2 16 18 
			 23 Load offences — 44 44 1 33 34 
			 24 Offences peculiar to motor cycles 96 35 131 93 18 111 
			 25 Miscellaneous motoring offences 117 1,935 2,052 126 2,498 2,624 
			  Total all offences 5,948 32,357 38,305 5,410 28,038 33,448 
			 (1) It is known that for some police force areas, the reporting of court proceedings in particular those relating to summary motoring offences, may be less than complete. (2) Every effort is made to ensure that the figures presented are accurate and complete. However, it is important to note that these data have been extracted from large administrative data systems generated by the courts. As a consequence, care should be taken to ensure data collection processes and their inevitable limitations are taken into account when those data are used.  Source: Office for Criminal Justice Reform - Evidence & Analysis Unit [Ref: IOS 161-09] 
		
	
	
		
			  Table 2: Number of persons found guilty at all courts for various motoring offences within Hampshire police force area by age group, 2003-07( 1, 2, 3) 
			  Number of offences 
			2003  2004  2005 
			  Offences group  Offence type  under 21  21 and over  Total  under 21  21 and over  Total  under 21  21 and over  Total 
			 1 Causing death or bodily harm — 7 7 2 4 6 2 4 6 
			 2 Dangerous driving 53 114 167 49 104 153 43 89 132 
			 3 Driving etc, after consuming alcohol or taking drugs 509 3,154 3,663 519 3,224 3,743 455 2,917 3,372 
			 4 Careless driving 243 848 1,091 190 918 1,108 201 675 876 
			 5 Accident offences 130 451 581 120 411 531 91 291 382 
			 6 Unauthorised taking or theft of motor vehicle 397 232 629 395 186 581 348 214 562 
			 7 Driving licence related offences 2,260 6,572 8,832 1,985 6,088 8,073 1,556 4,910 6,466 
			 9 Vehicle insurance offences 2,536 8,086 10,622 2,214 7,627 9,841 1,809 6,198 8,007 
			 10 Vehicle registration and excise licence offences 293 6,834 7,127 290 6,848 7,138 208 4,899 5,107 
			 11 Work record and employment offences — 529 529 — 532 532 — 230 230 
			 12 Operator's licence offences — 48 48 1 50 51 — 19 19 
			 13 Vehicle test offences 1,359 5,082 6,441 1,036 4,141 5,177 721 3,024 3,745 
			 14 Fraud, forgery etc., associated with vehicle or driver records 32 259 291 30 232 262 18 126 144 
			 15 Vehicle or part in dangerous or defective condition 213 755 968 155 557 712 113 363 476 
			 16 Speed limit offences 319 5,044 5,363 272 4,032 4,304 313 4,813 5,126 
			 17 Motorway offences(other than speeding) 7 66 73 8 85 93 4 56 60 
			 18 Neglect of traffic directions 84 534 618 125 466 591 119 525 644 
			 19 Neglect of pedestrian rights 26 68 94 11 66 77 27 46 73 
			 20 Obstruction, waiting and parking offences 1 113 114 1 70 71 — 24 24 
			 21 Lighting offences 79 285 364 41 115 156 15 29 44 
			 22 Noise offences 21 85 106 14 55 69 16 38 54 
			 23 Load offences 6 192 198 1 133 134 — 50 50 
			 24 Offences peculiar to motor cycles 65 9 74 50 13 63 87 22 109 
			 25 Miscellaneous motoring offences 96 1,086 1,182 107 1,385 1,492 82 1,681 1,763 
			  Total all offences 8,729 40,453 49,182 7,616 37,342 44,958 6,228 31,243 37,471 
		
	
	
		
			2006  2007 
			  Offences group  Offence type  under 21  21 and over  Total  under 21  21 and over  Total 
			 1 Causing death or bodily harm 4 5 9 3 9 12 
			 2 Dangerous driving 29 88 117 36 88 124 
			 3 Driving etc, after consuming alcohol or taking drugs 427 2,566 2,993 403 2,571 2,974 
			 4 Careless driving 157 626 783 213 1,057 1,270 
			 5 Accident offences 74 264 338 106 303 409 
			 6 Unauthorised taking or theft of motor vehicle 335 172 507 431 220 651 
			 7 Driving licence related offences 1,094 3,718 4,812 1,055 3,482 4,537 
			 9 Vehicle insurance offences 1,346 5,019 6,365 1,277 4,614 5,891 
			 10 Vehicle registration and excise licence offences 197 4,177 4,374 131 2,876 3,007 
			 11 Work record and employment offences 1 180 181 — 64 64 
			 12 Operator's licence offences — 14 14 — 7 7 
			 13 Vehicle test offences 373 1,701 2,074 214 863 1,077 
			 14 Fraud, forgery etc., associated with vehicle or driver records 9 87 96 8 58 66 
			 15 Vehicle or part in dangerous or defective condition 70 254 324 51 218 269 
			 16 Speed limit offences 279 4,365 4,644 408 4,512 4,920 
			 17 Motorway offences(other than speeding) 5 47 52 5 28 33 
			 18 Neglect of traffic directions 84 500 584 95 441 536 
			 19 Neglect of pedestrian rights 21 49 70 16 37 53 
			 20 Obstruction, waiting and parking offences 1 33 34 1 31 32 
			 21 Lighting offences 20 34 54 15 55 70 
			 22 Noise offences 7 16 23 1 11 12 
			 23 Load offences — 41 41 — 30 30 
			 24 Offences peculiar to motor cycles 87 32 119 86 17 103 
			 25 Miscellaneous motoring offences 100 1,474 1,574 91 1,916 2,007 
			  Total all offences 4,720 25,462 30,182 4,646 23,508 28,154 
			 (1) It is known that for some police force areas, the reporting of court proceedings in particular those relating to summary motoring offences, may be less than complete. (2) Every effort is made to ensure that the figures presented are accurate and complete. However, it is important to note that these data have been extracted from large administrative data systems generated by the courts. As a consequence, care should be taken to ensure data collection processes and their inevitable limitations are taken into account when those data are used. (3) The numbers found guilty may exceed those proceeded against in table 1, as it may be the case that the proceedings in the magistrates' court took place in the preceding year to the defendant being found guilty at the Crown Court in the following year, or the defendant was found guilty for a different offence to the original offence proceeded against.  Source: Office for Criminal Justice Reform - Evidence & Analysis Unit [Ref IOS 161-09]

Fines: Enforcement

David Burrowes: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice how many times he has exercised his power to deduct funds from an offender's income support payments in the pursuance of enforcement of a  (a) fine and  (b) compensation order under section 24 of the Criminal Justice Act 1991 in each of the last five years.

Bridget Prentice: The following table shows the number of Deductions from Benefit Orders imposed by the courts under the Courts Act 2003 Fines Collection Scheme since April 2006 to February 2009, the latest date for which data are available. Full data are only available from April 2006 and cannot be broken down between fines and compensation.
	
		
			  Financial year: orders  Number of deductions from benefits 
			 April 2008 to February 2009 274,387 
			 2007-08 216,402 
			 2006-07 241,915

Firearms

Anne McIntosh: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice what sentencing guidelines apply to convictions for offences arising from the purchase and use of ball-bearing guns; and if he will make a statement.

David Hanson: Ball-bearing guns which fire small plastic pellets are usually referred to as airsoft or BB guns and are treated in law as imitation firearms.
	The maximum sentence for possession of an imitation firearm in a public place is 12 months imprisonment, or a £5,000 fine, or both. The Magistrates Courts Sentencing Guidelines have a starting point of a high level community order for carrying a loaded air weapon, with a sentencing range of a medium level community order to 26 weeks custody.
	It is an offence for someone under 18 to purchase or hire an air weapon or ammunition for an air weapon; the maximum penalty is six months' detention or a £5,000 fine, or both. There are no sentencing guidelines for this offence.

Firearms

Anne McIntosh: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice what estimate he has made of the number of  (a) prosecutions and  (b) convictions for offences involving ball-bearing guns in each of the last three years.

Shahid Malik: It is not possible from the statistics collected centrally on the Ministry of Justice Court Proceedings Database to distinguish offences relating to ball bearing guns, or more accurately airsoft weapons, from other imitation firearms.

Governance of Britain: Public Consultation

Eleanor Laing: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice how many  (a) organisations and  (b) individuals were specifically invited to comment on the National Framework for Greater Citizen Engagement discussion paper.

Michael Wills: Approximately 1,000 organisations and individuals from the Governance of Britain stakeholder database were alerted via e-mail to the publication of the National Framework for Greater Citizen Engagement discussion paper. The discussion paper, which was made available on line and in hard copy, invited views on proposals for the greater use of engagement mechanisms by national Government.

HM Court Service: Redundancy

Dominic Grieve: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice how many redundancies HM Court Service expects to make in 2009-10.

Jack Straw: Her Majesty's Courts Service has no current plans to make redundancies during the financial year 2009-10.

Land Registry

John McDonnell: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice in relation to how many low value personal injury claim cases the Land Registry has authorised surveillance operations on employees; what the cost of conducting surveillance was in each case; who authorised the hiring of private investigators in such cases; and what procedures are followed by the Land Registry to ensure that any surveillance of staff by private investigators is proportionate.

Michael Wills: Land Registry has drawn no distinction between the value of personal injury claims. There have been six personal injury claims in Land Registry where controlled and limited surveillance was authorised on employees. These were all part of one overall investigation.
	The cost of conducting the surveillance in each case was as follows:
	
		
			   Cost of conducting surveillance (£) 
			 Case 1 587.50 
			 Case 2 5,287.50 
			 Case 3 10,960 
			 Case 4 7,050 
			 Case 5 8,812.50 
			 Case 6 8,812.50 
		
	
	The costs awarded to Land Registry following the successful defence and withdrawal of the claims exceeded these amounts. The authorisation of the surveillance was given by the then acting director of HR.
	In deciding to authorise surveillance, Land Registry considered the seriousness of the issue, the potential cost of the case and the impact on the organisation's core business and weighed this against the potential impact on the privacy of the individuals and their friends and family as well as the ongoing employment relationship. The surveillance was restricted to public environments, which limited the level of intrusion. The nature of this as a test case established a likelihood of high costs in the defence of the case, in payments to individuals if the cases were found proven and potentially in significant change to the organisations core business processes and the equipment used. With supporting legal advice it was agreed that the surveillance was a proportionate and justified action in defending this case.

Land Registry

John McDonnell: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice how many unfair dismissal cases were brought against the Land Registry in each of the last two years; how many of them were settled before a hearing in each year; how many of them progressed to a full hearing; how many of these cases were lost by the Land Registry in each year; what costs were awarded against the Land Registry in relation to such cases in each year; and what the cost of  (a) solicitors' and  (b) barristers' fees for such cases was in each year.

Michael Wills: Seven unfair dismissal cases were brought against Land Registry in 2007-08. 10 unfair dismissal cases were brought against Land Registry in 2008-09.
	One case was settled in 2007-08. No cases were settled in 2008-09.
	No unfair dismissal cases progressed to full hearing in either 2007-08 or 2008-09.
	As no unfair dismissal cases progressed to a hearing, none have been lost by the Land Registry in either 2007-08 or 2008-09.
	There were no costs awarded against Land Registry for unfair dismissal in either 2007-08 or 2008-09.
	Solicitors' fees for such cases in 2007-08 were £5,739.49 and in 2008-09 were £33,099.30.
	Barristers' fees for such cases in 2007-08 were £1,353.50 and in 2008-09 were £6,067.70.
	All 2008-09 figures are as of 24 March 2009.

Land Registry

John McDonnell: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice how many personal injury claims have been brought against the Land Registry in each of the last two years; how many out-of-court settlements of such cases there were in each year; what the cost to the Land Registry was of such cases in each year; how many cases progressed to court in each year; and what the cost for  (a) medical advice and  (b) legal advice of defending these cases was in each year.

Michael Wills: 14 personal injury claims have been brought against the Land Registry in 2007-08 and 10 in 2008-09.
	There was one out-of-court settlement in 2007-08 and one in 2008-09.
	The cost to Land Registry of such cases in 2007-08 was £1,200 and in 2008-09 was £1,575.
	No cases have progressed to court in either 2007-08 or 2008-09.
	The cost for medical advice in defending these cases in 2007-08 was £305.50 and in 2008-09 was £517.
	The cost for legal advice of defending these cases in 2007-08 was £2,132.63 and in 2008-09 was £34,906.08.
	All 2008-09 figures are as of 24 March 2009.

Land Registry: Manpower

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice how many people the Land Registry  (a) employs and  (b) employed in each of the last five years.

Michael Wills: The information requested is contained within the following table. The figures reflect the headcount (rather than full-time equivalent) of full and part-time payroll staff, on-strength. The full-time equivalent figure would be lower.
	
		
			  As at 1 March each year  Headcount 
			 2009 7,785 
			 2008 8,147 
			 2007 8,342 
			 2006 8,440 
			 2005 8,707

Magistrates Courts: Hertfordshire

Michael Penning: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice how many cases were heard in the magistrates courts in  (a) Hemel Hempstead and  (b) Hertfordshire in each year since 1997.

Bridget Prentice: The number of defendants proceeded against at magistrates courts, heard at magistrates courts and committed for trial at the Crown Court, for all offences in Hertfordshire police force area, 1997 to 2007 is contained in the table.
	Information held centrally cannot be broken down to constituency or court level, thus Hertfordshire police force area data have been provided in lieu.
	These data are on the principal offence basis. The figures given in the table on court proceedings relate to persons for whom these offences were the principal offence for which they were dealt with. When a defendant has been found guilty of two or more offences, the offence selected is the one for which the heaviest penalty is imposed. Where the same disposal is imposed for two or more offences, the offence selected is the offence for which the statutory maximum penalty is the most severe.
	Court proceedings data for 2008 will be available in the autumn of 2009.
	
		
			  N umber of defendants proceeded against at magistrates courts, heard at magistrates courts and committed for trial at the Crown  c ourt, for all offences in Hertfordshire police force area, 1997 to 2007( 1,2) 
			Of which: 
			   Proceeded against  Heard at magistrates courts( 3)  Committed for trial at the Crown  c ourt 
			 1997 25,450 24,567 883 
			 1998 28,270 27,586 684 
			 1999 27,368 26,540 828 
			 2000 28,507 27,575 932 
			 2001 27,380 26,476 904 
			 2002 28,825 27,792 1,033 
			 2003 33,377 32,219 1,158 
			 2004 37,088 35,892 1,196 
			 2005 38,134 36,802 1,332 
			 2006 34,584 33,223 1,361 
			 2007 30,661 29,614 1,047 
			 (1) These data are on the principal offence basis. (2) Every effort is made to ensure that the figures presented are accurate and complete. However, it is important to note that these data have been extracted from large administrative data systems generated by the courts, and police forces. As a consequence, care should be taken to ensure data collection processes and their inevitable limitations are taken into account when those data are used. (3) Includes proceedings discontinued, discharged, withdrawn, dismissed, and found guilty at the magistrates courts.  Source: OCJR—E & A: Office for Criminal Justice Reform—Evidence and Analysis Unit

Magistrates Courts: Hertfordshire

Michael Penning: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice what percentage of sentences imposed in magistrates courts in  (a) Hemel Hempstead and  (b) Hertfordshire were appealed against to the Crown Court in each year since 1997.

Bridget Prentice: Information is only available for Hertfordshire on the number of offenders sentenced and the number of appeals against sentences and convictions from 1997-2007, which is set out in the table. It is not possible to calculate a percentage between these two methods of counting, as one counts offenders and the other offences.
	
		
			  Hertfordshire 
			   Total sentenced  Total appealed against sentence( 1) 
			 1997 18,185 56 
			 1998 20,217 143 
			 1999 20,058 142 
			 2000 20,246 143 
			 2001 19,404 121 
			 2002 20,076 102 
			 2003 23,820 116 
			 2004 26,091 118 
			 2005 27,431 156 
			 2006 25,661 176 
			 2007 23,704 153 
			 (1) Figures include appeals against both conviction and sentence

Magistrates Courts: Hertfordshire

Michael Penning: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice how many trials in magistrates courts in  (a) Hemel Hempstead and  (b) Hertfordshire did not take place on the initial agreed date of hearing in each year since 1997.

Bridget Prentice: Information is only available on the number of trials that failed to take place on the agreed hearing date in each year since 2003 in the magistrates courts in Hertfordshire. This information is set out in the following table:
	
		
			  Period  Total number of trials  Number of trials which did not take place on agreed date 
			 2003-04 3,546 2,314 
			 2004-05 3,805 2,403 
			 2005-06 5,322 3,307 
			 2006-07 5,064 2,862 
			 2007-08 4,492 2,450

National Offender Management Information System

Dominic Grieve: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice which private sector prisons have access to Prison-NOMIS.

Jack Straw: Prison-NOMIS will be deployed to public prisons from spring 2009 to summer 2010. Following on from that roll-out, the needs of the contracted-out prisons (COPs) will be addressed. The approach to individual COPs may vary depending on their own internal IT systems and either Prison-NOMIS could be deployed to a COP or an interface with the COP's existing case management system and Prison-NOMIS could be established.
	Provided that adequate additional funding was made available, all COPs would gain access to Prison-NOMIS by one means or another. Consequently, there would be no detraction from public safety.

Offenders: Ex-servicemen

Edward Garnier: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice what systems of identification and support the Probation Service operates for offenders who have previously served in the armed forces.

David Hanson: There is currently no dedicated identification system for ex-servicemen and women under Probation supervision. This will change with the introduction of P-NOMIS which contains specific data entry field for ex-service offenders. In the interim, we will send out a notice under a Probation circular to highlight services provided by ex veterans charities, and support available as part of the veterans prison in-reach initiative.

Prison Sentences

David Howarth: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice how many recategorisation reviews for Category A prisoners  (a) have been undertaken and  (b) involved an oral hearing in each year since 2000.

David Hanson: Category A prisoners have their categorisation reviewed once yearly by staff at the prison in which they are held. Every five years their categorisation will be subject to a formal review by the Director of High Security. The exact number of reviews is not centrally recorded. There has only been one oral hearing which was held in 2002.

Prison Service: Manpower

Edward Garnier: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice pursuant to the answer of 26 February 2009,  Official Report, column 994W, on prisons: manpower, how many prison officers at each grade there were in each prison in England and Wales on 31 March in each year from 1997 to 2004.

Shahid Malik: Information on the number of officers in each establishment (public and private sector), by grade, in each year from 1997 to 2004 has been placed in both Libraries of the House.

Prison Service: Vetting

Christopher Huhne: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice whether people applying to become  (a) prison officers and  (b) other prison service staff are required to have a Criminal Records Bureau check.

David Hanson: Criminal record checks are undertaken for all staff (prison officers and other staff) working in prison establishments. Criminal Records Bureau disclosure checks are undertaken on all staff working with young persons under the age of 18.

Prisons: Alcoholic Drinks

Edward Garnier: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice what estimate he has made of  (a) the number and  (b) the proportion of prisoners diagnosed with alcohol problems in each prison in England and Wales, in each of the last 10 years.

David Hanson: A number of studies have provided a picture of the alcohol-related problems experienced by those entering prisons:
	Research(1) carried out by the Office for National Statistics (ONS) in 1997 stated that 63 per cent. of sentenced males and 39 per cent. of sentenced females reported a hazardous drinking pattern in the year before coming into prison. This figure rises to 70 per cent. in the case of young adult offenders. The numbers who are physically dependent on alcohol, which can be defined as those who need alcohol detoxification (Tiers 3 and 4 of Models of Care for Alcohol Misusers (MoCAM)), are much lower at around 8 per cent. of females and 7 per cent. of males.
	The Surveying Prisoner Crime Reduction (SCPR) study(2), a large national longitudinal survey of newly sentenced adult prisoners, reported in 2008 that 36 per cent. of the sample could be classified as heavy drinkers. However, heavy drinking—defined as drinking more than twice the recommended sensible daily limits—is not directly comparable to the hazardous drinking category used in the ONS report.
	(1) Substance misuse among prisoners in England and Wales, Further analysis of data from the ONS survey of psychiatric morbidity among prisoners, Singleton N, Farrell M and Meltzer H (1999) Office for National Statistics
	(2) The problem and needs of newly sentenced prisoners; results from a national survey, Stewart. D (2008). MOJ Research Series 16/08.

Prisons: Alcoholic Drinks

Edward Garnier: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice how much has been spent on services countering the effects of alcohol in prisons in each of the last 10 years.

David Hanson: A range of interventions are available in prisons to support those with an alcohol problem:
	clinical services—alcohol detoxification is available in all local and remand prisons;
	where alcohol is part of a wider substance misuse problem, the full range of drug interventions are available;
	a number of prisons run alcohol awareness courses;
	Alcoholics Anonymous (AA) run groups in over 65 per cent. of prisons;
	some offending behaviour programmes address the underlying factors which occur in alcohol related crime;
	an accredited 12-step alcohol programme is being run at HMP Bullingdon;
	a further Cognitive Behavioural Alcohol Programme has been piloted at HMP Hull, Forest Bank, Glen Parva and Chelmsford;
	for those prisons involved in the roll-out of the Integrated Drug Treatment System (IDTS) a 90 minute alcohol awareness session has been developed; and
	the young persons substance misuse service for 16 to 18-year-old prisoners has a particular focus on alcohol.
	The Ministry of Justice has established a working group to develop proposals to increase the provision of alcohol treatment available in prisons. The number of prisoners accessing services specifically aimed at their alcohol misuse is not collated centrally.

Prisons: Activities

Edward Garnier: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice what steps he plans to take consequent on the assessment in the latest annual report of HM Chief Inspector of Prisons that activity levels are still not high enough in nearly half of training prisons.

David Hanson: HM Chief Inspector of Prisons annual report 2007-08 called for increases in activity. It also acknowledged that there has already been an overall improvement. During the period 2005-08, the number of hours per prisoner per week increased from 26.1 to 28 hours in Category B prisons and 25.9 to 26.1 hours in Category C prisons.
	The National Offender Management Service, in partnership with the Learning and Skills Council, is working to improve education and training provision by prioritising activities according to individual learner need and on focusing on activities which develop skills for employment. Efficiencies to maximise the take up of education and training places will increase purposeful activity hours.
	We are increasing training workshop places in prisons in partnership with the private sector. This includes increasing the number of prison information and communications training academies, in partnership with CISCO Systems; a partnership with Timpsons, whose core business is shoe and watch repair and engraving; and a tool repair workshop with Travis Perkins.
	The education assessment undertaken for the report by Ofsted and Estyn (Wales) reported that in 2007-08 76 per cent. of prisons education passed inspection. This compares with just 22 per cent. in 2002-03. The number of prisoners taking part in education has increased by one-third since 2006.
	The prison capacity programme aims to ensure that there are sufficient training and employment places within new prisons or where significant expansion within existing prisons takes place.

Witnesses: Protection

Andrew George: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice what assistance is available to witnesses who give evidence in cases of alleged antisocial behaviour by neighbours, to protect them against possible retaliatory action by those neighbours.

Alan Campbell: I have been asked to reply.
	The Home Office is responsible for the policy on antisocial behaviour.
	The use of hearsay evidence in civil proceedings involving antisocial behaviour allows witnesses to remain anonymous. We have also put in place measures to allow for the identities of those too fearful to give evidence to be protected in antisocial behaviour orders (ASBOs) cases.
	The Serious Organised Crime and Police Act 2005 introduced special measures for witnesses in proceedings for ASBOs. These measures were introduced to address concerns about the protection of vulnerable and intimidated witnesses. The measures include screening witnesses from the defendants, giving evidence through video link or in private, and the use of video recorded evidence. Special dedicated antisocial behaviour response courts have been established in magistrates' courts sitting in their civil capacity to ensure that witness issues are addressed. Local agencies have developed efficient case management systems which include working in partnership with key agencies to provide support to victims after court proceedings. In addition the Home Office has issued a good practice guide to practitioners on how best to support victims and witnesses of antisocial behaviour through the whole length of the witness pathway. A range of detailed guidance is set out on the Home Office's website on antisocial behaviour website.

Young Offenders: Custodial Treatment

Tim Farron: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice how many people in custody under the age of 18 years were required to share living accommodation with other convicted persons over the age of 18 years for at least part of their time in custody in the last 12 months.

David Hanson: Information on the number of young people (16 to 17-year-olds) who have been required to share accommodation with young adults (18 to 21-year-olds) is not collected centrally.
	Young people are not routinely required to share accommodation with young adults. They will only do so in a small number of cases where there are exceptional circumstances, such as the need to manage disruptive and violent behaviour, and where this is considered to be the preferred course of action.

Young Offenders: Custodial Treatment

Tim Farron: To ask the Secretary of State for Justice how many people under the age of 18 years were held in  (a) custody,  (b) junior detention centres,  (c) prisons,  (d) mental health units and  (e) other secure units on the latest date for which figures are available.

David Hanson: At the end of January 2009, the latest date for which figures are available, there were 2,634 juveniles aged under 18 in custody in England and Wales. Of these, 2,222 were in YOIs, 228 in STCs and 184 in SCHs.
	These figures are taken from the brief published at the following website which is updated monthly:
	http://www.justice.gov.uk/publications/populationincustody.htm
	These figures have been drawn from administrative IT systems, which, as with any large scale recording system, are subject to possible errors with data entry and processing.
	Published information is not available to exactly answer part  (d) of this question.
	The annual Statistical Bulletin on Mentally Disordered Offenders shows that as of 31 December 2007 (the latest data for which published figures are available), there were 111 restricted patients (101 male and 10 female) aged 20 years and under detained within mental health units in England and Wales.
	Further information can be found within table 4 of "Statistics of Mentally Disordered Offenders 2007: England and Wales", which can be downloaded from:
	http://www.justice.gov.uk/docs/mentally-disordered-offenders-2007.pdf

DEFENCE

Afghanistan: Peacekeeping Operations

Ann Winterton: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence whether proposals have been made to his Department for the lease of medium and heavy lift helicopters for use in Afghanistan.

John Hutton: The Ministry of Defence uses helicopters provided by SkyLink Aviation through the NATO ISAF Contracted Air Transport (ICAT) contract to move freight. During periods of peak activity the UK supplements the NATO ICAT with a national contract providing medium and heavy helicopter lift.

Afghanistan: Peacekeeping Operations

Philip Hollobone: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence if he will make an assessment of the extent to which the Taliban are using body armour in combat with UK forces.

John Hutton: It is not appropriate to comment on assessments made of enemy forces' capabilities for operational security reasons.

Afghanistan: Peacekeeping Operations

Andrew Murrison: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence how much has been spent on ammunitions for operations in Helmand province in each month since 2001; and if he will make a statement.

John Hutton: holding answer 24 March 2009
	I refer the hon. Member to the answer I gave him on 19 January 2009,  Official Report, column 1042W.
	The costs of operations in Afghanistan in 2008-09 are expected to be available in July.

Armed Forces Day: Essex

Brooks Newmark: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence whether he plans to enable organisations based in Essex to participate in Armed Forces Day on 27 June 2009.

Kevan Jones: The MOD is keen to support organisations in Essex, as with those in all other parts of the country, planning to run armed forces day events. Support is made available in the form of a financial grant and with the participation of local service units where this can be arranged. Within Essex, we are aware that Southend-on-Sea borough council are planning to hold a major armed forces day event on 27 June and they have been awarded a financial grant from the MOD to assist with the costs. We have also invited all local authorities in the county to participate in a 'fly the flag' initiative, which involves holding a flag raising ceremony (ideally involving cadets and veterans) on 22 June at 10.30 to coincide with other similar events across the country. Braintree borough council, along with a number of other authorities in the county, have confirmed that they intend to participate in this activity.

Armed Forces: Brunei

Liam Fox: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence how much his Department has spent on basing Gurkha soldiers in Brunei Darussalam in each year since 2005.

Kevan Jones: The cost of basing Gurkha soldiers in Brunei depends largely on how many soldiers based there are deployed on operations. In 2005 and 2007, the resident battalion deployed to Afghanistan as a unit.
	
		
			  Financial year  MOD expenditure on basing Gurkhas in Brunei (£ million) 
			 2005-06 8 
			 2006-07 2 
			 2007-08 21 
		
	
	Figures for 2008-09 are not yet available.

Armed Forces: Career Development

Nick Harvey: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence how many  (a) officers and  (b) other ranks there are in each pay range at each level in the armed services.

Bob Ainsworth: The information requested is provided in the tables.
	The numbers include all regular officers and other ranks on the main pay scales. Regular officers and other ranks who are on separate bespoke pay spines, e.g. chaplains, medical and dental officers, professional aviators, officers promoted from the ranks, as well as reservists are excluded.
	The numbers shown against each level are as at January 2009. The pay rates shown are for 2008-09.
	Other ranks are allocated to either the higher or lower pay spines in accordance with their trade.
	
		
			  Officers 
			  Rank  Officers pay spine  Number of personnel  Pay rate 
			  Chief of the Defence Staff Level 4 0 235,968.84 
			  Level 3 1 231,342.48 
			  Level 2 0 226,805.76 
			  Level 1 0 222,358.68 
			 
			  Navy: Admiral OF9 Level 6 2 170,790.96 
			  Army: General OF9 Level 5 4 167,439.96 
			  RAF: Air Chief Marshal OF9 Level 4 0 164,159.04 
			  OF9 Level 3 0 160,938.96 
			  OF9 Level 2 1 157,784.04 
			  OF9 Level 1 2 154,700.04 
			 
			  Navy: Vice Admiral OF8 Level 6 0 143,722.56 
			  R.M.: Lieutenant General OF8 Level 5 0 139,156.56 
			  Army: Lieutenant General OF8 Level 4 1 134,588.52 
			  RAF: Air Marshal OF8 Level 3 4 130,022.52 
			  OF8 Level 2 13 122,799.60 
			  OF8 Level 1 7 115,576.56 
			 
			  Navy: Rear Admiral OF7 Level 7 5 110,778.60 
			  R.M.: Major General OF7 Level 6 5 108,480.60 
			  Army: Major General OF7 Level 5 6 106,180.56 
			  RAF: Air Vice Marshal OF7 Level 4 3 103,880.52 
			  OF7 Level 3 22 101,580.60 
			  OF7 Level 2 22 99,654.60 
			  OF7 Level 1 25 98,198.52 
			 
			  Navy: Commodore OF6 Level 5 94 96,287.76 
			  R.M.: Brigadier OF6 Level 4 43 95,343.12 
			  Army: Brigadier OF6 Level 3 54 94,410.24 
			  RAF: Air Commodore OF6 Level 2 75 93,473.40 
			  OF6 Level 1 68 92,536.56 
			 
			  Navy: Captain OF5 Level 9 77 85,267.68 
			  R.M.: Colonel OF5 Level 8 38 84,300.00 
			  Army: Colonel OF5 Level 7 61 83,332.20 
			  RAF: Group Captain OF5 Level 6 83 82,368.24 
			  OF5 Level 5 129 81,404.40 
			  OF5 Level 4 134 80,440.44 
			  OF5 Level 3 153 79,476.60 
			  OF5 Level 2 170 78,508.80 
			  OF5 Level 1 195 77,544.84 
			 
			  Navy: Commander OF4 Level 9 587 74,022.60 
			  R.M.: Lieutenant Colonel OF4 Level 8 205 73,065.00 
			  Army: Lieutenant Colonel OF4 Level 7 248 72,107.52 
			  RAF: Wing Commander OF4 Level 6 299 71,158.56 
			  OF4 Level 5 357 67,293.84 
			  OF4 Level 4 368 66,454.32 
			  OF4 Level 3 484 65,614.32 
			  OF4 Level 2 511 64,774.80 
			  OF4 Level 1 513 63,927.36 
			 
			  Navy: Lieutenant Commander OF3 Level 9 1,679 54,550.56 
			  R.M.: Major OF3 Level 8 520 53,421.72 
			  Army: Major OF3 Level 7 737 52,300.92 
			  RAF: Squadron Leader OF3 Level 6 1,340 51,176.16 
			  OF3 Level 5 986 50,043.72 
			  OF3 Level 4 879 48,922.68 
			  OF3 Level 3 822 47,790.12 
			  OF3 Level 2 758 46,673.40 
			  OF3 Level 1 746 45,548.64 
			 
			  Navy: Lieutenant OF2 Level 9 928 43,002.24 
			  R.M.: Captain OF2 Level 8 435 42,514.20 
			  Army: Captain OF2 Level 7 601 42,018.12 
			  RAF: Flight Lieutenant OF2 Level 6 818 41,045.64 
			  OF2 Level 5 1,028 40,065.48 
			  OF2 Level 4 1,131 39,092.88 
			  OF2 Level 3 1,164 38,108.76 
			  OF2 Level 2 1,076 37,128.60 
			  OF2 Level 1 1,150 36,160.08 
			 
			  RN: Midshipman, Sub-Lieutenant OF1 Level 10 151 31,188.36 
			  RM: 2nd Lieutenant, Lieutenant OF1 Level 9 556 30,442.56 
			  Army: 2nd Lieutenant, Lieutenant OF1 Level 8 685 29,704.32 
			  RAF: Acting Pilot Officer/Pilot Officer, Flying Officer OF1 Level 7 1,184 28,962.48 
			  DNS: Tri-Service OF1 Level 6 248 28,216.32 
			  OF1 Level 5 1,106 23,475.24 
			  OF1 Level 4 0 20,800.08 
			  OF1 Level 3 1 17,710.80 
			  OF1 Level 2 1 16,230.96 
			  OF1 Level 1 260 14,852.28 
		
	
	
		
			  Other Ranks — Higher Pay Spine 
			  Rank  Other ranks pay spine (higher)  Number of personnel  Pay rate 
			  Navy: Warrant Officer 1 OR9 Range 5 Level 7 573 44,587.80 
			  R.M.: Warrant Officer 1 OR9 Range 5 Level 6 220 43,916.04 
			  Army: Warrant Officer 1 OR9 Range 5 Level 5 321 43,146.84 
			  RAF: Warrant Officer OR9 Range 5 Level 4 477 42,389.16 
			  OR9 Range 5 Level 3 290 41,623.68 
			  OR9 Range 5 Level 2 205 40,920.72 
			  OR9 Range 5 Level 1 104 40,131.60 
			 
			  Navy:
			 Levels 1-9 - Chief Petty Officer (Non-Artificer) OR7/8 Range 4 Level 9 1,841 41,248.80 
			 Levels 1-7 - Chief Petty Officer (Artificer) OR7/8 Range 4 Level 8 529 40,666.80 
			 Levels 5-9 - Warrant Officer II OR7/8 Range 4 Level 7 2,142 40,096.68 
			  R.M.: OR7/8 Range 4 Level 6 1,197 39,526.44 
			 Levels 1-7 - Colour Sergeant OR7/8 Range 4 Level 5 1,378 38,671.20 
			 Levels 5-9 - Warrant Officer II OR7/8 Range 4 Level 4 733 37,811.88 
			  Army: OR7/8 Range 4 Level 3 747 36,956.64 
			 Levels 1-7 - Staff Sergeant OR7/8 Range 4 Level 2 805 36,093.60 
			 Levels 5-9 - Warrant Officer II OR7/8 Range 4 Level 1 297 35,242.32 
			  RAF:
			 Levels 1-7 - Chief Technician
			 Levels 5-9 - Flight Sergeant (List 1)
			 Levels 1-9 - Flight Sergeant (List 2)
			 
			  Navy: Petty Officer OR6 Range 3 Level 7 3,437 35,218.80 
			  R.M.: Sergeant OR6 Range 3 Level 6 1,694 34,570.44 
			  Army: Sergeant OR6 Range 3 Level 5 2,294 33,922.32 
			  RAF: Sergeant OR6 Range 3 Level 4 2,465 33,273.84 
			  OR6 Range 3 Level 3 2,811 32,860.08 
			  OR6 Range 3 Level 2 1,594 32,047.56 
			  OR6 Range 3 Level 1 1,036 31,239.24 
			 
			  Navy: Leading Rate OR4 Range 2 Level 7 5,354 31,645.56 
			  R.M.: Corporal OR4 Range 2 Level 6 2,501 30,969.72 
			  Army: Corporal OR4 Range 2 Level 5 3,152 30,341.04 
			  RAF: Corporal OR4 Range 2 Level 4 3,182 29,626.20 
			  OR4 Range 2 Level 3 3,457 28,950.72 
			  OR4 Range 2 Level 2 2,119 27,599.28 
			  OR4 Range 2 Level 1 1,601 26,314.56 
			 
			  Navy:
			 Levels 1-9 - Able Rate OR2/3 Range 1 Level 9 5,526 27,599.28 
			  R.M.: OR2/3 Range 1 Level 8 2,934 26,314.56 
			 Levels 1-9 - Marine OR2/3 Range 1 Level 7 3,014 25,181.88 
			 Levels 5-9 Lance Corporal (or RM passed JCC) OR2/3 Range 1 Level 6 2,682 24,076.80 
			  Army: OR2/3 Range 1 Level 5 2,828 22,959.72 
			 Levels 1-7 - Private OR2/3 Range 1 Level 4 125 20,765.04 
			 Levels 5-9 - Lance Corporal OR2/3 Range 1 Level 3 160 19,312.20 
			  RAF: OR2/3 Range 1 Level 2 176 17,492.16 
			 Level 1 Aircraftmen & Leading Aircraftmen OR2/3 Range 1 Level 1 209 16,226.76 
			 Levels 2-9 - Senior Aircraftmen
		
	
	
		
			  Other Ranks — Lower Pay Spine 
			  Rank  Other ranks pay spine (lower)  Number of personnel  Pay rate 
			  Navy: Warrant Officer 1 OR9 Range 5 Level 7 409 42,076.68 
			  R.M.: Warrant Officer 1 OR9 Range 5 Level 6 119 40,920.72 
			  Army: Warrant Officer 1 OR9 Range 5 Level 5 106 39,803.64 
			  RAF: Warrant Officer OR9 Range 5 Level 4 180 39,042.12 
			  OR9 Range 5 Level 3 83 38,284.44 
			  OR9 Range 5 Level 2 30 37,526.88 
			  OR9 Range 5 Level 1 4 36,812.16 
			 
			  Navy:
			 Levels 1-9 — Chief Petty Officer (Non-Artificer) OR7/8 Range 4 Level 9 1,492 37,792.32 
			 Levels 1-7 - Chief Petty Officer (Artificer) OR7/8 Range 4 Level 8 462 36,956.64 
			 Levels 5-9 — Warrant Officer II OR7/8 Range 4 Level 7 2,122 36,483.96 
			  R.M.: OR7/8 Range 4 Level 6 1,471 35,933.52 
			 Levels 1-7 — Colour Sergeant OR7/8 Range 4 Level 5 900 34,379.16 
			 Levels 5-9 — Warrant Officer II OR7/8 Range 4 Level 4 747 33,918.36 
			  Army: OR7/8 Range 4 Level 3 436 33,141.12 
			 Levels 1-7 — Staff Sergeant OR7/8 Range 4 Level 2 307 32,098.32 
			 Levels 5-9 — Warrant Officer II OR7/8 Range 4 Level 1 193 31,684.56 
			  RAF:
			 Levels 1-7 — Chief Technician
			 Levels 5-9 — Flight Sergeant (List 1)
			 Levels 1-9 — Flight Sergeant (List 2)
			 
			  Navy: Petty Officer OR6 Range 3 Level 7 1,493 32,531.88 
			  R.M.: Sergeant OR6 Range 3 Level 6 729 32,285.76 
			  Army: Sergeant OR6 Range 3 Level 5 591 31,208.04 
			  RAF: Sergeant OR6 Range 3 Level 4 674 30,415.20 
			  OR6 Range 3 Level 3 666 30,110.52 
			  OR6 Range 3 Level 2 685 29,372.52 
			  OR6 Range 3 Level 1 335 28,622.64 
			 
			  Navy: Leading Rate OR4 Range 2 Level 7 1,944 28,458.48 
			  R.M.: Corporal OR4 Range 2 Level 6 870 28,251.72 
			  Army: Corporal OR4 Range 2 Level 5 924 28,029.00 
			  RAF: Corporal OR4 Range 2 Level 4 1,052 27,810.24 
			  OR4 Range 2 Level 3 1,100 27,599.28 
			  OR4 Range 2 Level 2 1,041 26,314.56 
			  OR4 Range 2 Level 1 1,229 25,181.88 
			 
			  Navy:
			 Levels 1-9 — Able Rate OR2/3 Range 1 Level 9 3,429 23,108.16 
			  R.M.: OR2/3 Range 1 Level 8 1,988 22,299.72 
			 Levels 1-9 — Marine OR2/3 Range 1 Level 7 7,915 21,323.40 
			 Levels 5-9 Lance Corporal (or RM passed JCC) OR2/3 Range 1 Level 6 4,626 20,448.72 
			  Army: OR2/3 Range 1 Level 5 5,269 19,628.52 
			 Levels 1-7 — Private OR2/3 Range 1 Level 4 5,700 18,624.72 
			 Levels 5-9 - Lance Corporal OR2/3 Range 1 Level 3 5,880 17,125.20 
			  RAF: OR2/3 Range 1 Level 2 8,872 16,676.04 
			 Level 1 Aircraftmen & Leading Aircraftmen OR2/3 Range 1 Level 1 12,557 16,226.76 
			 Levels 2-9 — Senior Aircraftmen
		
	
	
		
			  Other Ranks under training 
			   Other ranks pay spine  Number of personnel  Pay rate 
			 New Entrants OR1 9,314 13,012.80

Armed Forces: Defence Equipment

Liam Fox: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence whether service members  (a) wounded and  (b) killed on operations whilst wearing non-issued body armour are entitled to compensation.

Kevan Jones: All personnel deploying to Iraq and Afghanistan are issued with a complete set of Enhanced Combat Body Armour (ECBA) before departure. Improved Performance Body Armour (OSPREY) and Enhanced Personnel Protection Equipment (KESTREL) are provided in addition to ECBA to personnel whose roles require it. These have been designed to protect against specific threats faced by personnel undertaking certain roles.
	Service personnel injured (or surviving dependants of those killed) on or after 6 April 2005 wholly or predominantly due to service are eligible for compensation under the Armed Forces Compensation Scheme. All decisions on entitlement are made on a case by case basis; this is equally true if a casualty were found to be wearing non-issued body armour.

Armed Forces: Food

Michael Ancram: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence what proportion of the food provided for armed forces personnel came from UK sources in 2007-08.

Quentin Davies: During the financial year 2007-08, MOD increased the overall percentage of UK indigenous food it provides to armed forces personnel from 43 per cent. to 59 per cent.

Armed Forces: Housing

Robert Walter: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence how many properties at Blandford Camp were surveyed as part of the Service Family Accommodation Review commissioned by his Department; and into which housing category such properties fall.

Kevan Jones: The Service Family Accommodation (SFA) at Blandford was not included in the condition survey at this stage because there is a continuing project to upgrade all SFA at Blandford Garrison to Standard 1 for Condition. In 2007 the site was confirmed as a future tri-service base and work began to upgrade 138 family homes; the programme also includes the demolition and rebuilding of some 247 homes. The project will cost around £8.5 million. The aspiration is for all properties at Blandford to be at Standard 1 for Condition by 2015.
	In addition to this 120 new en-suite single living accommodation bed spaces were finished in 2005.

Armed Forces: Mental Health Services

Liam Fox: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence 
	(1)  how much has been spent on the contracting of service mental health provision to the Priory Clinic in each year since 2003;
	(2)  how many service personnel at each rank were referred to the Priory Clinic as  (a) inpatients and  (b) outpatients in each year since 2005.

Kevan Jones: The data requested relating to in-patients, up until 26 January 2009, can be found in the following table:
	
		
			   Number of patients treated  Contract value (£  m illion ) 
			 1 December 2003 to 31 March 2004 58 0.4 
			 1 April 2004 to 31 March 2005 321 4.2 
			 1 April 2005 to 31 March 2006 351 4.5 
			 1 April 2006 to 31 March 2007 305 3.4 
			 1 April 2007 to 31 March 2008 281 3.8 
			 1 April 2008 to 26 January 2009 212 2.8 
		
	
	These figures take into account the cost of assessing patients as well as any treatment programmes provided; the individual care needs of each patient will vary depending on their particular medical circumstances.
	The only specific out-patient referrals for which we contract is the provision of psychology treatment. This element of the contract commenced in 2006 and the total number of patients referred can be found in the following table:
	
		
			   Number of patients treated 
			 1 April 2006 to 31 March 2007 13 
			 1 Apr 2007 to 31 March 2008 21 
			 1 April 2008 to 26 January 2009 28 
		
	
	In both tables, individual patient ranks have not been included to ensure that clinical confidentiality is protected.
	The contract with the Priory Group has been replaced with a new contract awarded to the South Staffordshire and Shropshire NHS Foundation Trust (SSSFT). SSSFT will lead a partnership of seven NHS trusts, using facilities at each of the trusts concerned to ensure coverage across the country. This continues the community-based approach we follow for our out-patients who are seen at our regional military mental health centres.

Armed Forces: Occupational Therapy

Andrew Rosindell: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence how many service personnel returning from conflict zones have received occupational therapy treatments for  (a) physical and  (b) mental trauma in the last five years.

Kevan Jones: Information on the types of treatment an individual receives is only held on their medical records and it would incur disproportionate cost to extract this information. However, any treatment received from the Defence Medical Rehabilitation Centre (DMRC) at Headley Court and, in some cases, a military Department for Community Mental Health (DCMH) will incorporate elements of occupational therapy tailored to the needs of the patient.
	Information on the number of service personnel who have been medically evacuated from Operations Herrick or Telic and subsequently attended DMRC Headley Court for rehabilitative treatment is available and is shown in the following table. These figures cover the period from 8 October 2007, the earliest date from which validated data are available, to 3 March 2009.
	
		
			   Herrick  Telic  Total 
			 Number of personnel to have been medically evacuated. 972 519 1,491 
			 Number of personnel to have then attended DMRC 155 45 305 
			  Notes: 1. Information is extracted from the Defence Patient Tracking Application, this system is constantly updated and therefore all figures are provisional and subject to change. 2. Figures include personnel from Naval Service, Army, RAF and UK civilians. 3. Figures show the number of individual patients treated and not the number of treatments (a patient may be admitted on more than one occasion). 4. Figures exclude Special Forces. 
		
	
	For available data on service personnel requiring mental health care and their deployment history, I refer the hon. Member to my answer to the hon. Member for Woodspring (Dr. Fox) of 3 March 2009,  Official Report, columns 1435-36W.

Armoured Fighting Vehicles

Nick Harvey: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence what percentage of  (a) Warrior,  (b) CVR(T) and  (c) Saxon vehicles have been fit for service in each year since 2005.

Quentin Davies: "Fit for service" has been interpreted as the MOD's "Fit for Purpose", which is a vehicle capable of being used for the purpose for which it is required:
	
		
			  Fit for purpose 
			  Percentage 
			   Vehicle type 
			   Warrior  CVR(T)  Saxon 
			 2005 65 63 62 
			 2006 64 64 74 
			 2007 58 50 79 
			 2008 74 58 97

AWE Burghfield: Nuclear Weapons

Mike Hancock: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence pursuant to the answer of 22 January 2009,  Official Report, column 1668W, on AWE Burghfield: nuclear weapons, what internationally recognised standards and codes of practice are applicable.

Quentin Davies: A wide range of internationally recognised standards and codes of practice are pertinent to the proposed main process facility for the assembly and disassembly of nuclear warheads at AWE Burghfield. Those that are most relevant to the resilience to nuclear accidents are in the following table.
	
		
			  Document Reference Number  Reference 
			 JSP 482 MoD Explosives Regulations 
			 T/AST/ 003 NII Technical Assessment Guide - Safety Systems 
			 T/AST/ 005 NII Technical Assessment Guide - Demonstration of ALARP 
			 T/AST/ 007 NII Technical Assessment Guide - Severe Accident Analysis 
			 T/AST/ 008 NII Technical Assessment Guide - Safety Categorisation and Equipment Qualification 
			 T/AST/ 017 NII Technical Assessment Guide - Structural Integrity, Civil Engineering Aspects 
			 T/AST/018 NII Technical Assessment Guide - Criticality Incident Detection Systems 
			 T/AST/006 Deterministic Safety Analysis and use of Engineering Principles in Safety Assessment 
			 TM5-1300 Structures to resist the effects of Accidental Explosions. US Departments of the Army, the Navy and the Air Force November 1990 
			 UFC UFC 3-340-01 Protective Structures Automated Design System (PSADS) Design and Analysis of Hardened Structures To Conventional Weapons Effects U.S. Army Corps of Engineers June 2002 
			 No reference number Manufacture and Storage of Explosives Regulations 2005 
			 No reference number Baker, W et al Explosion Hazards and Evaluation 1983 
			 No reference number Kingery, C.N. Bulmarsh, G Airblast Parameters from Spherical Air Burst and Hemispherical Surface Burst US Army Armament Research and Development Centre 1984 
			 No reference number Hyde, D Con Wep - Conventional Weapons Effects. Department of the Army, Waterways Experimental Station, US Army Corps of Engineers 1986 
		
	
	Typical standards relating to facility integrity are in the following table.
	
		
			  Document Reference Number  Reference 
			 ACI349-06 Code Requirements For Nuclear Safety Related Concrete Structures 
			 ANSI/AISC341sl-05 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings 
			 ANSI/AISC 358-05 Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Moment Frames in Seismic Applications 
			 ANSI/AISC 360 05 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings 
			 ASCE 43-05 Seismic Design Criteria for Structures, Systems and Components in Nuclear Facilities 
			 ASCE 4-98 Seismic analysis of safety related nuclear structures 
			 ATC40 Applied Technology Council Seismic Evaluation and Retrofit of Concrete Buildings 
			 AWSD1.8/D1.8M:2005 Structural Welding Code - Seismic Supplement 
			 BS 2573; Part 1 Rules for the Design of cranes - Specification for classification, stress calculations and design criteria for structures; 1983.. 
			 BS 2573; Part 2 Rules for the Design of cranes - Specification for classification, stress calculations and design of mechanisms; 1983. 
			 BS 2573-1 Rules for the Design of Cranes - Part 1: Specification for Classification, Stress Calculations and Design Criteria for Structures 
			 BS 2573-2 Rules for the Design of Cranes - Part 2: Specification for Classification, Stress Calculations and Design of Mechanisms 
			 BS 4094 Data on Shielding from Ionising Radiation 
			 BS 4449:2005 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete - Weldable reinforcing steel - Bar, coiled and decoiled product. 
			 BS 5628 Code of Practice for use of masonry 
			 BS 5760 Reliability of systems, equipment and components 
			 BS 5950-1:2000 Structural use of steelwork in buildings. Code of Practice for design - Rolled and welded sections. 
			 BS 6385 Ergonomic principles in the design of work systems 
			 BS 6399 Loading for buildings 
			 BS 8110-1:1997 Structural Use of Concrete. Part 1 Code of Practice for design and construction. 
			 BS EN 13001-1 Crane Safety -General Design 
			 BS EN 13001-2 Crane Safety-General Design 
			 BS EN 13463-1 Non-electrical equipment for potentially explosive atmospheres 
			 BS EN 292-1 Safety of Machinery- Basic concepts, general principals for design 
			 BS EN 349 Safety of machinery: Minimum gaps to avoid crushing parts of the human body 
			 BS EN 614 Safety of machinery: Ergonomic design principles 
			 BS EN 62305 Lightning Regulations 
			 BS EN ISO 11604 Ergonomic Design of Control Centres 
			 BS EN 1011-2: 2001 Welding Recommendations for welding of metallic materials Arc welding of ferritic steels 
			 BS EN 287-1: 2004 Qualification test of welders Fusion welding. Steels 
			 BS EN 875: 1995 Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials. Impact tests Test specimen location, notch orientation and examination 
			 BS EN ISO 15609-1 Specification and qualification of welding procedures for metallic materials. Welding procedure specification Arc welding 
			 BS EN ISO 15614-1 Specification and qualification of welding procedures for metallic materials - Welding procedure test - Part 1 Arc and gas welding of steels and arc welding of nickel and nickel alloys 
			 Def Stan 00-25 Human factors for designers of equipment 
			 Def Stan 00-40 Reliability and Maintainability (R and M) 
			 Def Stan 00-41 Reliability and Maintainability MOD Guide to Practices and Procedures 
			 DEF STAN 08-5 Structural requirements for weapon support equipment; Issue 1 Chapter 5 
			 FEMA 440 Improvement of non-linear static seismic analysis procedures (2005) 
			 HSEACOPL138 Health and Safety Executive - Approved Code of Practice and Guidance - Dangerous Substances and Explosive Atmospheres 
			 IAEA Tecdoc 1333 Earthquake experience and seismic qualification by indirect methods in nuclear installations 
			 IAEA-TECDOC-1347 IAEA Report: Consideration of external events in the design of nuclear facilities other than nuclear power plants, with emphasis on earthquakes, dated March 2003 
			 IEEE 344:1987 Recommended practice for seismic qualification of Class IE equipment for nuclear power generating stations 
			 IRPCG Changerooms Design Operation and Maintenance a Nuclear Industry Code of Practice 
			 JSP 440 Defence Manual for Security 
			 JSP 467 The specification of power driven lifting appliances used for handling conventional and nuclear armaments 
			 JSP 482 Explosives regulations 
			 JSP 538 Issue 2. Regulation of the Nuclear Weapon Programme - Nuclear Weapon Safety Principles and Safety Criteria and Safety Principles and Guidelines for Nuclear Weapon Systems 
			 Kincade, R.G. Anderson J. - Electrical Power Institute Human Factors Guide for Nuclear Power Plant Control Room Development. Other standards 
			 Mil Std 1472D Department of Defence: Human engineering requirements for military systems, equipment and facilities 
			 Mil Std 1472F Department of Defence: Design Criteria Standard - Human engineering 
			 MoD/DE Functional Standard Design and Maintenance Guide 02 'Glazing standards for MoD buildings subject to terrorist threat' 
			 NF0121/1 Ergonomics: Guidelines for the design of operator interfaces. British Nuclear Fuels plc 
			 SI 1988 No. 1657 The Control of Substances Hazardous to Health Regulations (COSHH) 
			 SI 1998 No. 2307 The lifting operations and lifting equipment regulations (LOLER) 
			 SI 1999 No. 3232 Ionising Radiation Regulations (IRRs) 
			 STGP10 (Sea Technology Group, MoD) "HFI Management Guide" 
			 No reference number Flood Estimation Handbook, Institute of Hydrology, Wallingford, UK, 1999 
			 No reference number Flood Studies Report, Institute of Hydrology, HR Wallingford, UK, 1975 
			 No reference number The Crown Fire Standards 1997 
			 No reference number Lifting Operation and Lifting Equipment Regulations 
			 No reference number SQUG, Generic Implementation Procedure GIP for Seismic Verification of Nuclear Plant Equipment - Revision 3 A, December 2001

Ballistic Missile Defence

Nick Harvey: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence what the Government's policy is on a ballistic missile defence shield in Europe to provide security against Iran; and if he will make a statement.

John Hutton: The Government see ballistic missile defence as an important defensive capability which could contribute to the defence of the UK and our NATO Allies against potential future ballistic missile threats.

Defence: International Co-operation

Nick Harvey: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence what progress has been made since the Anglo-French summit of 27 March 2008 on the aspects of defence co-operation that were agreed there; and if he will make a statement.

John Hutton: The UK and France have made good progress on all aspects of defence co-operation that were agreed during the 2008 summit.
	The Declaration of Intent for the European Carrier Group Interoperability Initiative (ECGII) has so far been signed by nine European nations, building on the Summit commitment to Carrier Group Operations. The inaugural Steering Group met in Paris on 18 March. This is a high level declaration of intent aiming to increase interoperability between countries operating aircraft carriers or with naval vessels able to support carrier operations. There is no intention to create a standing carrier group.
	The UK-France helicopter Initiative that was launched at the summit continues to gather momentum. The Helicopter Fund opened by the UK to support projects aimed at delivering helicopter capability to operational theatres now stands at €26 million with contributions from 15 nations. Other nations have offered to host multi-national helicopter exercises to prepare crews for deployment, to provide training courses, to donate surplus helicopters and even to supply pilots for other nations to use on operations. More importantly, the first nation to benefit from the initiative, the Czech Republic, deploys three helicopters to Afghanistan this year. Since the summit three other nations have also made a commitment to deploy helicopters and projects launched through the Helicopter Initiative will make a substantial and essential contribution to their theatre-entry equipment upgrades and crew training requirements. All this effort is very closely co-ordinated with NATO and EDA programmes to address the same problem.
	Both nations continue to discuss NATO transformation with one another and the work to strengthen EU/NATO co-operation is continuing. The anticipated return of France to the military structures of NATO has given a new impetus to these discussions.
	Ministers and officials have met and continue to meet on numerous occasions to drive forward bilateral industrial defence co-operation. Progress has been made in all the areas highlighted in the 2008 Communiqué and we continue to seek new opportunities to develop our co-operation. The High Level Working Group will be providing a report on progress to the 2009 Anglo-French summit that is due to take place later this year.
	Specifically we have made good progress with Complex Weapons. We have been working to assess the scope to co-operate on a range of projects including the potential to enter into Assessment Phases to examine enhancements for Storm Shadow and the French SCALP programme and to develop an anti-surface guided weapon for use on naval helicopters.
	The UK and France have been working closely since the last summit to explore the opportunities for a common approach to A400M support. This work is continuing.

Defence: International Co-operation

Nick Harvey: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence what recent discussions he has had with his US counterpart on  (a) European defence cooperation and  (b) the Anglo-French defence partnership; and if he will make a statement.

John Hutton: I have regular discussions with my US counterpart on a variety of defence issues, including a broad range of issues related to NATO and European Security and Defence Policy.

Departmental Electricity Generation

Simon Hughes: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence what  (a) capital and  (b) maintenance expenditure his Department has incurred on standby diesel generators for back-up electricity supply of his Department's estate in each year since March 1997.

Kevan Jones: The information requested is not held centrally and could be provided only at disproportionate cost.

Departmental ICT

Jennifer Willott: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence which ICT projects costing more than £1 million his Department has initiated and abandoned before completion in each year since 2003-04; what costs were incurred in each project; who the main contractor for each project was; on what date each  (a) commenced and  (b) was abandoned; and if he will make a statement.

Quentin Davies: The information requested is not held centrally and could be provided only at disproportionate cost.

EU Battlegroups

Andrew Murrison: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence what the expected cost of the Government's contribution to the EU Battlegroup roster will be in 2010.

John Hutton: The UK commitment to the EU Battlegroup roster for January to July 2010 will be met by forces from the Small Scale Contingency Battlegroup element of the Joint Rapid Reaction Force (JRRF). As this is a national high readiness contingency which is already on stand-by during the relevant period, there is no additional cost to the UK of providing an EU Battlegroup on stand-by. The Small Scale Contingency Battlegroup will consist of forces drawn from the longstanding UK-Netherlands Amphibious Landing Force. As with all NATO activities, the principle of funding for the UK-Netherlands Amphibious Landing Force is that costs lie where they fall; each nation therefore pays its own costs.
	There would be additional costs to the UK were the Battlegroup to deploy. However, an EU Battlegroup is a stand-by commitment intended for emerging contingencies and it is impossible to predict at the current time whether or not it will be deployed during its stand-by period. The cost to the UK of deploying an EU Battlegroup would depend on the nature and length of any deployment.

Gurkhas: Retirement

Liam Fox: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence what proportion of Gurkhas retired from the armed forces to  (a) the UK,  (b) Nepal and  (c) other locations in each year since 1997.

Kevan Jones: Before 1 April 2007 all Gurkhas were discharged and retired in Nepal. From 1 April 2007 all Gurkhas have had the right to retire in the UK or Nepal and all have chosen to retire in the UK. Records are not held on where Gurkhas choose to live following their retirement from the Army, but it is estimated that some 6,000 ex-Gurkhas have settled in the UK under Home Office immigration rules introduced in 2004 and of these it is estimated that some 2,200 have retired since 1997.

Iraq: Peacekeeping Operations

Harry Cohen: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence with reference to the answer to the hon. Member for Woodspring (Dr. Fox) of 26 November 2008,  Official Report, columns 1552-3W, on Iraq: peacekeeping operations, how much was paid to Harlow Specialist Life Support and Logistics for photocopier hire for use on Operation Herrick.

Quentin Davies: No payment has been made to Harlow Specialist Life Support and Logistics for photocopier hire for use on Operation Herrick.
	The four-year contract with Harlow Specialist Life Support and Logistics for the hire of two photocopiers for use on Operation Telic has a total contract value of approximately £50,000.

Iraq: Peacekeeping Operations

Michael Ancram: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence how many UK military personnel he expects to be deployed in Iraq after August 2009.

John Hutton: I refer the right hon. and learned Member to the answer I gave him on 2 February 2009,  Official Report, column 875W.

Joint Working Groups

Nick Harvey: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence pursuant to the answer of 27 February 2009,  Official Report, column 1150W, on nuclear weapons, how much was spent on the visits in each year; and how much was paid for by the Government in each year.

John Hutton: Information on the precise costs is not held centrally and could be provided only at disproportionate cost. However, I am able to provide the average cost of UK attendance at the Joint Working Group meetings held in the US between 2001 and 2008; costs range from an average of £4,800 per meeting in 2001 to an average of £6,000 per meeting in 2008. All these costs are either directly or indirectly incurred by the UK Government.

Joint Working Groups

Nick Harvey: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence 
	(1)  how the costs of co-operation with the United States on nuclear weapons technology are shared under the co-operation terms of the 1958 Mutual Defence Agreement;
	(2)  what the  (a) total combined costs and  (b) costs to the Government of co-operation with the United States on nuclear weapons technology have been in each of the last 30 years under the 1958 Mutual Defence Agreement.

John Hutton: Co-operation on experiments and trials conducted under the auspices of the 1958 Mutual Defence Agreement, are generally undertaken on a "costs lie where they fall" basis. There are some exceptions to this, such as material and equipment procured to support national requirements or under bartering arrangements. The UK has also contributed to the funding of collaborative trials in the US which support the UK's strategic weapon programme.
	Additionally, having judged it cost-effective to do so, MOD has recently entered into a collaborative arrangement which requires the UK to contribute financially to activities at the US National Ignition Facility (NIF) that support the UK programme. This extends the previously announced investment at the NIF to $64 million.
	Neither the total combined costs, nor costs to the UK of our collaboration with the United States under the Mutual Defence Agreement are readily available and could be provided only at disproportionate cost.

Military Aircraft: Helicopters

Nick Harvey: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence what percentage of helicopters by type in the forward fleet were fit for purpose in each year since 2001.

Quentin Davies: I refer the hon. Member to the answer I gave on 3 March 2009,  Official Report, column 1441W, to the hon. Member for Woodspring (Dr. Fox).

Nuclear Submarines

Angus Robertson: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence when the Interim Storage of Laid-Up Submarines Group will commence its programme of dismantling the UK's defuelled nuclear powered submarines.

Quentin Davies: No decisions on the dismantling programme will be made until completion of a Strategic Environmental Assessment and public consultation. It is the intention to make an announcement regarding the programme in 2010.

Nuclear Submarines

Angus Robertson: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence 
	(1)  when the strategic capacity for storing nuclear submarines in Rosyth Dockyard will be reached;
	(2)  when the strategic capacity for storing nuclear submarines in Devonport Royal Dockyard will be reached.

Quentin Davies: Any submarines leaving service with the Royal Navy are planned to remain at Devonport Royal Dockyard until there has been a decision on the dismantling solution.
	Similarly, it is not intended to move any of the currently laid-up submarines until there is a decision on the dismantling solution.
	Based on these plans, UK afloat storage capacity is forecast to run out before 2020.

Nuclear Submarines

Angus Robertson: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence whether new facilities for defuelling and de-equipping submarines at Devonport Royal Dockyard will be completed by 2012.

Quentin Davies: Facilities for defuelling and de-equipping submarines at Devonport Royal Dockyard continue to be planned for completion in 2012.

Nuclear Submarines

Angus Robertson: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence what progress has been made in meeting the 2010 date for a storage solution for the nuclear waste from the seven UK nuclear vessels at Rosyth Dockyard.

Quentin Davies: We intend to make an announcement in 2010 regarding the proposed locations for submarine dismantling and the interim storage of the resultant nuclear waste. This is dependent on a number of factors, particularly the completion of a strategic environmental assessment later this year, and the intention to carry out further public consultation before any decisions are made. Good progress is being made towards this goal.

Nuclear Submarines

Angus Robertson: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence what other locations have been proposed as alternative storage sites for decommissioned nuclear submarines at Rosyth Dockyard.

Quentin Davies: No sites other than Devonport Royal Dockyard and Rosyth Dockyard are being considered as storage sites for laid-up submarines before they are dismantled.
	We do not currently intend to move any of the laid-up submarines before a submarine dismantling site has been proposed. We plan to announce the proposed site in 2010.

Nuclear Submarines

Angus Robertson: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence if he will estimate the cost of moving the seven decommissioned UK nuclear submarines at Rosyth Dockyard to another site in the UK.

Quentin Davies: We do not intend to move any defuelled submarines until the completion of the strategic environmental assessment, public consultation and departmental approval of the dismantling solution.
	Cost forecasts for any proposed movement would be developed as part of the preparation of the project's Main Gate Business Case, which is planned to be completed in 2014.

Nuclear Submarines

Angus Robertson: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence when the next UK nuclear submarine is due to be taken out of service; and whether it will be berthed at Rosyth Dockyard.

Quentin Davies: The next UK submarine due to be taken out of service is HMS Trafalgar, scheduled for later this year. We currently intend to store HMS Trafalgar at Devonport Royal Dockyard until she has been defuelled. Its subsequent storage location will depend on the dismantling programme that is being developed.

Nuclear Submarines

Angus Robertson: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence whether all decommissioned submarines in Rosyth and Devonport Dockyards have been surveyed for possible holes.

Quentin Davies: I refer the hon. Member to the answer my right hon. Friend the Minister for Armed Forces gave on 13 June 2008,  Official Report, column 560W.

Nuclear Submarines

Angus Robertson: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence what assessment he has made of the effects on the environment of moving the seven decommissioned British nuclear powered submarines from the Rosyth Dockyard.

Quentin Davies: No decisions have been yet been made about when or how submarines will be moved.
	The existing Interim Storage of Laid-Up Submarines (ISOLUS) Project Environmental Impact Assessment includes consideration of transportation matters. It is our intention to make this document available publicly in the near future.
	More detailed assessments of the environmental impact of any planned movement of the submarines will be developed as required by relevant legislation.

Nuclear Submarines

Angus Robertson: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence what was discussed at the seventh meeting of the Interim Storage of Laid-Up Submarines Group on Wednesday 11 March 2009; and if he will make a statement.

Quentin Davies: The Interim Storage of Laid-Up Submarines (ISOLUS) Advisory Group is an independently chaired group that provides independent assessment of proposals and outcomes. It also acts in a scrutiny and advisory role to the Ministry of Defence ISOLUS Steering Group.
	The meetings are open to the public to observe and notes of meetings are published on the ISOLUS website
	www.isolus.org.uk
	A wide range of ISOLUS-related matters were discussed at the meeting on 11 March 2009. Notes from the meeting will be published on the ISOLUS website in April 2009 in line with normal practices.

Nuclear Submarines

Angus Robertson: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence 
	(1)  how many decommissioned UK nuclear-powered submarines with nuclear fuel in their reactors are at Devonport Royal Dockyard;
	(2)  where the UK nuclear-powered submarines located at Devonport Royal Dockyard will be housed after they have been defuelled.

Quentin Davies: There are four decommissioned UK nuclear powered submarines that have fuel in their reactors at Devonport Royal Dockyard.
	The plan is that they will remain there until a decision on the dismantling solution has been made.
	It is the intention to make an announcement about the dismantling solution in 2010.

Nuclear Submarines

Angus Robertson: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence when a decision will be made on the movement of decommissioned British nuclear powered submarines from Rosyth Dockyard.

Quentin Davies: The movement of submarines will depend on the dismantling programme that is being developed by the Interim Storage of Laid-Up Submarines (ISOLUS) Project. This will be confirmed when the project receives Main Gate approval, which is scheduled for 2014.

Nuclear Submarines

Angus Robertson: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence whether the collision with Le Triomphant resulted in damage to the torpedo tube hatches on HMS Vanguard; and whether torpedoes were unloaded from HMS Vanguard before it was docked in the Faslane shiplift on 20 February 2009.

John Hutton: I am withholding information about any damage that may have been sustained by HMS Vanguard as a result of the collision with FS Le Triomphant on the grounds of national security. I can confirm that the nuclear safety and security of HMS Vanguard was not compromised. It is standard procedure to off-load torpedoes from an SSBN before it enters the Faslane Shiplift facility.

Nuclear Submarines

Angus Robertson: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence when HMS Vanguard will return to full operational capacity.

John Hutton: I am withholding information about the operational capacity of HMS Vanguard on the grounds of national security. I can confirm that the requirements of the deterrent patrol cycle will continue to be met.

RAF St. Athan

Robert Walter: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence by what date he expects the Defence College of Communications and Information Systems to have completed its transfer from Blandford Camp to St. Athan.

Bob Ainsworth: The current estimate is for the Defence College of Communications and Information Systems to be fully operational at St. Athan by May 2015. This date remains subject to final approval of the main investment decision of the DTR Package 1 Project, subsequent contract agreement and confirmation of the transition planning arrangements.

Reserve Forces

Liam Fox: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence what percentage of the Volunteer Reserve has been committed to operations in each year since 1997, broken down by service.

Bob Ainsworth: Information on Volunteer Reservists committed to operations is not held centrally in individual level databases, and therefore it is not possible to calculate the percentage of Volunteer Reservists committed to operations in each year without incurring disproportionate cost.
	The forthcoming Reserves Review will make reference to "over 21,000 Volunteer Reserves" mobilised since 2003. However, data on Volunteer Reserves mobilisations are not held centrally in individual level databases and therefore it is not possible to split this approximate total by service, or to calculate the exact number of mobilisations within any year.
	Aggregated snapshot: data of the number of mobilised Volunteer Reservists are available and therefore it is possible to calculate the percentage of Volunteer Reservists mobilised at given points in time. The following tables show the number and percentage of Volunteer Reservists mobilised at 1 April in each year for which data are available, for each service:
	
		
			  Royal Naval Reserve and Royal Marine Reserve mobilisations at 1 April each year 
			   Strength  Of  which: mobilised  Percentage mobilised 
			 1997 4,260 (1)— (1)— 
			 1998 4,440 (1)— (1)— 
			 1999 4,520 (1)— (1)— 
			 2000 4,820 (1)— (1)— 
			 2001 4,830 (1)— (1)— 
			 2002 4,980 (1)— (1)— 
			 2003 4,910 370 7.5 
			 2004 4,480 60 1.3 
			 2005 4,360 20 0.5 
			 2006 (2)— (2)— (2)— 
			 2007 3,680 80 2.2 
			 2008 3,590 180 5.0 
			 (1) Zero or rounded to zero (2) Not available 
		
	
	
		
			  Territorial Army mobilisations at 1 April each year 
			   Strength  Of  which mobilised  Percentage mobilised 
			 2004 38,320 2,890 7.5 
			 2005 37,260 1,460 3.9 
			 2006 38,460 1,110 2.9 
			 2007(1) 36,790 1,020 2.8 
			 2008(2) (3)35,020 (3)1,360 (3)3.9 
			 (1) 2007 Territorial Army data are as at 1 March (2) 2008 Territorial Army data are as at 1 June (3) Provisional 
		
	
	Figures for actual strength of TA personnel prior to 2004 are not held centrally.
	
		
			  Royal Auxiliary Air Force mobilisations at 1 April each year 
			   Strength  Of  which mobilised  Percentage mobilised 
			 1997 2,020 (1)— (1)— 
			 1998 2,490 (1)— (1)— 
			 1999 2,620 20 0.8 
			 2000 2,740 40 1.5 
			 2001 2,570 20 0.8 
			 2002 2,590 80 3.1 
			 2003 2,580 840 32.6 
			 2004 2,580 20 0.8 
			 2005 2,450 30 1.2 
			 2006 2,300 90 3.9 
			 2007 (2)2,160 (2)200 (2)9.3 
			 2008 (2)2,200 (2)100 (2)4.5 
			 (1) Not available (2) Provisional

Warships

Liam Fox: To ask the Secretary of State for Defence how many orders were placed for new  (a) Royal Navy and  (b) Royal Fleet Auxiliary vessels in each year since 1979.

Quentin Davies: Order dates (when build contracts were let) are provided in the following table for the Queen Elizabeth Class carriers, the Astute Class submarines and the Type 45 destroyers. As there is no requirement to keep contractual information for Royal Navy and Royal Auxiliary vessels beyond seven years, order dates for all other vessels built since 1979 are no longer held. The table does, however, include details of when building work commenced on these other vessels as this is the next significant milestone following the order date.
	
		
			   Vessel  
			   Royal Navy (incl. submarines and surface ships)  Royal Fleet Auxiliary  Total 
			 1979 HMS Trafalgar (Trafalgar Class Submarine)  16 
			  HMS Gloucester (Type 42 Destroyer)   
			  HMS Boxer (Type 22 Frigate)   
			  HMS Cattistock (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Brocklesbury (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Cottesmore (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Dulverton (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Chiddingfold (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Middleton (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Hurworth (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Bicester (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Atherstone (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Berkeley (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Quorn (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Ledbury (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Alderney (Offshore Patrol Vessel)   
			 
			 1980 HMS Turbulent (Trafalgar Class Submarine)  4 
			  HMS Edinburgh (Type 42 Destroyer)   
			  HMS York (Type 42 Destroyer)   
			  HMS Beaver (Type 22 Frigate)   
			 
			 1981 HMS Tireless (Trafalgar Class Submarine) Bayleaf (Auxiliary Oiler) 5 
			  HMS Brave (Type 22 Frigate) Diligence (Forward Repair Ship)  
			  HMS Leeds Castle (Offshore Patrol Vessel)   
			 
			 1982 HMS Torbay (Trafalgar Class Submarine)  3 
			  HMS London (Type 22 Frigate)   
			  HMS Dumbarton Castle (Offshore Patrol Vessel)   
			 
			 1983 HMS Cornwall (Type 22 Frigate)  3 
			  HMS Sheffield (Type 22 Frigate)   
			  HMS Gleaner (Survey Vessel)   
			 
			 1984 HMS Coventry (Type 22 Frigate)  2 
			  HMS Cumberland (Type 22 Frigate)   
			 
			 1985 HMS Trenchant (Trafalgar Class Submarine) Sir Galahad (Landing Ship Logistic) 7 
			  HMS Campbeltown (Type 22 Frigate)   
			  HMS Norfolk (Type 23 Frigate)   
			  HMS Sandown (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Archer (Inshore Training Vessel)   
			  HMS Example (Inshore Training Vessel)   
			 
			 1986 HMS Talent (Trafalgar Class Submarine) Oakleaf (Auxiliary Oiler) 7 
			  HMS Vanguard (Vanguard Class Submarine)   
			  HMS Chatham (Type 22 Frigate)   
			  HMS Roebuck (Survey Vessel)   
			  HMS Bitter (Inshore Training Vessel)   
			  HMS Smitter (Inshore Training Vessel)   
			 
			 1987 HMS Triumph (Trafalgar Class Submarine)  7 
			  HMS Victorious (Vanguard Class Submarine)   
			  HMS Argyll (Type 23 Frigate)   
			  HMS Inverness (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Cromer (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Walney (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Bridport (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			 
			 1988 HMS Lancaster (Type 23 Frigate) Fort Victoria (Auxiliary Oiler Replenishment) 14 
			  HMS Blazer (Inshore Training Vessel) Argus (Aviation Training and Primary Casualty Reception Ship)  
			  HMS Puncher (Inshore Training Vessel)   
			  HMS Charger (Inshore Training Vessel)   
			  HMS Ranger (Inshore Training Vessel)   
			  HMS Trumpeter (Inshore Training Vessel)   
			  HMS Express (Inshore Training Vessel)   
			  HMS Exploit (Inshore Training Vessel)   
			  HMS Tracker (Inshore Training Vessel)   
			  HMS Raider (Inshore Training Vessel)   
			  HMS Dasher (Inshore Training Vessel)   
			  HMS Purser (Inshore Training Vessel)   
			 
			 1989 HMS Iron Duke(Type 23 Frigate) Fort George (Auxiliary Oiler Replenishment) 4 
			  HMS Marlborough (Type 23 Frigate)   
			  HMS Monmouth (Type 23.Frigate)   
			 
			 1990 HMS Montrose (Type 23 Frigate)  3 
			  HMS Westminster (Type 23 Frigate)   
			  HMS Northumberland (Type 23 Frigate)   
			 
			 1991 HMS Vigilant (Vanguard Class Submarine)  3 
			  HMS Richmond (Type 23 Frigate)   
			  HMS Endurance (Antarctic Patrol Ship)   
			 
			 1992 HMS Somerset (Type 23 Frigate)  2 
			  HMS Grafton (Type 23 Frigate)   
			 
			 1993 HMS Vengeance (Vanguard Class Submarine)  3 
			  HMS Sabre (Inshore Training Vessel)   
			  HMS Scimitar (Inshore Training Vessel)   
			 
			 1994 HMS Sutherland (Type 23 Frigate)  9 
			  HMS Ocean (Landing Platform Helicopter)   
			  HMS Bangor (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Blyth (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Grimsby (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Pembroke (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Penzance (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Ramsey (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			  HMS Shoreham (Mine Countermeasures Vessel)   
			 
			 1995 —  0 
			 
			 1996 HMS Kent (Type 23 Frigate)  2 
			  HMS Scott (Survey Vessel)   
			 
			 1997 HMS Astute (Astute Class Submarine)—order date  3 
			  HMS Ambush (Astute Class Submarine)—order date   
			  HMS Artful (Astute Class Submarine)—order date   
			 
			 1998 HMS Portland (Type 23 Frigate)  3 
			  HMS St. Albans (Type 23 Frigate)   
			  HMS Albion (Landing Platform Dock)   
			 
			 1999 —  0 
			 
			 2000 HMS Daring (Type 45 Destroyer)—order date Wave Knight (Auxiliary Oiler) 5 
			  HMS Dauntless (Type 45 Destroyer)—order date   
			  HMS Diamond (Type 45 Destroyer)—order date   
			  HMS Bulwark (Landing Platform Dock)   
			 
			 2001 HMS Tyne (Offshore Patrol Vessel) Largs Bay (Landing Ship Dock (Auxiliary)) 3 
			   Wave Ruler (Auxiliary Oiler)  
			 
			 2002 HMS Dragon (Type 45 Destroyer)—order date Lyme Bay (Landing Ship Dock (Auxiliary)) 10 
			  HMS Defender (Type 45 Destroyer)—order date Mounts Bay (Landing Ship Dock (Auxiliary))  
			  HMS Duncan (Type 45 Destroyer)—order date Cardigan Bay (Landing Ship Dock (Auxiliary))  
			  HMS Severn (Offshore Patrol Vessel)   
			  HMS Mersey (Offshore Patrol Vessel)   
			  HMS Echo (Survey Vessel)   
			  HMS Enterprise (Survey Vessel)   
			 
			 2003 —  0 
			 
			 2004 —  0 
			 
			 2005 —  0 
			 
			 2006 —  0 
			 
			 2007 HMS Audacious (Astute Class Submarine)—order date  1 
			 
			 2008 HMS Queen Elizabeth (Future carrier)—order date  2 
			  HMS Prince of Wales (Future carrier)—order date

WORK AND PENSIONS

Children: Maintenance

Derek Twigg: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many people who have made overpayments to the Child Support Agency are waiting for a refund; and how many have been waiting for a refund for longer than  (a) one month,  (b) three months,  (c) six months and  (d) one year.

Kitty Ussher: I have consulted with the Child Maintenance and Enforcement Commission who are now responsible for the child maintenance system including the Child Support Agency. They have confirmed that the information requested is not available.

Community Care Grants

Andrew Selous: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions what percentage of applications for community care grants were rejected in the most recent period in each of the smallest geographic areas for which figures are available.

Kitty Ussher: holding answer 19 March 2009
	The information is provided in the following table.
	
		
			  Jobcentre Plus Social Fund budget area (ordered by region)  Percentage of community care grant applications initially refused from 1 April 2008 to 28 February 2009 
			  East of England  
			 Essex 56 
			 Norwich Benefit Delivery Centre 61 
			   
			  East Midlands  
			 East Midlands North 56 
			 South East Midlands 58 
			   
			  London  
			 Central and East London 56 
			 London South 53 
			 North and North East London 58 
			 West London 57 
			   
			  North East  
			 Northumbria 52 
			 South Tyne and Wear Valley 62 
			 Tees Valley 59 
			   
			  North West  
			 Chorlton Benefit Delivery Centre 62 
			 Greater Liverpool and Cheshire 53 
			   
			  Scotland  
			 Inverness Benefit Delivery Centre 60 
			 Springburn Benefit Delivery Centre 54 
			   
			  South East  
			 Berkshire, Oxfordshire, Buckinghamshire and Surrey 50 
			 Hampshire, Isle of Wight, Kent and Sussex 47 
			   
			  South West  
			 South West Central 55 
			   
			  Wales  
			 Llanelli Benefit Delivery Centre 50 
			 South East Wales 51 
			   
			  West Midlands  
			 West Midlands Social Fund 59 
			   
			  Yorkshire and Humberside  
			 Bradford 58 
			 Sheffield 57 
			  Note: Percentages are based on applications processed from 1 April 2008 to 28 February 2009, not on applications received during that time period.  Source: DWP Social Fund Policy, Budget and Management Information System.

Council Tax Benefits

Julia Goldsworthy: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions if he will estimate the revenue forgone by the Exchequer by increasing personal allowances for the purposes of calculating council tax benefits by  (a) 10,  (b) 20,  (c) 30,  (d) 40 and  (e) 50 per cent.; and if he will estimate the effect of each level of increase on the number of claimants of council tax benefit.

Kitty Ussher: holding answer 18 March 2009
	 The information is in the following table.
	
		
			  Estimates of the cost and number of council tax beneficiaries if personal allowances are increased 
			  Increase in personal allowance (percentage)  Number of beneficiaries  Cost in annually managed expenditure (£ million per year) 
			 10 1,130,000 20 
			 20 1,150,000 30 
			 30 1,170,000 50 
			 40 1,180,000 60 
			 50 1,200,000 80 
			  Notes: 1. All figures are for Great Britain.  2. Beneficiaries are rounded to the nearest 10,000 and costs are rounded to the nearest £10 million. These include both customers who gain and those who become entitled to the benefit.  3. Each beneficiary represents a benefit unit, which can be a single claimant or a couple.  4. The impact is estimated using the Department's Policy Simulation Model for 2008-09, using data from the 2006-07 Family Resources Survey up-rated to 2008-09 prices, benefit rates and earnings levels, and is calibrated to latest published forecasts and policies.  5. Results are subject to sampling and reporting errors and estimation assumptions, and are therefore indicative only. No behavioural changes are assumed.

Council Tax Benefits

Julia Goldsworthy: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions what the effect on the public purse would be of raising the applicable amounts at which households begin to start paying council tax to  (a) £116 per week for a (i) single person aged under 25, (ii) single person aged over 25 and (iii) couple of working age,  (b) £174 per week for a single person aged between 65 and 74 years old and  (c) £177 per week for a single person aged 75 years and over.

Kitty Ussher: holding answer 19 March 2009
	The information is in the following table.
	The table shows estimates of the cost and number of council tax benefit (CTB) beneficiaries and the saving and number of losers if the following changes are made to applicable amounts in CTB:
	Option 1: Applicable amount for single people under 25 set to £116
	Option 2: Applicable amount for single people over 25(1) set to £116
	Option 3: Applicable amount for working age couples(2) set to £116
	Option 4: Applicable amount for single people between 65 and 74 set to £174
	Option 5: Applicable amount for single people 75 and over set to £177
	(1) This change has not been applied to elderly cases i.e. only applied to those aged under 60.
	(2) This has only been applied to cases where both are aged under 60.
	
		
			 Change applicable amounts in council tax benefit for some groups 
			  Change in applicable amount  Number of beneficiaries  Cost  in annually managed expenditure  (£ million  p.a. )  Number of losers  Saving  in annually managed expenditure  (£ million  p.a. )  Impact  on annually managed expenditure  (£ million  p.a. ) 
			 Option 1 60,000 20 0 0 20 
			 Option 2 260,000 60 160,000 -50 10 
			 Option 3 40,000 10 170,000 -70 -60 
			 Option 4 150,000 30 10,000 0 30 
			 Option 5 200,000 40 30,000 -10 40 
			  Notes: 1. All figures are for Great Britain. 2. Beneficiaries and losers are rounded to the nearest 10,000. Costs and savings are rounded to the nearest £10 million. These estimates include both customers who gain/lose and those who become entitled or lose entitlement to the benefit. 3. Each beneficiary represents a benefit unit, which can be a single claimant or a couple. 4. The impact is estimated using the Department's Policy Simulation Model for 2008-09, using data from the 2006-07 Family Resources Survey uprated to 2008-09 prices, benefit rates and earnings levels, and is calibrated to latest published forecasts and policies. 5. Results are subject to sampling and reporting errors and estimation assumptions, and are therefore indicative only. No behavioural changes are assumed.

Departmental Manpower

John McDonnell: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many full-time equivalent staff in his Department worked primarily or solely on the Social Fund in each of the last 10 years.

Tony McNulty: holding answer 12 March 2009
	The administration of Jobcentre Plus is a matter for the acting Chief Executive of Jobcentre Plus, Mel Groves. I have asked him to provide the hon. Member with the information requested.
	 Letter from Mel Groves:
	The Secretary of State for Work and Pensions has asked me to reply to your question asking how many full-time equivalent staff in the Department worked primarily or solely on the Social Fund in each of the last 10 years. This is something which falls within the responsibilities delegated to me as Acting Chief Executive of Jobcentre Plus.
	The tables attached at Annex 1 provide the average number of staff working on Social Fund from April 2008 to September 2008, the mid point of the 2008/09 operational year for each Benefit Delivery Centre and Contact Centre.
	The table below shows the approximate numbers working on social fund in each year since 2003/4. No data are available prior to 2003/04.
	
		
			   Staff (FTEs) 
			 2003-04 3,400 
			 2004-05 3,200 
			 2005-06 3,200 
			 2006-07 3,300 
			 2007-08 3,600 
		
	
	Historically it is difficult to make a robust estimate of the number of staff working on Social Fund alone. Although Social Fund activity was recorded on our Activity Based Modelling System, we know that for many of these staff Social Fund was only part of their work. Following centralisation of benefit processing, which began in April 2006 and was completed in March 2008, we can be more confident that our data represent people working full time on Social Fund.
	
		
			  Annex 1: Social Fund processing locations and average staff numbers between April 2008 and September 2008 
			  Benefit delivery centre  Average staff numbers (FTEs) 
			 Balham and Ilford 382 
			 Basildon 66 
			 Belle Vale 227 
			 Bradford 62 
			 Bristol 153 
			 Chesterfield 73 
			 Chorlton 221 
			 Inverness 121 
			 Llanelli 59 
			 Milton Keynes 178 
			 Newcastle 67 
			 Newport 123 
			 Norwich 99 
			 Nottingham 78 
			 Perry Barr 252 
			 Sheffield 174 
			 Springburn 276 
			 Stockton 73 
			 Sunderland 89 
			 Total 2,773 
			  Source: Jobcentre Plus ABM systems 
		
	
	
		
			  Contact centre locations  Average staff numbers (FTEs) 
			 Annesley 85 
			 Middlesbrough 165 
			 Lowestoft 95 
			 Caerphilly 73 
			 Dundee 117 
			 Taunton 90 
			 Halifax 115 
			 Marton Mere 40 
			 Lincoln 25 
			 Pembroke Dock 40 
			 Total 845 
			  Source: Contact Centre Directorate

Departmental Manpower

Michael Ancram: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions what recent assessment he has made of the likely effects of changes in levels of unemployment on staffing levels in  (a) his Department and  (b) Jobcentre Plus.

Tony McNulty: The Department and its agencies keep headcount plans under continuous review. Jobcentre Plus is increasing its staffing levels to deal with changes in the level of unemployment and announced an increase of 6,000 staff for 2009-10 on the 25 November 2008 to maintain the delivery of help and support for people who have lost their jobs. The Department will provide further details of its headcount plans, including those in Jobcentre Plus, in its revised three year plan which will be published after the Budget.

Disability Living Allowance: Age

Steve Webb: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions 
	(1)  if he will estimate the cost to the Exchequer of removing the rule that prevents people from making an initial claim for disability living allowance over the age of 65 for all new claims from people over this age, in each of the next six years;
	(2)  if he will estimate the cost to the Exchequer of increasing the age at which people can claim disability living allowance for the first time to  (a) 70,  (b) 75 and  (c) 80 years old; and if he will make a statement;
	(3)  if he will estimate the cost to the Exchequer of paying disability living allowance in place of attendance allowance to all pensioners currently receiving attendance allowance in each of the next six years.

Jonathan R Shaw: The information is not available. Entitlement to disability living allowance can only be established when a claim is made and the actual care or mobility needs of the individual are assessed.
	There are no reliable data available on which estimates could be made of abolishing or extending the upper age limit up to which disability living allowance can be claimed.

Economic and Monetary Union

Francis Maude: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions with reference to the Answer of 14 July 2008,  Official Report, column 132W, on economic and monetary union, whether his Department's updating of its euro changeover plan has been completed; and if he will place in the Library the latest version of the plan.

Jonathan R Shaw: The plan is a high-level technical document summarising the main activities and time scales for work on DWP IT systems that would need to be set in hand if an announcement were to be made that the UK were joining the euro. It would not be appropriate or informative to place this in the Library.

Housing Benefit

Willie Rennie: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions 
	(1)  how many people in each constituency have received local housing allowance in each of the last three years;
	(2)  how much housing benefit has been dispensed to people in each constituency by local authorities under  (a) local reference rents and  (b) local housing allowance in each of the last four years;
	(3)  how much of the housing benefit dispensed to people in each constituency by local authorities under  (a) local reference rents and  (b) local housing allowance in each of the last four years was for housing in the private rented sector.

Kitty Ussher: holding answer 20 March 2009
	Housing Benefit information is not currently available at constituency level.

Housing Benefit

Willie Rennie: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions what estimate his Department has made of  (a) the number of applications for local housing allowance and  (b) the estimated Government expenditure on local housing allowance in (i) 2009, (ii) 2010 and (iii) 2011.

Kitty Ussher: holding answer 20 March 2009
	The Department has not estimated the total number of applications to housing benefit assessed according to local housing allowance rules in each year.
	The Department estimates expenditure for local housing allowance by financial year rather than calendar year. Estimates of expenditure are provided in the table.
	
		
			  £ billion 
			   Estimated cost of local housing allowance 
			 2009-10 2.6 
			 2010-11 3.7 
			 2011-12 4.4 
		
	
	As the local housing allowance is being rolled out initially to new claims and those who move address, expenditure increases as more of the private rented sector caseload moves on to local housing allowance each year.
	It is important to note that these estimates are subject to a number of assumptions and estimates are sensitive to small changes in these assumptions.

Housing Benefit

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many housing benefit recipients there have been in each region in each year since 1997.

Kitty Ussher: The information is in the following table.
	
		
			  Number of housing benefit recipients in each region 1997 to 2007 
			  Date  Great Britain  North East  North West  Yorkshire and the Humber  East Midlands  West Midlands 
			 August 1997 4,591,920 278,120 450,810 589,610 276,340 411,620 
			 August 1998 4,425,210 269,290 431,880 575,400 266,840 398,590 
			 August 1999 4,243,410 204,120 451,100 518,630 257,770 383,950 
			 August 2000 3,968,250 250,070 537,220 357,190 241,160 363,950 
			 August 2001 3,867,480 240,870 518,340 348,970 237,460 355,310 
			 August 2002 3,798,760 236,290 512,380 341,650 223,870 349,110 
			 August 2003 3,813,560 234,660 505,660 343,410 229,290 351,720 
			 August 2004 3,943,590 230,850 522,260 346,450 237,950 352,870 
			 August 2005 3,981,020 229,240 516,760 347,050 239,570 355,480 
			 August 2006 4,024,280 228,350 516,070 345,790 244,910 366,760 
			 August 2007 4,040,940 227,440 518,560 349,450 244,850 369,570 
		
	
	
		
			  Date  East  London  South East  South West  Wales  Scotland 
			 August 1997 323,130 744,720 440,810 311,930 232,810 532,030 
			 August 1998 311,250 705,020 422,500 301,270 228,050 515,120 
			 August 1999 295,460 655,840 401,860 290,050 219,810 504,830 
			 August 2000 275,530 598,220 382,910 272,930 209,870 479,200 
			 August 2001 270,780 594,180 369,660 267,300 207,000 457,620 
			 August 2002 267,870 599,200 362,300 257,230 200,670 448,180 
			 August 2003 271,430 615,100 365,510 260,870 197,530 438,390 
			 August 2004 282,110 661,020 388,170 270,250 200,830 450,850 
			 August 2005 289,220 686,160 399,390 277,430 200,240 440,480 
			 August 2006 297,060 689,680 412,680 288,850 201,940 432,210 
			 August 2007 302,140 698,340 416,410 286,210 200,690 427,260 
			  Notes: 1. The data refer to benefit units, which may be a single person or a couple. 2. The figures have been rounded to the nearest 10. 3. Figures for any non-responding authorities have been estimated. 4. Housing benefit figures exclude any extended payment cases. 5. From February 2007, DWP has been collecting more detailed housing benefit/council tax benefit data electronically from local authorities. Over time this will improve the accuracy, timeliness and level of detail available in the published statistics. However, until the new data have been fully quality assured to National Statistics standards, the most recent summary statistics available are for August 2007.  Source: Housing Benefit and Council Tax Benefit Management Information System Quarterly 100 per cent caseload stock-count taken in August 1997 to August 2007.

Housing Benefit: Internet

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how much his Department spent on its housing benefit website in each of the last three years.

Kitty Ussher: The Department provides web pages about the administration of housing benefit for local authority staff on its corporate website
	www.dwp.gov.uk/housingbenefit
	There are no separately quantifiable ongoing running costs for this section of the website.
	Maintenance of DWP websites is mostly carried out by the Department's own in-house digital media team. It is not possible for us to quantify internal staff costs, because in most cases, staff are engaged in more than one role. In addition, we are unable to establish accurately our infrastructure costs because they form part of a wider departmental IT contract.
	This section of the website was redeveloped in 2008 to make it easier for local authority staff to use. A contractor was employed specifically to undertake this work at a cost of £25,200.
	DWP is currently working with the COI to develop a standardised method for quantifying website costs across Government. We will be implementing this standard from March 2009 in line with the current timetable.

Income Support: Mortgages

Theresa May: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions 
	(1)  what estimate he has made of the number of people who are receiving support for mortgage interest payments at a level below the standard rate of 6.08 per cent. and the rates at which such people are receiving payment;
	(2)  when he expects that the IT system faults affecting the level at which support for mortgage interest payments are received to be rectified; and when he expects all recipients to receive the correct level of payment;
	(3)  when his Department received reports that faults in its IT systems had caused errors in payments of support for mortgage interest; when he was informed of the faults; and what steps his Department has taken to rectify the errors;
	(4)  what estimate he has made of the average weekly underpayment of Support for Mortgage Interest for those not being paid at the standard interest rate of 6.08 per cent. as a result of the recent IT systems' failures in his Department;
	(5)  what plans he has to ensure that customers receiving underpayments of Support for Mortgage Interest (a) do not fall into arrears,  (b) do not receive a poor credit rating and  (c) are not put at risk of repossession as a result of IT systems' failure in his Department.

Kitty Ussher: I refer the hon. Member to the written answer I gave the hon. Member for Northavon (Steve Webb) on 4 March 2009,  Official Report, column 1614W.
	When the Chancellor's decision was made to help our customers by keeping the support for mortgage interest rate at 6.08 per cent. we had already reprogrammed the IT which governs the assessment and payment of DWP benefits to implement the 1.5 per cent. reduction in the base rate announced by the Bank of England on 6 November. This was not a failure, but part of normal processing which could not be reversed without significant risk of disrupting the normal running of our IT systems, most critically the uprating of benefits—affecting many more cases than just those getting Support for Mortgage Interest. The solution we adopted was designed to reduce the risk of disruption while ensuring customers were received the extra money as speedy as possible.

Income Support: Mortgages

Theresa May: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions whether all the people receiving Support for Mortgage Interest payments at a level below the standard interest rate of 6.08 per cent. as a result of IT systems' failures in his Department have been informed of the problem.

Kitty Ussher: The amount of Support for Mortgage Interest is calculated by applying a Standard Interest Rate (SIR) to the capital outstanding on the mortgage SIR was based on the Bank of England base rate plus an additional 1.58 per cent. However, the Government were concerned that significant cuts in the base rate would disadvantage customers on benefit if they were reflected in the calculation of Support for Mortgage Interest, but not in the interest rates on their mortgages.
	Given these exceptional circumstances, the Chancellor announced on 24 November 2008 in the pre-Budget report that the SIR should remain at 6.08 per cent. for six months to help our customers.
	When the Chancellor's decision was made, we had already re-programmed the IT which governs the assessment and payment of DWP benefits to implement the 1.5 per cent. reduction in the base rate announced by the Bank of England on 6 November 2008. This was not a failure, but part of normal processing which could not be reversed without significant risk of disrupting the normal running of our IT systems, most critically the uprating of benefits—affecting many more cases than just those getting support for mortgage interest. The solution we adopted was designed to reduce the risk of disruption whilst ensuring customers received their full entitlement.
	Customers who were receiving support for mortgage interest will have received notifications generated by our IT system that their interest payments decreased from 14 December 2008. By now they should have received further notifications telling them about the increase in their benefit to reflect our decision to keep the interest rate higher than it would otherwise have been for six months.
	Guidance has been issued to the Pension, Disability and Carers Service and Jobcentre Plus staff, to help them identify and correct benefit claims with housing costs that have been affected by the reduction. Telephony staff were fully briefed to deal with queries from members of the public, and to concentrate efforts on readjusting the effected cases.
	Mortgage lenders, via the Council of Mortgage Lenders, have also been advised about the situation to ensure that lenders are aware of exactly what is happening.
	Detailed guidance has been issued to local authorities so that action is taken to protect council tax benefit claims.

Jobcentre Plus

Theresa May: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions what the most recent Jobcentre Plus workload forecasts updated on 31 January are for the volume of claims for  (a) jobseeker's allowance,  (b) income support,  (c) incapacity benefit or employment and support allowance and  (d) Social Fund loans for each quarter up to 2015, broken down by (i) region, (ii) local authority, (iii) constituency and (iv) Jobcentre Plus district; what the total costs are expected to be; and if he will make a statement.

Tony McNulty: The information requested is not available.

Jobcentre Plus: Lerwick

Alistair Carmichael: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many job vacancies were advertised in the Lerwick job centre in each month of 2008; and for what average length of time each job was advertised in that year.

Tony McNulty: The information is in the following table, and provides separate data for unfilled and notified vacancies to give the fullest picture of the number of Jobcentre Plus vacancies in any particular constituency. The labour market is dynamic and many new vacancies are filled so quickly they do not appear in the statistics for live unfilled vacancies, which are based on a snapshot of the vacancies available on a particular day.
	The coverage of these figures relates only to Jobcentre Plus notified and unfilled vacancies. Many vacancies come up through other recruitment channels and the proportion accounted for by Jobcentre Plus is likely to vary over time, according to the occupation of the vacancy and industry of the employer, and by local area. Estimates of the number of unfilled job vacancies across the economy as a whole are available from the monthly ONS Vacancy Survey, based on a sample of some 6,000 enterprises. However, the ONS survey is currently designed to provide national estimates only.
	In addition, it should be noted that parliamentary constituencies are often a poor match to the area covered by the local labour market. The number and range of jobs available to people within normal travel to work distances often extends well beyond immediate constituency boundaries.
	
		
			  Job vacancies advertised in Lerwick Jobcentre Plus offices in 2008 
			   Live unfilled vacancies  Notified vacancies  Median duration (days between notification and closure] 
			 January 2008 39 35 42.0 
			 February 2008 52 90 42.0 
			 March 2008 59 66 37.9 
			 April 2008 28 48 28.0 
			 May 2008 22 59 37.8 
			 June 2008 109 186 36.4 
			 July 2008 124 78 39.5 
			 August 2008 110 108 46.0 
			 September 2008 60 79 51.6 
			 October 2008 75 116 34.4 
			 November 2008 58 105 37.2 
			 December 2008 41 65 33.4 
			  Notes: 1. Data are unrounded. 2. Changes to Jobcentre Plus vacancy handling procedures have led to a major discontinuity in the vacancy statistics pre and post May 2006. Consequently, care should be taken in interpreting time-series data. 3. Notified vacancies. Monthly data on the inflow of newly notified vacancies to Jobcentre Plus. 4. The median duration (in days) is calculated by ranking all the vacancies in order of ascending duration and taking the middle value. Half the vacancies will have a duration greater than the median, and half will have a duration less than the median. For most purposes, the median will give a more representative measure of the average duration; a mean figure tends to be distorted by a small number of vacancies that have very long durations. 5. These figures are published at www.nomisweb.co.uk  Source: Jobcentre Plus Labour Market System

Jobcentre Plus: Manpower

John McDonnell: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many of the 6,000 additional Jobcentre Plus staff announced on 25 November 2008 had been recruited by the latest date for which figures are available; and by what date he expects all of those staff to have been recruited.

Tony McNulty: holding answer 11 March 2009
	The administration of Jobcentre Plus is a matter for the Acting Chief Executive of Jobcentre Plus, Mel Groves. I have asked him to provide the hon. Member with the information requested.
	 Letter from Mel Groves:
	The Secretary of State has asked me to reply to your question, asking how many of the 6,000 additional Jobcentre Plus staff announced on 25 November 2008 had been recruited on the latest date for which figures are available; and by what date he expects all of those staff to have been recruited. This is something which falls within the responsibilities delegated to me as Acting Chief Executive of Jobcentre Plus.
	Recruitment to deal with increased work load has already started and by the end of March 2009 we will have around 4,000 more staff than in our original Spending Review plans. The funding of an additional 6,000 Jobcentre Plus staff announced in the Pre Budget Report was specifically for 2009-10 onwards. We will be running major national recruitment campaigns for Personal Advisers and Interventions staff from 13 March 2009.

Jobcentre Plus: Manpower

John McDonnell: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many staff were employed in Jobcentre Plus in each year since its establishment.

Tony McNulty: holding answer 11 March 2009
	The administration of Jobcentre Plus is a matter for the Acting Chief Executive of Jobcentre Plus, Mel Groves. I have asked him to provide the hon. Member with the information requested.
	 Letter from Mel Groves:
	The Secretary of State has asked me to reply to your question asking how many staff were employed in Jobcentre Plus in each year since its establishment. This is something that falls within the responsibilities delegated to me as Acting Chief Executive of Jobcentre Plus.
	We are unable to provide information prior to April 2003.
	The table below provides the number of full-time equivalents employed each year since April 2003 and up to January 2009.
	
		
			  Staff employed by Jobcentre Plus since April 2003 
			   Full time equivalent staff 
			 April 2003 82,904 
			 March 2004 80,097 
			 March 2005 74,475 
			 March 2006 71,221 
			 March 2007 67,946 
			 March 2008 66,416 
			 January 2009 67,941 
			  Note: Headcount figures are quoted in full-time equivalents using the Office for National Statistics criteria for counting headcount.  Sources: 1. Jobcentre Plus Management Information Portal. Information not available prior to April 2003 due to data capacity reasons. 2. Data for March 2008 and January 2009 is provided from "Dataview", an electronic extract from the DWP Resource Management system.

Jobcentre Plus: Training

Mark Lancaster: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions what assessment he has made of the adequacy of training a Jobcentre Plus financial assessor receives before starting work.

Tony McNulty: The administration of Jobcentre Plus is a matter for the Acting Chief Executive of Jobcentre Plus, Mel Groves. I have asked the Acting Chief Executive to provide the hon. Member with the information requested.
	 Letter from Mel Groves:
	The Secretary of State has asked me to reply to your question asking what assessment he has made of the adequacy of training a Jobcentre Plus financial assessor receives before starting work. This is something that falls within the responsibilities delegated to me as Acting Chief Executive of Jobcentre Plus.
	The adequacy of all Jobcentre Plus training products, including those for financial assessors is monitored closely during all stages of development (including rigorous quality assurance stages) by colleagues from policy branch and subject matter experts who are fully involved in every stage of the development lifecycle.
	Additionally, the products are regularly discussed by our Senior Operational Managers at national, regional and district levels to ensure that the quality of the learning we provide is maintained.

Jobseeker's Allowance

John McDonnell: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many appeals there have been against sanctions issued for non-compliance with the jobseeker's allowance regime in each of the last five years for which figures are available.

Tony McNulty: Fixed-length sanctions are issued for non-compliance with the jobseeker's allowance interventions regime. The information is in the following table.
	
		
			  Financial year  Fixed-length sanctions imposed  Appeals received 
			 2003-04 31,720 370 
			 2004-05 28,960 360 
			 2005-06 29,650 380 
			 2006-07 39,180 500 
			 2007-08 47,000 670 
			  Note: All figures are rounded to the nearest 10. Some additional disclosure control is applied. Source: DWP Information Directorate: Jobseeker's Allowance Sanctions and Disallowance Decisions Statistics Database.

Jobseeker's Allowance

Sally Keeble: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many  (a) men and  (b) women were in receipt of (i) contribution-based and (ii) income-based jobseeker's allowance in each of the last 12 months for which figures are available.

Tony McNulty: The available information is in the following table; the data are collected quarterly and not month by month.
	
		
			  Male and female recipients of jobseeker's allowance August 2007 to August 2008, Great Britain 
			   Males  Females 
			  Date  Contribution Based Only  Contribution and Income Based  Income Based Only  Contribution Based Only  Contribution and Income Based  Income Based Only 
			 August 2007 76,900 10,100 431,100 37,100 1,100 160,400 
			 February 2008 95,000 11,100 437,700 37,800 1,300 154,400 
			 May 2008 90,600 11,600 427,600 37,200 1,200 149,700 
			 August 2008 105,600 13,100 453,500 45,700 1,700 169,300 
			  Notes: 1. Figures have been uprated using 5 per cent. proportions against 100 per cent. WPLS totals. 2. Figures are rounded to the nearest 100. 3. Figures for November 2007 are not available due to JSA data for that quarter not being received by IFD. 4. Data are published at www.nomisweb.co.uk.  Source: DWP Information Directorate work and pensions longitudinal study (WPLS) Information Directorate, 5 per cent. samples.

Jobseeker's Allowance

John McDonnell: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions what percentage of jobseeker's allowance claimants had been claiming the benefit for over 12 months in each of the last 10 years for which figures are available.

Tony McNulty: holding answer 11 March 2009
	 The information is in the following table.
	
		
			  Proportion of jobseeker's allowance claimants who had been claiming for over 12 months as at January in each year 2000 to 2009 
			  January  Claimants (percentage) 
			 2000 22.0 
			 2001 19.4 
			 2002 16.3 
			 2003 14.5 
			 2004 14.8 
			 2005 14.4 
			 2006 13.9 
			 2007 16.5 
			 2008 14.0 
			 2009 8.4 
			  Notes:  1. Percentages are rounded to one decimal place.  2. Claimant count data are published at https://www.nomisweb.co.uk.  3. Figures exclude clerical cases.  Source:  100 per cent. count of claimants of unemployment-related benefits, Jobcentre Plus Computer Systems (computer held cases only).

Jobseeker's Allowance

Peter Bone: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many jobseeker's allowance claimants there were in  (a) the UK and  (b) Wellingborough constituency on the latest date for which figures are available.

Tony McNulty: In January 2009, there were 1,282,645 people claiming jobseeker's allowance in the UK and 2,710 in Wellingborough constituency. These numbers are based on seasonally unadjusted figures.
	 Notes:
	1. Data are rounded to the nearest five.
	2. Data are published at https://www.nomisweb.co.uk.
	3. This is the seasonally unadjusted figure for the UK and has been used for comparison purposes as seasonally adjusted figures are not available for parliamentary constituencies. The headline change reported for the UK is 351,500
	 Source:
	100 per cent. count of claimants of unemployment-related benefits, Jobcentre Plus Computer Systems (excludes clerical cases).

Jobseeker's Allowance: Bexley

David Evennett: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many people resident in each ward in the London Borough of Bexley claimed jobseeker's allowance in each of the last 12 months.

Tony McNulty: The information is in the following table.
	
		
			   2008  2009 
			  Ward  Feb  Mar  April  May  June  Jul y  Aug  Sep t  Oc t  Nov  De c  Jan 
			 Barnehurst 75 90 90 75 80 95 100 120 130 125 140 155 
			 Belvedere 145 155 160 165 150 155 165 190 190 190 210 220 
			 Blackfen and Lamorbey 60 70 65 60 65 60 80 90 100 110 120 155 
			 Blendon and Penhill 55 45 60 60 60 50 50 60 65 75 90 120 
			 Brampton 55 55 55 55 60 60 65 70 75 85 100 110 
			 Christchurch 105 90 95 105 85 90 90 105 105 115 125 145 
			 Colyers 185 195 190 180 185 190 205 220 210 210 220 240 
			 Cray Meadows 90 85 85 90 95 110 130 145 145 150 175 190 
			 Crayford 120 130 120 110 105 115 135 160 175 180 195 220 
			 Danson Park 85 75 75 90 105 100 110 135 125 145 160 185 
			 East Wickham 90 80 85 80 95 90 105 125 120 135 165 190 
			 Erith 175 175 195 195 190 180 190 200 185 195 230 260 
			 Falconwood and Welling 80 65 75 80 70 75 75 85 100 100 110 135 
			 Lesnes Abbey 130 135 140 150 145 135 150 170 175 200 225 230 
			 Longlands 55 50 50 45 50 50 60 65 75 80 90 105 
			 North End 205 210 210 215 215 210 215 230 230 230 265 305 
			 Northumberland Heath 100 95 100 95 100 90 110 110 105 115 125 140 
			 Sidcup 70 70 75 70 65 65 75 80 85 80 90 100 
			 St. Mary's 55 50 50 60 50 50 60 65 70 80 85 115 
			 St. Michael's 85 90 95 95 95 95 90 105 125 125 145 170 
			 Thamesmead East 240 235 235 230 235 235 240 260 270 290 315 345 
			  Notes: 1. Data are rounded to the nearest 5. 2. Data are published at https://www.nomisweb.co.uk. 3. Figures exclude clerical cases.  Source: 100 per cent. count of claimants of unemployment-related benefits, Jobcentre Plus computer systems (computer held cases only).

Jobseeker's Allowance: Bexley

David Evennett: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions what percentage of young people in  (a) the London Borough of Bexley and  (b) Bexleyheath and Crayford constituency claimed jobseeker's allowance in each year since 2005.

Tony McNulty: The information for the London Borough of Bexley is in the following table.
	
		
			   Percentage of young people age 18 to 24 in Bexley claiming Jobseeker's Allowance 
			 January 2005 3.2 
			 January 2006 3.7 
			 January 2007 3.6 
			 January 2008 2.6 
			 January 2009 4.5 
			  Notes: 1. Number of claimants rounded to nearest five. Percentages are rounded to one decimal place. 2. Data are published at https://www.nomisweb.co.uk. 3. Figures exclude clerical cases. 4. Population estimates are taken from the ONS mid year population statistics for the relevant year except the years 2008 and 2009 which are based on the 2007 estimate. The information for Bexleyheath and Crayford Constituency is not available.  Source: 100 per cent. count of claimants of unemployment-related benefits, Jobcentre Plus computer systems (computer held cases only).

New Deal Schemes

John McDonnell: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions in which areas he expects flexible new deal providers will start delivery in October 2009.

Tony McNulty: holding answer 12 March 2009
	 The Government remain committed to bringing in the flexible new deal phase 1 from October 2009. The Jobcentre Plus districts in which flexible new deal phase 1 will be implemented are listed as follows.
	 Flexible new deal phase 1
	Birmingham and Solihull
	North and East Yorkshire and Humber
	Tees Valley
	South Yorkshire
	Derbyshire
	Surrey and Sussex
	Kent
	Leicestershire and Northamptonshire
	Nottinghamshire
	Central London
	Lambeth, Southwark and Wandsworth
	Devon and Cornwall
	South Wales Valleys
	South East Wales
	South West Wales
	North and Mid Wales
	Black Country
	Greater Manchester Central
	Greater Manchester East and West
	Coventry and Warwickshire
	The Marches
	Staffordshire
	Lanarkshire and East Dunbartonshire
	Edinburgh, Lothian and Borders
	Ayrshire, Dumfries, Galloway and Inverclyde
	Cambridgeshire and Suffolk
	Norfolk
	Lincolnshire and Rutland

New Deal Schemes

John McDonnell: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions what the budget for the flexible new deal is in each of the 14 areas in phase one of the project.

Tony McNulty: holding answer 12 March 2009
	The budgets included in the Invitation to Tender for flexible new deal phase 1 by region are in the table. Revised budgets and annual profiles are subject to on going commercial negotiation and review.
	
		
			  Annual indicative contract package total for the period October 2009 to September 2014 
			  £ million 
			  Contract package/Jobcentre Plus districts  
			 Ayrshire, Dumfries, Galloway and Inverclyde/Edinburgh, Lothian and Borders/Lanarkshire and East Dunbartonshire 17.11 
			 North East Yorkshire and the Humber/Tees Valley 20.99 
			 Greater Manchester Central/Greater Manchester East and West 18.52 
			 Derbyshire / South Yorkshire 17.86 
			 South East Wales / North and Mid Wales 8.59 
			 Coventry and Warwickshire/The Marches /Staffordshire 17.18 
			 Leicestershire and Northamptonshire/Nottinghamshire 18.32 
			 Cambridgeshire and Suffolk/Lincolnshire and Rutland/Norfolk 15.91 
			 Birmingham and Solihull 22.82 
			 Black Country 16.56 
			 South West Wales/South Wales Valleys 9.39 
			 London Central/Lambeth, Southwark and Wandsworth 26.78 
			 Kent/Surrey and Sussex 20.37 
			 Devon and Cornwall 6.19 
			 Total 236.59

Poverty: Children

David Laws: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions what estimate he has made of the number of children who were  (a) in relative poverty and  (b) in single parent households in each year since 1979; and if he will make a statement.

Kitty Ussher: The available information on the number of children living in relative low income since 1979 is given in the Households Below Average Income publication, published in June 2008, which is available in the Library.
	Estimates of the number of dependent children in lone parent households or dependent children in lone parent families are readily available from different sources. Dependent children in lone parent families include children who may not be included in lone parent households, usually because they live in a multiple family household. Figures for England and Wales taken from the 2001 Census show that there were 2.4 million dependent children living in lone parent households, while there were 2.7 million dependent children living in lone parent families. Historic time series data are only readily available for children in lone parent families, not households.
	Historic estimates of the number of dependent children living in lone parent families in Great Britain are available in past issues of  Population Trends. The relevant issues are 109 (autumn 2002): "One parent families and the dependent children living in them in Great Britain" and 91 (spring 1998): "One parent families and their dependent children." These are collated in the following table.
	
		
			  Dependent children living in lone parent families in Great Britain 
			   Number of dependent children (million) 
			 1971 1.0 
			 1976 1.3 
			 1981 1.5 
			 1984 1.5 
			 1986 1.6 
			 1987 1.7 
			 1988 1.8 
			 1990 2.0 
			 1991 2.2 
			 1992 2.3 
			 1993 2.4 
			 1994 2.5 
			 1995 2.6 
			 1996 2.7 
			  Source: Best estimates using trends and combined survey sources (see Population Trends 91 and 109—articles on lone parents for details of the methodology) 
		
	
	Estimates are not readily available for all years.
	More recent estimates for the UK are available from the Labour Force Survey and shown in the following table for all years between 1997 and 2008.
	
		
			  Dependent children living in lone parent families in the UK 
			   Number of dependent children (million) 
			 1997 2.7 
			 1998 2.9 
			 1999 2.9 
			 2000 2.9 
			 2001 2.9 
			 2002 3.0 
			 2003 3.0 
			 2004 3.0 
			 2005 3.0 
			 2006 3.0 
			 2007 3.0 
			 2008 3.0 
			  Source: Labour Force Survey household data, April to June quarters, not seasonally adjusted. 
		
	
	 Notes:
	1. Given the different geography and different methods and sources used to prepare the estimates in these tables, they are not directly comparable.
	2. All estimates are based on survey data and therefore subject to uncertainty.
	3. Dependent children are children under 16, or those under 19 who are in full-time education. In addition, children cease to be dependent when they form their own family (ie they have children, marry or cohabit).

Social Fund

David Evennett: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many Social Fund loans were not repaid in the last five years for which figures are available.

Kitty Ussher: The number of loans outstanding as at 31 March 2008 for loans awarded in each of the last five years is as follows:
	
		
			  Year of original award  Number of loans outstanding 
			 2003-04 300,064 
			 2004-05 380,201 
			 2005-06 555,354 
			 2006-07 1,298,484 
			 2007-08 2,305,653 
		
	
	Standard repayment terms for Social Fund Loans are 104 weeks, and in exceptional circumstances this can be extended to 130 weeks. Accordingly loans issued in both 2006-07 and 2007-08 would not necessarily have reached term.
	Overall around £8 billion in loans has been awarded since 1988 with only £38 million (0.5 per cent.) being written off to date and recoveries continue to be pursued for both on and off benefit customers.

Social Security Benefits: Arrears

Roger Gale: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions what recent assessment he has made of the effect on claimants of  (a) income support,  (b) incapacity benefit,  (c) jobseeker's allowance,  (d) severe disablement allowance and  (e) widow's benefit of the introduction of fortnightly payments in arrears; what steps have been taken to publicise this change; and if he will make a statement.

Tony McNulty: holding answer 23 February 2009
	The changes are being introduced as they will simplify the process of paying the working age benefits listed above and will make it easier for customers to move between these benefits.
	Customers receiving these benefits will not lose money when these changes come in as entitlement to benefit will be continuous. The change in pay periods may result in a perceived "gap" during the transition from weekly to fortnightly payments and customers who are unable to manage this gap will be able to apply for a repayable loan.
	Jobcentre Plus has arranged a comprehensive communication campaign about the changes. Each customer will receive an initial letter or interview up to six months before they are moved to the new system. Further information will also be available from the Information Line advertised in the letter and on the Jobcentre Plus or Directgov websites. Four weeks before any changes are due to occur customers will also receive an individual detailed notification explaining exactly how and when the changes will be made and what help is available.

Social Security Benefits: Voluntary Work

Lynne Jones: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions what information his Department provides to claimants on their rights to undertake voluntary work and the effect of such work on their entitlement to  (a) incapacity benefit and  (b) jobseeker's allowance.

Tony McNulty: Working-age people in receipt of all benefits may do unlimited voluntary work, provided they continue to meet the usual benefit entitlement conditions.
	Jobcentre Plus provides information on the benefit conditions relating to volunteering in a range of ways including: through a comprehensive leaflet covering incapacity benefit, jobseeker's allowance and other benefits; through its internet web site which has links to advice on volunteering from other organisations; and through its network of local advisers based in Jobcentre Plus offices.

Vacancies: Chelmsford

Simon Burns: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many job vacancies were notified to Jobcentre Plus branches in  (a) West Chelmsford constituency and  (b) the Chelmsford local authority area in each of the last 12 months.

Tony McNulty: holding answer 9 March 2009
	The information is in the following table.
	
		
			  Vacancies notified to Jobcentre Plus in West Chelmsford constituency and Chelmsford local authority area 
			   Live unfilled vacancies  Notified vacancies 
			  Date  West Chelmsford parliamentary constituency  Chelmsford local authority  West Chelmsford parliamentary constituency  Chelmsford local authority 
			 February 2008 1,050 1,124 1,231 1,345 
			 March 2008 1,020 1,148 915 1,029 
			 April 2008 851 956 842 930 
			 May 2008 857 991 938 1,052 
			 June 2008 860 1,045 1,010 1,195 
			 July 2008 1,399 1,524 1,273 1,339 
			 August 2008 1,014 1,087 1,121 1,246 
			 September 2008 748 867 721 841 
			 October 2008 954 1,088 1,009 1,092 
			 November 2008 1,132 1,257 1,142 1,256 
			 December 2008 752 808 477 522 
			 January 2009 312 365 298 331 
			  Notes: 1. Data are unrounded. 2. Changes to Jobcentre Plus vacancy handling procedures have led to a major discontinuity in the vacancy statistics pre and post May 2006. Consequently, care should be taken in interpreting time-series data. 3. These are not whole economy figures. Coverage relates just to vacancies notified to Jobcentre Plus and as such represent a market share of vacancies throughout the whole economy. This proportion varies over time, according to the occupation of the vacancy and industry of the employer, and by local area. Comprehensive estimates of all job vacancies (not just those notified to Jobcentre Plus) are available from the monthly ONS Vacancy Survey since April 2001, based on a sample of some 6,000 enterprises. However, the ONS survey is currently designed to provide national estimates only. 4. Notified vacancies. Monthly data on the inflow of newly notified vacancies to Jobcentre Plus. 5. The stocks of Live unfilled vacancies reflect more accurately job opportunities available via Jobcentre Plus. In the case of unfilled vacancies, use of the figures on live vacancies is recommended (i.e. excluding suspended vacancies), and this is the default option. Live vacancies may still include some vacancies which have already been filled or are otherwise no longer open. 6. To provide a geographic breakdown, in most cases the postcode of the vacancy is used to allocate the vacancy to a local area. Where this is missing or invalid, the employers' postcode or the postcode of the local Jobcentre Plus office is used. 7. These figures are published at www.nomisweb.co.uk 8. Parliamentary constituencies and local authority areas are often a poor match for local labour markets. The number and range of jobs available to people within normal travel to work distances often extend well beyond immediate constituency and local authority boundaries.  Source: Jobcentre Plus Labour Market System

Vacancies: Chelmsford

Simon Burns: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many job vacancies have been notified to the Chelmsford Jobcentre Plus in each of the last 12 months.

Tony McNulty: holding answer 20 March 2009
	The information is in the following table.
	
		
			  Vacancies notified to Chelmsford Jobcentre Plus Office in the last 12 months 
			   Number 
			 March 2008 1,593 
			 April 2008 1,177 
			 May 2008 1,305 
			 June 2008 1,534 
			 July 2008 1,559 
			 August 2008 1,408 
			 September 2008 984 
			 October 2008 1,211 
			 November 2008 1,369 
			 December 2008 568 
			 January 2009 358 
			 February 2009 1,208 
			  Notes: 1. Data are unrounded. 2. These are not whole economy figures. Coverage relates just to vacancies notified to Jobcentre Plus and as such represent a market share of vacancies throughout the whole economy. This proportion varies over time, according to the occupation of the vacancy and industry of the employer, and by local area. Comprehensive estimates of all job vacancies (not just those notified to Jobcentre Plus) are available from the monthly ONS Vacancy Survey since April 2001, based on a sample of some 6,000 enterprises. However, the ONS survey is currently designed to provide national estimates only. 3. Notified vacancies are the monthly data on the inflow of newly notified vacancies to Jobcentre Plus. 4. These figures are published at www.nomisweb.co.uk S ource:  Jobcentre Plus Labour Market System.

Vacancies: Wales

Cheryl Gillan: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions how many job vacancies advertised by each public sector employer there have been in each Jobcentre Plus district in Wales at each salary band in each week since 1 January 2009.

Tony McNulty: holding answer 18 March 2009
	 The information is not collated centrally.

Voluntary Work

Tony Baldry: To ask the Secretary of State for Work and Pensions what restrictions to entitlement to jobseeker's allowance are applied to individuals who are volunteers.

Tony McNulty: Working-age people in receipt of all benefits may do unlimited voluntary work, provided they continue to meet the usual benefit entitlement conditions. Jobseeker's allowance claimants must remain available for and actively seeking work, continue to attend mandatory interviews with their Jobcentre Plus adviser and take part in any mandatory work-focused activity. They are also requested to inform their personal adviser that they are volunteering.
	Provided they fulfil these conditions, jobseeker's allowance claimants may do unlimited voluntary work and have no restrictions applied to their benefit entitlement as a result.
	Unlike most jobseekers, who must be available for employment immediately, those undertaking voluntary work are allowed 48 hours notice to attend a job interview and one week's notice to take up employment. If they receive reimbursement for any expenses incurred while volunteering, this does not affect their benefit entitlement.

COMMUNITIES AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT

Council Housing: Rents

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government how many local authorities are planning an increase in  (a) average guideline rent and  (b) actual average rent equal to or less than 3.1 per cent. in 2009-10.

Iain Wright: This information will not be available until local authorities' consultation responses have been received to a draft Amending 2009-10 Housing Revenue Account Subsidy Determination.
	Consultation will be for four weeks commencing in the week beginning 23 March. We aim to publish the final Amending Determination in May.

Council Housing: Rents

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what the  (a) average guideline rent increase and  (b) actual average rent increase will be in each local authority in 2009-10.

Iain Wright: Information on average guideline rent increases for each local housing authority, reflecting a national average increase of 6.2 per cent., is contained in the Housing Revenue Account (HRA) subsidy determination 2009-10 which is on the Department's website.
	Information on average guideline rents for individual authorities based on a revised national average guideline increase of 3.1 per cent. will be issued for consultation this week as part of an Amending HRA subsidy determination for 2009-10.
	Local authorities' actual average rent increases will not be available until after the end of consultation on the Amending Determination.

Council Housing: Standards

David Drew: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what assessment she has made of the effect in the reduction of council house rent rises on the ability of local authorities to meet the decent homes standard.

Iain Wright: The reduction in guideline rents should have no impact on decent homes delivery, as any rent reductions in line with the proposal we have made will be covered by changes in local authority subsidy payments. The ability of a local authority to deliver decent homes is dependent on the level of capital repair and maintenance allowances and resources available, and the condition of its housing stock.

Council Tax

Greg Hands: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what the cumulative increase in band D council tax was for each local authority in England in the period from 2007 to 2010, ranked from lowest to highest.

John Healey: Details of the increase in band D council tax for each local authority in England in the period from 2007-08 and 2008-09 are available on the Communities and Local Government website at:
	http://www.local.communities.gov.uk/finance/ctax/data/ctaxtimes.xls
	Data for 2009-10 will not be available until after 26 March 2009.

Departmental Detergents

Annette Brooke: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government if she will make it her policy to ensure that no cleaning products or ingredients of cleaning products used by her Department have been tested on animals.

Sadiq Khan: Cleaning services for the Department's HQ building are provided under the integrated facilities management contract with MITIE. They have confirmed with their suppliers that none of the cleaning products used have been tested on animals.

Eco-towns

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government 
	(1)  what estimate she has made of the costs of the improvements to the A391 in respect of the St. Austell eco-town development;
	(2)  what estimate she has made of the likely costs of the on-site utilities to be proposed for the eco-town at Pennbury;
	(3)  what estimate she has made of the cost of the rail strategy of the Ford Airfield eco-town proposal;
	(4)  what assessment she has made of each of the base case assumptions made in respect of each proposed eco-town development as part of her Department's financial viability study.

Margaret Beckett: We are still consulting on the shortlisted locations, so at this stage in the process we have not undertaken detailed assessments. However, the Financial Viability Study, which we published on 5 March 2009, provides an initial high level assessment on whether an eco-town could be economically viable and as part of this looks at transport costs. We will consider this along with consultation responses and the further assessment work that has been undertaken when we take decisions on the final shortlist of locations with potential to be an eco-town.

Eco-towns

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government how much her Department spent on its financial viability study for eco-towns, broken down by cost category.

Margaret Beckett: I refer the hon. Member to the answer I gave him on 23 February 2009,  Official Report, column 108W, which sets out the costs for the eco-towns programme, including for the work on financial assessment to date. The recently published Financial Viability Study was an output from this work and carried out for us by a team of external advisers.

Eco-towns: Public Consultation

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government how many responses to the current consultation on eco-towns have been received; and what proportion are in favour of the schemes.

Margaret Beckett: We will issue our response to the consultation in due course following the close of the consultation, and this will include a summary of the numbers of responses and comments received.

Eco-towns: St Austell

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government how much public funding she expects to be provided for the St. Austell eco-town development; and which organisations she expects to support the scheme.

Margaret Beckett: The eco-towns consultation is still under way and no decisions have yet been taken on the final list of locations with potential to be an eco-town, so I am unable to comment on funding and support for St. Austell or any of the shortlisted proposals.

Eco-towns: Whitehill-Bordon

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what estimate she has made of the cost of acquiring the land at Whitehill Bordon owned by the Ministry of Defence.

Margaret Beckett: We are still consulting on the eco-towns programme and at this stage of the process we have not undertaken a detailed assessment of the costs of acquiring land for the Whitehill-Bordon proposal.

Empty Property

Margaret Moran: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government how many empty homes have been brought back into use since the introduction of empty dwellings management orders.

Iain Wright: We do not hold this information centrally. Empty dwelling management orders (EDMOs) are part of a wider range of powers available to local authorities to tackle empty homes in their area. We want to encourage voluntary reoccupation of empty homes but this can only work where there is realistic compulsion to back them up. EDMOs provide this compulsion and should therefore be a key component of a comprehensive empty property strategy. We are confident that the legislation is beginning to work well and local authorities claim that in many cases the threat of an EDMO has been sufficient to make owners take action to bring long-term empty homes back into use.
	We are keen for local authorities to make use of EDMOs, where appropriate, and are supporting the independent Empty Homes Agency's new guidance on EDMOs, which was launched on 10 March. The guidance is internet based and interactive and will take local authorities through the EDMO process step by step. My right hon. Friend the Minister for Housing provided a foreword for the guidance.
	We are also hosting a seminar at which I will address local authorities encouraging them to take action and to share best practice on tackling empty homes, including the use of EDMOs.

Home Ownership Incentive Schemes

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government 
	(1)  how much funding to support schemes and initiatives related to housing her Department has brought forward from  (a) 2009-10 and  (b) 2010-11; and if she will make a statement;
	(2)  what capital funding her Department has brought forward from its  (a) 2009-10 and  (b) 2010-11 budgets for use in (i) 2008-09 and (ii) 2009-10; and to what ends this funding has been allocated.

Sadiq Khan: Communities and Local Government has brought forward £25 million of capital expenditure from 2009-10 and £1,475 million from 2010-11 as a result of initiatives announced in the September Housing Package and pre-Budget report.
	£350 million has been brought forward to 2008-09, £1,000 million to 2009-10 and £55 million has been reallocated within 2010-11. This funding has been allocated to housing and regeneration programmes, including affordable housing, Decent Homes and the Community Infrastructure Fund. In addition £95 million has been made available for 2009-10 and 2010-11 to support reforms to Support for Mortgage Interest which is administered by the Department for Work and Pensions.
	The pre-Budget report also offered flexibility to the regional development agencies to bring forward up to £100 million of capital expenditure from 2010-11 to 2009-10. In addition, Communities and Local Government has invited local authorities to bring forward up to £175 million from 2010-11 to 2009-10 to accelerate major repairs to council housing stock.

HomeBuy Scheme

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what the average price of a property purchased through the MyChoiceHomeBuy scheme has been since the initiative began.

Margaret Beckett: The average price of property purchased through MyChoiceHomeBuy is £169,000.

HomeBuy Scheme

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government how many unique visitors were received by the HomeBuy website in each month since its launch.

Margaret Beckett: There is no single HomeBuy website, as HomeBuy agents are responsible for marketing their schemes, and consequently run their own individual websites. Links to all HomeBuy agents can be found on:
	www.homesandcommunities.co.uk/homebuy
	The general public can access details of the scheme centrally from:
	www.direct.gov.uk
	and further information on HomeBuy is also provided at:
	www.communities.gov.uk

HomeBuy Scheme

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what she expects the average monthly interest charged by HomeBuy Direct  (a) funders and  (b) providers to be; and if she will make a statement.

Margaret Beckett: Each HomeBuy Direct purchaser will receive two equity loans—one provided by the Homes and Communities Agency and one by the relevant developer. These loans will always be of equal value, and their combined value will be between 15 per cent. and 30 per cent. of the property price. No fee will be charged on either equity loan for the first five years after purchase. From year six, an annual fee (levied monthly) of 1.75 per cent. will apply to each loan. The annual interest rate for the equity loans will rise annually by the retail price index (RPI) plus 1 per cent.

HomeBuy Scheme

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what the average monthly interest charged by MyChoiceHomeBuy  (a) funders and  (b) providers has been since the scheme began.

Margaret Beckett: This information is not held centrally. Information on the annual fee payable on the MyChoiceHomeBuy equity loan is available at:
	http://www.communities.gov.uk/housing/buyingselling/ownershipschemes/homebuy/openmarkethomebuy/

HomeBuy Scheme

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government how many MyChoiceHomeBuy providers there are in each region.

Margaret Beckett: There are eight MyChoice HomeBuy providers across the country, each of whom work in specific zones. The breakdown between the regions is as follows:
	
		
			  Region  Number of MyChoice providers  Providers 
			 East Midlands 2 Metropolitan 
			   Bedfordshire Pilgrims 
			
			 Eastern 3 Aldwyck 
			   Bedfordshire Pilgrims 
			   Moat 
			
			 London 2 Metropolitan 
			   Tower 
			
			 North East 1 Metropolitan 
			
			 North West 1 Metropolitan 
			
			 South East 3 Catalyst 
			   Moat 
			   Thames Valley 
			
			 South West 1 Swaythling 
			
			 West Midlands 1 Metropolitan 
			
			 Yorkshire and Humberside 1 Metropolitan

HomeBuy Scheme

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government how much  (a) the Government and  (b) its partners have provided for the HomeBuy Direct scheme; and how much will be provided in each of the next three years.

Margaret Beckett: The Government are making £400 million available in the remainder of 2008-09 and 2009-10 to help up to 18,000 first time buyers into home ownership through the HomeBuy Direct scheme. The actual amount of expenditure incurred by Government will depend on take-up, as well as on the actual value of the equity loans that are provided to purchasers. The actual amount that is spent by Government will be matched by the participating developers (in the form of funding for equity loans).

HomeBuy Scheme

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government how many people have applied for assistance via the My ChoiceHomeBuy scheme; how many applications have been granted; and what the average level of support has been.

Margaret Beckett: 45,452 applications were made for the MyChoice HomeBuy scheme to the end of February 2009, of which 23,632 were approved by the provider for the purchaser to seek a property. Of the 3,300 applicants that purchased a property up to the end of February 2009 the average level of Government funding was £31,738.

Housing Defects Scheme

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what payments were made to local authorities under the Housing Defects Scheme in each of the last five years; and if she will make a statement.

Iain Wright: The following payments have been made to local authorities under the Housing Defects Scheme during the past five years:
	
		
			   £ 
			 2004-05 15,439,860 
			 2005-06 16,492,740 
			 2006-07 14,119,990 
			 2007-08 11,573,252 
			 2008-09 7,483,339

Housing: Construction

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government how many  (a) social and  (b) private enterprise homes were built in each region in each of the last 20 quarters.

Iain Wright: The following table shows the number of new build affordable homes for social rent in England, by region. These figures are not available quarterly.
	
		
			   2003-04  2004-05  2005-06  2006-07  2007-08 
			 North East 540 580 760 1,090 690 
			 North West 1,130 1,270 1,220 1,480 2,040 
			 Yorkshire and Humberside 1,150 1,040 1,090 1,370 1,340 
			 East Midlands 1,030 1,130 1,470 1,370 1,810 
			 West Midlands 1,710 1,860 2,060 1,300 2,060 
			 Eastern 2,440 2,670 2,810 3,400 4,120 
			 London 4,170 4,300 4,760 5,340 5,710 
			 South East 3,710 3,910 3,860 4,040 4,680 
			 South West 2,490 2,040 2,490 2,120 2,930 
			 England 18,370 18,790 20,510 21,500 25,390 
		
	
	The social rent new build figures are from the Homes and Communities Agency Investment Management System (IMS), and Housing Strategy Statistical Appendix (HSSA) returns and P2 house building returns submitted to CLG by local authorities and the National House-Building Council (NHBC).
	I have also answered a question for the hon. Gentleman,  Official Report, column 70W, showing the number of affordable homes provided in England. The social rent new build figures differ from the number of affordable homes provided because the affordable housing figures include intermediate rent and low cost home ownership as well as social rent, and they include acquisitions as well as new builds. The social rent new build figures in this answer exclude social rent acquisitions, intermediate rent and low cost home ownership.
	The following table shows the number of private enterprise house building completions, quarterly, for each region.
	
		
			  Quarter  North East  North West  Yorks and Humber  East Midlands  West Midlands  Eastern  London  South East  South West  England 
			 January to March 2004 1,150 3,680 2,890 3,180 2,720 3,380 2,610 4,840 3,220 27,670 
			 April to June 2004 1,770 3,850 4,080 3,470 3,240 4,280 4,690 6,220 4,130 35,730 
			 July to September 2004 1,560 5,660 3,780 3,390 3,010 4,390 5,520 4,820 4,000 36,120 
			 October to December 2004 1,760 4,290 3,180 4,360 3,690 5,180 4,880 6,180 4,290 37,810 
			 January to Mar 2005 1,550 3,460 2,780 3,440 3,050 3,930 2,800 4,980 3,470 29,470 
			 April to June 2005 1,740 4,350 3,700 3,830 4,200 4,240 3,450 6,380 4,820 36,710 
			 July to September 2005 1,740 4,130 3,410 4,070 3,610 4,300 2,830 5,760 3,700 33,550 
			 October to December 2005 2,140 6,580 4,780 4,470 4,000 5,340 3,970 6,310 4,420 42,010 
			 January to March 2006 1,520 4,810 3,880 3,210 3,090 3,710 3,360 5,120 3,990 32,670 
			 April to June 2006 1,850 4,200 3,630 4,610 3,740 5,180 4,490 6,570 4,070 38,350 
			 July to September 2006 1,430 3,320 3,720 3,580 3.670 4,390 3,480 4,760 4,000 32,340 
			 October to December 2006 2,110 5,170 3,750 4,120 3,450 5,250 2,630 5,750 4,330 36.550 
			 January to March 2007 2,110 4,480 4,660 4,350 3,290 4,780 3,830 5,800 5,160 38,450 
			 April to June 2007 2,230 5,420 4,370 4,180 3,520 5,250 3,260 5,800 4,470 38.490 
			 July to September 2007 1,630 4,090 3,860 3,870 2,650 4,740 4,050 5,460 3,610 33,950 
			 October to December 2007 2,430 5,030 3,690 4,710 3,440 5,050 3,370 8,670 4,830 41,210 
			 January to March 2008 1,190 5,010 3,240 3,250 2,360 3,810 2,280 5,140 3,680 29,940 
			 April to June 2008 1,150 4,030 2,940 3,260 2,820 3,980 3,200 6,910 3,500 31,790 
			 July to September 2008 930 2,710 2,860 2,000 2,110 3,070 2,880 5,470 3,810 28,630 
			 October to December 2008 1,090 3,680 2,770 2,320 2,120 3,750 3,540 5,020 3,850 28,140 
		
	
	The private enterprise completions are from quarterly P2 house building returns submitted to CLG by local authorities and the NHBC.

Housing: Construction

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what the Government's target is for the number of new homes to be built in each of the next three years; and if she will make a statement.

Iain Wright: The Housing Green Paper 'Homes for the Future: more affordable, more Sustainable', published in July 2007, set out the Government's ambition to increase housing supply.

Housing: Greater London

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government 
	(1)  what the timetable is for her Department to agree the bids submitted by the Mayor of London on 1 December 2008 under the Targeted Funding Stream;
	(2)  when she expects to make a decision on recommendations made by the Mayor of London on 1 December 2008 to allocate  (a) £90.7 million to bring empty homes back into use, reduce overcrowding and retrofit affordable housing stock,  (b) £290 million to meet the Decent Homes standard,  (c) £7.6 million to estate regeneration,  (d) £35 million for improvements to the environmental standard of existing housing stock,  (e) £9.2 million for improvements to the environmental standard of new affordable housing delivery and  (f) £5.5 million to expedite affordable housing delivery in London.

Margaret Beckett: We have today approved grant allocations to local authorities for private sector renewal in 2009-10. Allocations are in line with the recommendations made by regional assemblies and Mayor of London.

Housing: Low Incomes

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government how much her Department spent on  (a) the Design for Manufacture Competition and  (b) the Competition's website in each year since 2004.

Margaret Beckett: The Department commissioned English Partnerships (EP) to deliver the Design for Manufacture (DfM) programme on our behalf. The Homes and Communities Agency (HCA) took over responsibility for the programme last December. To date, EP and the HCA have spent £541,154 running the competition. This figure includes the costs incurred by EP for the provision of technical advice, support, monitoring and evaluation, and for the publication of the document "Designed for Manufacture—Lessons Learnt" in June 2006. This figure does not include EP's DfM exhibition costs. Since its launch in 2005 the DfM website has cost approximately £19,085.25. This figure does not include the website hosting costs, which are not attributable directly to the DM website.

Housing: Overcrowding

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government whether she plans to re-assess her Department's definition of overcrowding in relation to housing; and if she will make a statement.

Iain Wright: The Government are committed to addressing overcrowding and to updating the statutory standards. We have invested over £4 million in 38 local authorities this year to enable them to develop strategies and action plans to tackle overcrowding. Part of this funding has been used to collect more robust data on overcrowding which will enable us to assess the cost and impact of updating the statutory standards. We expect to have further evidence from the pathfinders in late spring. In 2009-10, we are investing a further £5 million in these 38 pathfinders and expanding the programme to include a further 17 local authority areas.

Housing: Repairs and Maintenance

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what expenditure her Department incurred on the major repairs allowance in each year since 2001; and if she will make a statement.

Iain Wright: The total annual allowances for the major repairs allowance since 2001 in England are given in the attached table:
	
		
			   £ billion 
			 2001-02 1.59 
			 2002-03 1.53 
			 2003-04 1.46 
			 2004-05 1.41 
			 2005-06 1.36 
			 2006-07 1.31 
			 2007-08 1.28 
			 2008-09 1.33 
		
	
	The allowances are calculated by and implemented through the HRA subsidy system for each local authority. The total allowance has decreased as large scale voluntary transfer has transferred councils housing to registered social landlords.

Housing: Standards

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government when she expects the next English House Condition Survey to be published.

Iain Wright: The 2007 English House Condition Annual Report will be published in summer 2009.

Infrastructure Planning Commission

Dai Davies: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government when she expects the information transparency plan for the Infrastructure Planning Commission to be published.

Iain Wright: The Infrastructure Planning Commission (IPC) will to be subject to the Freedom of Information (FOI) Act and all FOI requirements. Once the IPC is established it will develop a publication scheme in accordance with the FOI Act, and this will be published in due course.

Infrastructure Planning Commission

Julia Goldsworthy: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what estimate she has made of the Infrastructure Planning Commission's administration costs in 2009.

Iain Wright: I refer the hon. Member to the answer given to her on 17 March 2009,  Official Report, column 1108W.

Local Government Finance: Chorley

Lindsay Hoyle: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what information her Department holds on the programmes to which the  (a) Local Authority Business Grant Incentive funding and  (b) Area-based Grant made to Chorley Borough Council for the years 2009-10 to 2011-12 will be allocated.

John Healey: I refer my hon. Friend to the answer I gave him on 18 March 2009,  Official Report, columns 1178-79W, where I explained that the Department does not require authorities to make returns detailing how they have spent their ABG allocation, or to make reports on performance other than those required under the new local performance framework.
	LAGBI is also a non-ringfenced grant; we do not therefore collect and hold any specific information on the programmes to which local authorities allocate their funds.

Mortgages: Government Assistance

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government 
	(1)  how much her Department has spent on publicising its Mortgage Rescue Scheme to date; and how much has been allocated for such expenditure in each of the next two financial years;
	(2)  how much her Department has spent on publicising its Homeowners Mortgage Support Scheme; and how much has been allocated for such expenditure in each of the next two financial years.

Margaret Beckett: The Department is conducting a public information campaign to publicise a wide range of support available to homeowners, including the Mortgage Rescue Scheme and the Homeowner Mortgage Support Scheme. This campaign is currently underway, and spend figures part way through the campaign are not available. Details of the Department's expenditure on this campaign will be made available in the Department's forthcoming annual report.
	There are no current allocations made for such expenditure in the next two financial years.

Neighbourhood Renewal Fund

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government 
	(1)  if she will place in the Library a copy of the qualifying criteria for the Neighbourhood Renewal Fund;
	(2)  if she will place in the Library a copy of the formula by which her Department calculates Neighbourhood Renewal Fund allocations for local authorities.

John Healey: The Working Neighbourhoods Fund (WNF) was launched in December 2007 by the Department for Communities and Local Government and the Department for Work and Pensions. The Neighbourhood Renewal Fund and DWP's Deprived Areas Fund were brought together in the WNF to create a single fund at the local level.
	The criteria for qualification were published in the "The Working Neighbourhoods—Revising the Third Criteria—Consultation", published in November 2008 as clarified in "The Working Neighbourhoods Fund 2009 to 2011: Revising the Third Criterion consultation—Government Response" published in February 2009. I have placed both documents in the Library. Both documents are also available from the Communities and Local website at:
	http://www.communities.gov.uk/publications/communities/wnf200911consultationresponse
	and
	http://www.communities.gov.uk/publications/communities/wnf200911consultation
	respectively.
	Eligible authorities needed to meet the following qualifying criteria:
	Have 20 per cent. or more of their lower super output areas in the most deprived 10 per cent. on the employment domain of the Index of Multiple Deprivation 2007;
	Have 20 per cent. or more of their lower super output areas in the most deprived 10 per cent. on the overall Index of Multiple Deprivation 2007; or
	Are ranked among the top 50 districts with the highest combined benefit/non- employment rate.
	Local areas were only required to meet one of the above criteria to qualify for the fund.
	The formula for WNF allocations can be found in paragraph 40 of 'The Working Neighbourhoods Fund 2009 to 2011—Revising the Third Criterion' document, published in February 2009, a copy of which I have also placed in the Library of the House. This document is also available on the Communities and Local Government website at
	http://www.communities.gov.uk/publications/communities/wnf200911consultation

Non-Domestic Rates

Bob Neill: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government 
	(1)  what the average change in rateable value as a result of transitional rate relief in England was in  (a) 2005-06,  (b) 2006-07,  (c) 2007-08 and  (d) 2008-09;
	(2)  what the average monetary value of transitional rate relief in England was in  (a) 2005-06,  (b) 2006-07,  (c) 2007-08 and  (d) 2008-09.

John Healey: Outturn data for the net value of transitional relief granted in 2005-06 to 2007-08 can be found in the Statistical Release "National non-domestic rates collected by local authorities in England 2007-08" that was published on 17 September 2008. It is contained in table 1 at
	http://www.local.communities.gov.uk/finance/ctax/ndr078o.htm
	These data are taken from NNDR3 forms submitted annually by all 354 billing authorities in England.
	Budget estimate data on transitional relief to be granted in 2008-09 can be found in the Statistical Release "National non-domestic rates to be collected by local authorities in England 2008-09" that was published on 8 May 2008. It is contained in table 1 at
	http://www.local.communities.gov.uk/finance/ctax/ndr089.htm
	These data are taken from NNDR1 forms submitted annually by all 354 billing authorities in England.

Non-Domestic Rates: Business

Bob Neill: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what the average change in business rate liability for firms previously receiving revaluation transitional rate relief will be as a consequence of the end of transitional relief in 2009-10.

John Healey: Data on individual hereditaments' bills are not held centrally.

Non-Domestic Rates: Business

Bob Neill: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government how many businesses in England were eligible for transitional rate relief in 2008-09 but will no longer be eligible in 2009-10.

John Healey: This information is not held centrally.

Non-Domestic Rates: Business

Lindsay Hoyle: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what estimate she has made of the cost of making the small business rate relief scheme automatic; and if she will make a statement.

John Healey: A business is eligible for small business rate relief if its sole or main property has a rateable value of less than £15,000 (or £21,500 in Greater London); and each additional property it occupies, if any, has a rateable value of no more than £2,200; and the total rateable value of all of its properties is less than £15,000 (£21,500 in Greater London).
	While the Government hold information on the rateable value of individual properties, they do not currently hold information on the rateable value of all properties held by each individual business. It is not therefore currently possible to establish the number of businesses that meet the eligibility criteria for small business rate relief. That is why currently ratepayers must declare to the relevant billing authority that they meet the criteria for the relief. Without the declaration it is not possible to establish whether a ratepayer occupies more than one property.

Non-Domestic Rates: Small Businesses

Ian Cawsey: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what her most recent estimate is of the number of businesses in each local authority area eligible for rate relief under the small business rate relief scheme.

John Healey: I refer my hon. Friend to the answer I gave the hon. Member for Rutland and Melton (Alan Duncan) on 29 April 2008,  Official Report, column 319W.

Performing Arts

John Mason: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government whether her Department has engaged any  (a) actors,  (b) musicians and  (c) other performers to support its initiatives over the last five years.

Sadiq Khan: The information requested could be supplied only at disproportionate cost.

Planning Permission

Julia Goldsworthy: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what estimate she has made of the number of planning applications submitted to local authorities in  (a) 2005,  (b) 2006,  (c) 2007 and  (d) 2008.

Iain Wright: The number of planning applications received by local planning authorities in England since 2005 are shown in the following table:
	
		
			   Number of planning applications received 
			 2005 648,000 
			 2006 641,000 
			 2007 658,000 
			 2008 (1)442,000 
			 (1)Quarter 1 to Quarter 3 2008  Source: Communities and Local Government Development Control returns 
		
	
	Data for 2008 are for the first three quarters of the year. Information on October to December 2008 will be published on 27 March 2009.

Planning: Horticulture

Bob Russell: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government if she will make it her policy that local planning officers should undertake mandatory training in horticulture; and if she will make a statement.

Iain Wright: As well as technical skills local planning officers need to have an understanding of a wide range of social, economic and environmental issues that impact on the planning system. These are covered in professional training through planning schools, continuing professional development and training and experience provided by employers. It is not Government policy to mandate particular training requirements for local authority planning staff. Local authorities have considerable autonomy in determining their recruitment policies and training programmes.

Property Transfer

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government how much was paid per home to each local authority which has opted for large-scale voluntary transfer of their housing stock in each year since 1997.

Sadiq Khan: The following table incorporates information the Department holds on gross transfer values and dwelling numbers where local authorities received payment from the receiving local authority following the transfer of social housing under large scale voluntary transfer arrangements since 1997. Exact information on payments received by a local authority from the registered social landlord for a particular transfer would need to be ascertained from the local authority.
	The values shown in the table are in respect of the gross transfer price for all positive value stock transfer where local authorities should have received a payment. In arriving at such values the Department and local authorities use a model agreed with HM Treasury to establish a 30 year tenanted market value (TMV) of the dwellings to be transferred. The TMV reflects the intended continued use of the properties for social housing: it is always less than the open market value. The TMV is calculated as the net present value of the RSL's projected stream of income from renting out the transferred stock, less its planned expenditure (including investment) stream. The precise details of payments received by LAs would need to be requested from LAS themselves.
	
		
			  Local authority  Date of transfer  Gross transfer price ( £  m illion)  N umber  o f dwellings  Price per dwelling  ( £ ) 
			 Cotswold DC 28 February 1997 53.45 4,282 12,482 
			 South Staffs C 7 March 1997 42.67 5,273 8,092 
			 Lichfield DC 19 March 1997 40.88 4,921 8,307 
			 South Oxfordshire DC 7 July 1997 68.33 5,018 13,617 
			 Eden C 22 September 1997 16.99 1,510 11,251 
			 LB Bexley 9 February 1998 49.40 4,118 11,996 
			 LB Bexley 9 February 1998 34.99 4,097 8,540 
			 Congleton BC 2 March 1998 32.24 4,061 7,939 
			 Kerrier DC 23 March 1998 32.02 3,732 8,579 
			 West Somerset DC 30 March 1998 25.70 1,869 13,750 
			 Tewkesbury BC 27 April 1998 24.48 3,066 7,985 
			 Rother DC 1 May 1998 30.80 3,058 10,072 
			 West Devon BC 22 February 1999 13.52 1,446 9,346 
			 South Somerset DC 1 March 1999 69.25 8,883 7,795 
			 East Lindsey DC 1 March 1999 45.00 5,102 8,820 
			 Manchester CC Darnhill 8 March 1999 0.85 1,030 825 
			 South Hams District Council 22 March 1999 41.00 3,096 13,243 
			 Telford and Wrekin C 25 March 1999 113.37 13,081 8,667 
			 Worthing BC 29 March 1999 35.59 2,525 14,095 
			 Bath and North East Somerset C 29 March 1999 79.49 9,887 8,040 
			 Allerdale BC 31 March 1999 30.60 3,704 8,261 
			 West Lindsey DC 18 October 1999 30.70 3,929 7,814 
			 Boston BC 29 November 1999 43.40 4,871 8,907 
			 Tynedale DC 20 December 1999 33.86 3,564 9,500 
			 Newcastle Under Lyme BC 31 January 2000 54.00 9,887 5,462 
			 Restormel BC 7 February 2000 25.11 3,577 7,018 
			 Manchester CC (Colshaw Farm) 14 February 2000 0.90 600 1,500 
			 North Devon DC 21February 2000 44.25 3,293 13,438 
			 Burnley BC 8 March 2000 22.41 5,330 4,205 
			 Manchester CC Sale Estate 20 March 2000 2.35 1,655 1,419 
			 Weymouth and Portland C 20 March 2000 30.99 3,105 1,907 
			 Huntingdon DC 20 March 2000 63.40 6,650 9,534 
			 Elmbridge BC 27 March 2000 56.90 4,894 11,626 
			 Test Valley BC 27 March 2000 79.99 5,495 14,559 
			 Wyre Forest DC 27 March 2000 40.95 6,056 6,762 
			 Manchester CC Whitefield Estate 27 March 2000 1.97 1,033 1,942 
			 Tameside MBC 27 March 2000 127.50 16,446 7,743 
			 LB Richmond 17 July 2000 59.50 7,139 8,335 
			 Coventry CC 22 September 2000 49.50 20,125 2,460 
			 Fylde BC 2 October 2000 12.00 1,905 6,300 
			 Chester CC 27 November 2000 45.00 7,096 6,341 
			 Horsham DC 11 December 2000 67.25 4,650 14,462 
			 East Northamptonshire DC 19 February 2001 21.49 3,495 6,150 
			 Torbay BC 19 February 2001 19.10 2,947 6,480 
			 Staffordshire Moorlands DC 23 February 2001 19.67 3,132 6,290 
			 Calderdale MBC 6 March 2001 36.00 12,759 2,821 
			 Chichester DC 13 March 2001 78.50 5,321 14,752 
			 Mendip DC 19 March 2001 35.00 4,326 8,091 
			 West Wiltshire DC 26 March 2001 21.00 3,284 6,423 
			 West Oxfordshire DC 26 March 2001 50.90 3,643 13,972 
			 East Staffordshire BC 26 March 2001 24.50 5,637 4,346 
			 Manchester CC Handforth Estate 26 March 2001 0.37 659 561 
			 Sunderland CC 26 March 2001 219.80 36,356 6,045 
			 Blackburn with Darwen BC 28 March 2001 35.40 9,886 3,580 
			 Shrewsbury and Atcham BC 1 October 2001 63.40 5,500 11,527 
			 Mid-Bedfordshire DC 5 November 2001 31.33 3,084 10,159 
			 Derbyshire Dales 4 March 2002 24.80 3,287 7,544 
			 Chelmsford BC 11 March 2002 79.60 6,902 11,530 
			 East Hertfordshire DC 18 March 2002 32.10 2,687 11,937 
			   44.40 3,237 13,725 
			 Erewash BC 25 March 2002 38.10 5,847 6,516 
			 Reigate and Banstead BC 25 March 2002 64.00 4,846 13,212 
			 St. Edmundsbury 24 June 2002 45.10 5,947 7,583 
			 Vale Royal BC 1 July 2002 51.07 6,813 7,495 
			 St. Helens MBC 1 July 2002 28.90 14,632 1,974 
			 Redcar and Cleveland BC 15 July 2002 60.20 11,625 5,180 
			 Knowsley MBC 15 July 2002 30.66 17,090 1,794 
			 LB Waltham Forest 30 September 2002 1.87 2,242 834 
			 County of Herefordshire C 25 November 2002 39.56 5,696 6,945 
			 Carlisle CC 9 December 2002 12.98 7,198 1,803 
			 Rushcliffe BC 20 January 2003 44.56 3,445 12,934 
			 Liverpool CC Eastern Fringe (south) 23 January 2003 5.10 2,833 1,800 
			 City of Bradford 24 February 2003 70.10 24,764 2,831 
			 Amber Valley BC 24 February 2003 28.57 5,632 5,073 
			 Crewe and Nantwich BC 10 March 2003 34.10 5,515 6,183 
			 Walsall MBC (majority of stock) 27 March 2003 24.00 22,971 1,045 
			 Craven DC 31 March 2003 17.60 1,541 11,421 
			 Forest of Dean DC 31 March 2003 24.50 3,577 6,849 
			 North Hertfordshire DC 31 March 2003 27.00 8,570 3,150 
			 Scarborough BC 15 December 2003 24.25 4,632 5,235 
			 Maidstone BC 2 February 2004 35.82 6,810 5,260 
			 Teignbridge 4 February 2004 12.90 3,647 3,537 
			 Cherwell 29 March 2004 42.85 3,656 11,720 
			 Bromsgrove 29 March 2004 16.50 3,096 5,329 
			 Hartlepool 29 March 2004 3.20 7,509 426 
			 Worcester 31 March 2004 5.31 4,888 1,086 
			 South Norfolk 17 May 2004 31.60 4,214 7,499 
			 Copeland BC 7 June 2004 1.20 3,787 317 
			 Purbeck 28 June 2004 15.60 1,622 9,617 
			 Manchester (Woodhouse Park) 4 October 2004 1.50 2,344 640 
			 Peterborough 4 October 2004 46.25 9,757 4,740 
			 Forest Heath 11 October 2004 23.40 2,653 8,820 
			 Middlesbrough 15 November 2004 10.00 11,968 836 
			 Wirral 7 February 2005 49.75 13,997 3,556 
			 Trafford 14 March 2005 5.60 9,509 588 
			 Wakefield 21 March 2005 15.50 31,901 486 
			 Manchester CC (Haughton Green) 18 April 2005 0.15 933 162 
			 Halton 5 December 2005 4.50 6,227 723 
			 Tower Hamlets (Island Homes) 5 December 2005 5.38 1,260 4,270 
			 Tower Hamlets (Island Gardens) 15 January 2006 2.86 552 5,181 
			 Broxbourne 23 January 2006 36.30 3,433 10,574 
			 Stafford BC 6 February 2006 3.70 5,419 682 
			 North Somerset 6 February 2006 27.13 6,157 4,406 
			 North Norfolk 13 February 2006 34.80 4,651 7,482 
			 Kings Lynn and West Norfolk BC 3 April 2006 13.71 6,852 2,001 
			 Teesdale DC 3 July 2006 4.46 897 4,972 
			 Aylesbury Vale DC 17 July 2006 43.00 7,470 5,756 
			 Macclesfield BC 17 July 2006 19.30 5,123 3,781 
			 Tower Hamlets (Lansbury) 14 August 2006 4.18 606 6,891 
			 Derwentside DC 4 December 2006 2.30 6,884 334 
			 South Gloucestershire 12 February 2007 16.52 7,882 2,095 
			 Chorley 26 March 2007 2.23 2,813 790 
			 LB Sutton (Roundshaw) 16 April 2007 6.20 524 11,832 
			 Sheffield (Hyde Park Walk and Terrace) 11 June 2007 0.20 129 1,550 
			 North Shropshire DC 30 July 2007 6.70 2,317 2,891 
			 Watford BC 10 September 2007 24.00 4,468 5,371 
			 Rochford DC 26 September 2007 1.86 1,749 1,063 
			 Mole Valley 29 October 2007 35.00 3,170 11,041 
			 Daventry DC 5 November 2007 15.70 3,099 5,066 
			 Fenland DC 5 November 2007 41.60 3,670 11,335 
			 Braintree DC 12 November 2007 25.60 7,644 3,349 
			 Harborough DC 3 December 2007 7.50 2,118 3,541 
			 Torridge DC 10 December 2007 0.60 2,354 255 
			 Wellingborough BC 10 December 2007 3.00 4,548 659 
			 Bracknell Forest BC 11 February 2008 34.50 6,690 5,156 
			 South Northamptonshire Council 17 March 2008 15.00 2,894 5,183 
			 Three Rivers DC 19 March 2008 26.60 3,807 6,987 
			 LB Lewisham (Grove Park) 7 July 2008 1.00 1,099 910 
			 Blaby District Council 3 November 2008 2.90 2,126 1,364

Property Transfer

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government how much she estimates will be provided in  (a) 2008-09 and  (b) 2009-10 (i) to write off overhanging housing debt for local authorities who privatise their housing stock and (ii) for council house repairs and renovations in those authorities.

Iain Wright: The Department expects to pay £515 million in overhanging debt (OHD) to the Public Works Loan Boards in respect of completed large scale voluntary transfers in 2008-09. We estimate that overhanging debt payments in 2009-10 may total up to £300 million.
	For those authorities that transferred either all or part of their housing stock in 2008-09, the Department has allocated allowances for management, maintenance and major repairs of a value of £320 million.
	It is too early to provide an accurate forecast of the expenditure allowances to be provided to stock transferring authorities for 2009-10.

Regional Planning and Development

Bob Neill: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what remuneration is given to each member of each of the Regional Improvement and Efficiency Partnerships.

John Healey: The Regional Improvement and Efficiency Partnerships (RIEPs) are devolved partnerships of councils and other local services. Information on remuneration packages for RIEPs members is not held centrally.

Rented Housing

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what proportion of rented homes in England were owned by  (a) housing associations,  (b) local authorities and  (c) private landlords in each of the last five years.

Iain Wright: The following table shows the dwelling stock in England rented from registered social landlords, local authorities and private landlords as a proportion of the estimated total rented dwelling stock in each of the last five years for which data are available.
	
		
			   Rented from registered social landlords  (percentage)  Rented from  local authorities  (percentage)  Rented from private landlords  (percentage)  Total rented dwellings  (thousand) 
			 2003 26 38 36 6,393 
			 2004 26 36 37 6,426 
			 2005 28 33 39 6,493 
			 2006 28 32 41 6,600 
			 2007 28 29 43 6,740 
			  Sources: Census 2001; Housing Flows Reconciliation and joint returns by local authorities; Housing Strategy Statistical Appendix (HSSA) submitted to Communities and Local Government by local authorities; Regulatory Statistical Return (RSR) as reported to the Housing Corporation by registered social landlords; Labour Force Survey.

Rented Housing: Overcrowding

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what estimate she has made of the number and proportion of  (a) households and  (b) people in the (i) private and (ii) social rented sector living in overcrowded conditions in each of the last five years.

Iain Wright: Levels of overcrowding are measured through the Survey of English Housing and assessed against the "bedroom standard". Estimates of the number and proportion of households living in overcrowded conditions in the private rented and social rented sectors in England are given in table 1. Corresponding estimates of the number and proportion of people in overcrowded conditions are given in table 2. A three year moving average is provided due to small sample sizes for these groups.
	
		
			  Table 1:  E stimated n umber  of households in overcrowded conditions, England , 2003-04 to 2007-08, three  year moving average( 1) 
			   2003-04  2004-05  2005-06  2006-07  2007-08 
			  T housands of overcrowded households  
			 Social renters 195 205 216 229 234 
			 Private renters 84 99 109 125 126 
			   
			  Percentage of all households by tenure  
			 Social renters 5.3 4.9 5.2 5.5 5.9 
			 Private renters 3.9 4.1 4.6 4.7 5.1 
			 (1)( )A three year moving average is used due to sample size issues. 2003-04 estimates are the average of 2001-02, 2002-03 and 2003-04.  Source:  Communities and local government, Survey for English Housing 
		
	
	
		
			  Table 2:  E stimated number of people living in overcrowded conditions, England, 2003-04 to 2007-08, three year moving average( 1) 
			   2003-04  2004-05  2005-06  2006-07  2007-08 
			  T housands of people in overcrowded conditions  
			 Social renters 889 936 950 1,045 1,069 
			 Private renters 353 397 433 512 537 
			   
			  P ercentage of all people by tenure  
			 Social renters 10.2 10.9 11.3 12.2 12.3 
			 Private renters 7.8 8.2 8.3 9.2 9.2 
			 (1) A three year moving average is used due to sample size issues. 2003-04 estimates are the average of 2001-02, 2002-03 and 2003-04.  Source:  Communities and local government, Survey for English Housing

Rented Housing: Regulation

Jacqui Lait: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what responsibilities the Tenant Services Agency has in respect of regulation of public sector leaseholders.

Iain Wright: The Tenant Services Authority has no responsibilities in respect of leaseholders who own 100 per cent. of the interest in their homes. Leaseholders already have access to a wide range of protections and rights. The Housing and Regeneration Act 2008 limits the Tenant Services Authority's future regulatory remit to 'social housing', which includes low cost rental and low cost home ownership accommodation as defined in sections 69-70 of the Act (including some types of "shared ownership" agreement), but not other owner-occupied homes or the private rented sector. However the Tenant Services Authority is likely to be interested in how registered providers deliver management across their stock.

Repossession Orders

Shailesh Vara: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government how many  (a) sole owners,  (b) joint owners and  (c) first-time buyers have had their properties repossessed in (a) North West Cambridgeshire constituency, (b) Cambridgeshire, (c) the East of England and (d) England in each of the last five years; and how many of those were aged (i) 18 to 30, (ii) 31 to 40, (iii) 41 to 50, (iv) 51 to 60 and (v) over 60 years.

Iain Wright: The Department does not collect data on repossessions. Repossessions data at the UK level are available from the Council of Mortgage Lenders and Financial Services Authority. These data are not split out by sole owners and joint owners, first time buyers and non-first time buyers, or by region. Nor are they split out by different age groups.
	The only sub-national figures relating to repossessions are for possession orders. Statistics on mortgage and landlord possession orders for the county courts are available via the Ministry of Justice website at:
	http://www.justice.gov.uk/docs/stats-landlord-mortgage-historic-20-02-09.xls

Social Rented Housing: Standards

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government pursuant to the answer of 24 February 2009,  Official Report, column 556W, on social rented housing: standards, how many homes each percentage figure in the table represents.

Iain Wright: The following table provides the information requested. This is drawn from the Business Plan Statistical Appendix—Annual Monitoring data from Local Authorities for 2007-08 published by CLG last month. The RSL data are from the Regulatory Statistical Return (RSR) for 2007-08 published by the Housing Corporation (now Tenant Services Authority) last autumn.
	
		
			  Number of social houses meeting the decent homes standard 
			   Local authorities  RSLs 
			   2007  2008  2010  2007  2008 
			 Birmingham 42,713 51,276 65,711 35,271 36,835 
			 Bradford (1)— (1)— (1)— 26,793 28,426 
			 Bristol 24,356 25,098 27,703 9,059 9,325 
			 Coventry (1)— (1)— (1)— 22,176 22,668 
			 Derby 13,549 13,746 13,746 5,913 6,325 
			 Dudley 19,166 20,087 22,434 3,812 3,832 
			 Kingston-upon-Hull 9,845 14,012 22,757 6,579 6,564 
			 Leeds 38,691 46,288 57,849 13,817 14,352 
			 Leicester 18,984 20,325 21,756 9,702 9,772 
			 Liverpool (1)— (1)— (1)— 37,448 44,682 
			 London 283,421 302,118 361,162 299,159 315,239 
			 Manchester 9,098 13,131 23,328 29,978 34,400 
			 Newcastle-upon-Tyne 3,019 8,922 21,866 6,823 6,784 
			 Nottingham 19,083 20,058 20,223 8,721 8,905 
			 Plymouth(2) 7,661 6,638 2,269 6,418 6,219 
			 Reading 6,494 6,740 7,176 3,711 3,898 
			 Sheffield 20,468 27,893 39,179 12,998 13,534 
			 Southampton 12,875 13,850 16,490 5,865 6,199 
			 Stoke-on-Trent 14,624 15,282 18,019 6,116 6,359 
			 Wolverhampton 10,533 13,582 18,048 5,069 5,402 
			 (1)( )No current stock. (2)( )Housing transfer to new RSL November 2009. 
		
	
	Decent Homes forecasts by local authority for registered social landlords' property are not available.

Social Rented Housing: Waiting Lists

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government 
	(1)  what estimate she has made of the net change in the number of  (a) households,  (b) individuals and  (c) children on social housing waiting lists in each of the last 20 quarters;
	(2)  what estimate she has made of the number of  (a) households,  (b) individuals and  (c) children on social housing waiting lists in each of the last 20 quarters.

Iain Wright: The number of households on the local authority housing waiting list is collected on the Housing Strategy Statistical Appendix (HSSA) as at 1 April each year. This information is not collected quarterly and is not collected for individuals or children. Where local authorities and registered social landlords operate a common register, households registered with the RSL will be included in the data. However, registered social landlords are independent bodies and can keep their own waiting lists. The number of households on the housing waiting list in each local authority is published on the Communities and Local Government website in table 600.
	http://www.communities.gov.uk/documents/housing/xls/table600.xls
	The table shows the number of households on the local authority housing waiting list and the associated annual net change for each year for the past five years (which encompasses the last 20 quarters).
	
		
			  Number of households on the waiting list and annual net change (excludes households looking for transfers): England, 2003-08 
			   Count  Net change from previous year 
			 2003 1,271,000 — 
			 2004 1,438,000 167,000 
			 2005 1,547,000 110,000 
			 2006 1,634,000 87,000 
			 2007 1,674,000 40,000 
			 2008 1,770,000 96,000 
			  Notes: 1. As at 1 April each year 2. Figures are rounded to the nearest thousand  Source: Housing Strategy Statistical Appendix (HSSA) 
		
	
	Not everyone on the local authority housing waiting list is necessarily in urgent housing need. The waiting list includes those who consider social housing as their preferred or one of a number of housing options, and those who decide to get onto the waiting list ladder before they need or want to move house—particularly where the priority system is heavily based on waiting time. The size of the waiting list is not an indicator of absolute need, it is only useful as a broad indicator of housing demand in an area.
	Further information on the number of households on the local authority housing waiting lists for England, can be found in the statistical release "Local Authority Housing Statistics England: 2007-08: Housing Strategy Statistical Appendix (HSSA) & Business Plan Statistical Appendix (BPSA)" This was published on 22 January 2009 on the Communities and Local Government website at:
	http://www.communities.gov.uk/publications/corporate/statistics/lahousing200708
	Copies of the statistical release and live table have been deposited in the Library.

Temporary Accommodation

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what estimate she has made of the number of households in temporary accommodation in each of the last 20 quarters.

Iain Wright: I refer the hon. Member to the answer given to him on 24 March 2009,  Official Report, column 223W.

Tenancy Deposit Scheme

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what estimate she has made of the proportion of tenancy agreements in the private rented sector which are protected under the Tenancy Deposit Scheme.

Iain Wright: I refer to my answer of 17 March 2009,  Official Report, column 1115W. We have not made any estimate of the proportion of tenancy agreements in the private rented sector represented by the 1.2 million deposits and almost £1 billion protected under the tenancy deposit protection provisions.

Tenants Rights

Margaret Moran: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what plans she has to implement the recommendations made by the Law Commission on tenancies and tenants' right made in 2006.

Iain Wright: I refer my hon. Friend to the answer given on 11 March,  Official Report, column 498W. The Government's response to the Law Commission's report—Renting Homes—will be incorporated into the response to the Rugg review.

Tenants Service Authority

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government how much the Tenants Service Authority has spent on branding since its establishment.

Iain Wright: I refer the hon. Member to the answer given to the hon. Member for Meriden (Mrs. Spelman) on 29 January 2009,  Official Report, column 784W.

Unitary Councils: Coastal Areas

Chris Ruane: To ask the Secretary of State for Communities and Local Government what recent assessment she has made of the performance of unitary authorities in which seaside and coastal towns are located.

John Healey: The Audit Commission is responsible for assessing English councils' performance and the services they provide (such as housing, environment, benefits and culture as well as cross cutting issues like regeneration and community safety) through the Comprehensive Performance Assessment (CPA) system. CPA provides local people with a report card of how their council is performing overall compared to other councils. It measures a range of information such as performance levels, inspection and audit reports, corporate governance and self-assessment by the council to reach a single judgment.
	The 2008 CPA results for single tier and county councils were published by the Audit Commission on 5 March; scores for individual authorities can be found on the Commission's website:
	http://www.audit-commission.gov.uk/cpa/stcc/stccscores.asp
	CPA will be replaced by Comprehensive Area Assessment (CAA) from 1 April 2009 as part of the new local performance framework. CAA will apply to all outcomes delivered by local authorities acting alone or in partnership, unlike CPA which focused on services provided by individual councils.

PUBLIC ACCOUNTS COMMISSION

National Audit Office: Pay

Philip Hollobone: To ask the Chairman of the Public Accounts Commission for what reasons the Commission agreed at its meeting of 16 December 2008 that the Comptroller and Auditor General's pay should be linked to that of the Lord Chief Justice.

Alan Williams: While discussing the Government's draft clauses on the NAO's corporate governance, the Commission considered two options for the C&AG's pay: linking to the range of salaries received by Permanent Secretaries and linking to the judicial pay scale. Since the salaries of Permanent Secretaries include a performance bonus, and the draft legislation specifies that the C&AG's salary should not have a performance element, the Commission preferred a link to the judicial pay scale.
	The current C&AG is paid on the judicial pay scale and this arrangement provides transparency. Although the Commission does not set the C&AG's pay, and would not do so under the terms of the draft legislation, it discussed what the level of that pay should be under the new corporate governance arrangements, and the consensus view within the Commission was that the C&AG ought to be paid the same as the Lord Chief Justice in order to reflect the responsibilities of the post.

ENERGY AND CLIMATE CHANGE

Biofuels: Imports

David Drew: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change how much bio-ethanol was imported from Brazil to meet bio-gas requirements in the latest period for which figures are available.

Angela Eagle: I have been asked to reply.
	The EU classification system used to collect trade data does not directly identify biofuels. The nearest equivalents are the categories 'Undenatured bioethanol 80 per cent. alcohol by volume or higher' and 'Denatured bioethanol of any alcoholic strength', for the subset of goods "obtained from agricultural products".
	In 2008, the UK imported 82.7 million litres of 'undenatured bioethanol 80 per cent. alcohol by volume or higher' from Brazil valued at £22.8 million and with a net mass of 69.3 thousand tonnes. There were no importations of 'denatured bioethanol of any alcoholic strength' for goods obtained from agricultural products.
	As the coverage is not specific to biofuels, it is not known if this trade was imported to meet bio-gas requirements.

Carbon Emissions

Greg Clark: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change what methodological changes in the measurement of carbon dioxide emissions the Government has adopted since January 2008.

Joan Ruddock: The 1990 to 2007 inventory is the latest UK inventory that considers methodological changes in CO2 emission estimates adopted since January 2008. There have been no major methodological changes affecting CO2 emission estimates in this inventory. Small changes in the CO2 inventory have occurred due to changes in reported energy statistics presented in the Digest of UK Energy Statistics and also as a result of introducing EU Emissions Trading Scheme carbon emission factors for some fuels burnt in power stations and refineries. The 1990 to 2007 inventory will be formally reported to the Framework Convention on Climate Change on 15 April 2009, after which the inventory report, which contains detailed explanations of methodologies, will be available.

Carbon Trust and Energy Saving Trust

Greg Clark: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change with which public affairs companies  (a) the Carbon Trust and  (b) the Energy Saving Trust had contracts in 2008.

Mike O'Brien: The Carbon Trust inform us that they retained Weber Shandwick until 31 October 2008 and TLG Communications Ltd from 17 November 2008 to provide public affairs strategic advice and support; and Grayling Political Strategy to provide public affairs strategic advice and support in relation to Scotland.
	The Energy Saving Trust tell us they had contracts with the following public affairs companies in 2008: Positif Politics Ltd, Strategem, Weber Shandwick Public Affairs and Geronimo Communications.

Coal: Imports

Fraser Kemp: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change how much coal was imported from each country of origin in each of the last 10 years.

Mike O'Brien: The table shows the amount of coal imported by country of origin for each year between 2001 and 2007. Figures prior to 2001 are not readily available.
	
		
			  Coal imports into the UK by country of origin, 2001-07 
			  Thousand tonnes 
			   2001  2002  2003  2004  2005  2006  2007 
			  European Union
			 Belgium/Luxembourg 6 2 12 11 14 2 1 
			 Denmark — — — — — 10 7 
			 Estonia — — — 22 15 37 66 
			 France — 17 19 50 4 5 — 
			 Germany — 10 2 13 16 50 13 
			 Irish Republic 73 46 57 40 38 19 23 
			 Italy — — 14 — — — 7 
			 Latvia — — — 11 118 384 130 
			 Netherlands 157 257 246 193 197 188 170 
			 Poland(1) — — — 1,208 647 856 130 
			 Portugal — — — 8 — — — 
			 Spain — 9 21 24 41 46 11 
			 Sweden 5 25 — — — — — 
			 Total European Union 240 366 369 1,580 1,092 1,597 557 
			 
			 Australia 7,076 5,093 5,664 6,175 4,463 4,057 4,745 
			 Canada 1,182 750 839 740 1,084 1,282 1,662 
			 Colombia 6,722 3,547 3,398 3,630 3,289 3,798 3,872 
			 Indonesia 50 45 402 1,458 1,616 1,895 1,455 
			 Norway 24 164 145 138 — 20 42 
			 People's Republic of China 705 288 210 233 135 44 255 
			 Poland(1) 1,235 1,596 1,902 — — — — 
			 Republic of South Africa 10,259 9,876 12,194 10,144 13,029 12,642 7,729 
			 Russia 3,895 4,368 5,089 9,932 17,521 22,285 20,106 
			 United States of America 2,610 1,567 1,154 2,061 1,509 2,024 2,523 
			 Venezuela 56 — — 39 — — — 
			 Vietnam 92 86 45 23 — 19 — 
			 Other countries 1,396 940 480 — 225 30 29 
			 Total all countries 35,542 28,687 31,891 36,153 43,963 49,693 42,975 
			 (1) Poland joined the EU in 2004.  Source: Annex G.5: Imports and exports of solid fuels, Digest of UK Energy Statistics 2008, Internet version, based on data provided by HM Revenue and Customs.

Coal-fired Power Stations

Simon Hughes: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change pursuant to the Answer of 17 March 2009 to the hon. Member for Wealden (Charles Hendry),  Official Report, columns 998-99W, on departmental public consultation, if he will defer any decisions on applications for new coal-fired power stations until the completion of his Department's consultation on a new framework for coal-fired power stations.

Mike O'Brien: Decisions on any applications for new coal-fired power stations, including the only current application (by E.ON UK plc for consent under section 36 of the Electricity Act 1989 for a 1600 MW coal-fired power station at Kingsnorth) will follow the conclusion of both the consultation on carbon capture readiness and the planned new consultation on a new framework for coal-fired power stations.

Departmental Lost Property

Mike Hancock: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change whether officials in his Department who have lost laptops that were the property of his Department in the last 12 months have been charged the full value of replacement.

Mike O'Brien: The Department currently uses IT equipment and services including laptop computers provided by the Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform and the Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs.

Departmental Manpower

Greg Knight: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change how many staff his Department employs; and at how many locations in London they are based.

Mike O'Brien: holding answer 24 March 2009
	 The Department currently employs 760 staff in three locations in London.

Departmental Press Releases

Greg Clark: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change if he will place in the Library a copy of the  (a) presentation and  (b) handout used at the press briefing held by his Department on 9 February 2009.

Mike O'Brien: h olding answer 23 February 2009
	 There was no formal presentation, but a handout containing readily available background information on types of renewable heat technology was made available. The same information is found on pages 23-25 of the Heat and Energy Saving Strategy consultation document available at:
	http://hes.decc.gov.uk.

Departmental Public Consultation

Shailesh Vara: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change how many public consultations his Department has conducted in the last 12 months; how long each consultation was open for; how many responses were received in each case; and what the cost of conducting each consultation was.

Mike O'Brien: Between 3 October 2008 (when the Department was formed) and 23 March 2009, the Department of Energy and Climate Change conducted 14 public consultations of which two have now closed. All but one of the consultations are, or were, open for at least 12 weeks in line with HM Government's Code of Practice. The number of responses received for completed consultations (on carbon units and offshore electricity transmission) was 43 and 24 respectively.
	Providing the costs of conducting the consultations could be done only at disproportionate cost.

Departmental Public Consultation

Stewart Jackson: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change what payments for  (a) polling and  (b) other services his Department has made to (i) Deborah Mattinson and (ii) Opinion Leader Research Limited since its creation; and if he will make a statement.

Mike O'Brien: Since its creation in October 2008, the Department for Energy and Climate Change has made no payments to Deborah Martinson or Opinion Leader Research.

Departmental Responsibilities

Greg Clark: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change whether his Department has lead responsibility for  (a) the Advisory Committee on Carbon Abatement Technologies,  (b) the Fuel Poverty Advisory Group,  (c) the Renewables Advisory Board,  (d) the Civil Nuclear Police Atomic Authority,  (e) the Coal Authority and  (f) the UK Police Atomic Energy Authority.

Mike O'Brien: My right hon. Friend the Secretary of State has lead responsibility for the Advisory Committee on Carbon Abatement Technologies, the Fuel Poverty Advisory Group, the Renewables Advisory Board, the Civil Nuclear Police Atomic Authority and the Coal Authority.
	Prior to 1 April 2005, the Civil Nuclear Constabulary was known as the United Kingdom Atomic Energy Authority Constabulary (UKAEAC), and had been a part of the United Kingdom Atomic Energy Authority (UKAEA) since its inception in 1955. The Energy Act 2004 made provision for the transfer of the constabulary from the UKAEA to a statutory police authority, called the civil nuclear police authority.

Departmental Training

Michael Penning: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change whether his Department has provided voice coaching to any of its employees in the last 12 months.

Mike O'Brien: The Department of Energy and Climate Change has been formed by bringing together work previously covered by the Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform and the Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs. There are no centrally co-ordinated or funded voice coaching programmes provided for its employees. Funding for some learning and development is delegated to local business units. A disproportionate cost would be incurred in maintaining a central record of these activities.

Electric Vehicles

Michael Ancram: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change if he will take steps to ensure that electrically-powered cars and other vehicles have ready access to electric points for charging batteries.

Jim Fitzpatrick: I have been asked to reply.
	The Department for Transport has provided grants through the Alternative Fuels Infrastructure Grant Programme (AFIGP) to support the installation of re-charging infrastructure through the Energy Saving Trust.
	So far, 82 re-charging points have been installed with Government support. A number of private companies and local authorities have also installed re-charging points as well. We are currently negotiating with the EU to seek approval to extend the AFIGP.
	On 15 January, the Secretary of State for Transport also announced £250 million to promote the take-up, and commercialisation within the UK, of ultra, low emission road vehicles. We anticipate that a small proportion of this funding will be used to support infrastructure for electric and plug-in hybrid electric cars.

Electricity Generation

Gregory Barker: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change what assessment the Government has made of the potential contribution of broadband communications to the development of a smart grid electricity network.

Mike O'Brien: The 'smart grid' concept could potentially encompass a range of technologies including advanced communications and information management systems, advanced metering and automated control technologies, that would enable greater active management of the supply and demand on the networks. The Government have already announced a roll-out of smart meters to all homes with an indicative timetable for completion of end 2020. Suppliers will also be required to roll out advanced smart meters to larger businesses over the next five years.
	We are supportive of new proposals by Ofgem under its current Electricity Distribution Price Control Review that seek to encourage network operators to undertake greater innovation and trialling of new technologies and to develop new ways of operating their networks that might be needed in the future. These new proposals are in addition to the existing Innovation Funding Incentive and Registered Power Zone schemes which were introduced in 2005 to encourage innovative technical solutions.

Electricity Generation

Chris Ruane: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change if he will take steps to monitor levels of private sector investment in the electricity grid, with particular reference to  (a) maintenance and  (b) new capital projects.

Mike O'Brien: Monitoring of investment in networks for both maintaining existing assets and creating new transmission/distribution capability falls to Ofgem. Ofgem have recently finalised the provisions of the transmission price control for the period 2007-12, with substantial increases in allowances for capital investment.

Energy: Consumption

Ian Gibson: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change if he will take steps to encourage energy companies to curtail consumer demand for electricity.

Mike O'Brien: Government place an obligation on energy suppliers to promote household energy efficiency through the carbon emission reduction target (CERT). DECC is currently consulting on increasing the CERT target by 20 per cent., which will require more activity from energy suppliers to promote energy saving measures in homes.
	The CERT consultation is also proposing to introduce behavioural measures into CERT which includes real time displays and home energy advice which will give householders a better understanding of how they use energy and how to reduce their energy consumption.

Opinion Leader Research

John Baron: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change how much his Department has paid Opinion Leader Research since its establishment.

Mike O'Brien: Nothing.

Renewable Energy: Expenditure

Chris Ruane: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change how much central Government funding for renewable energy  (a) research and  (b) capital programmes there has been in respect of (i) nuclear power, (ii) biomass, (iii) wind power, (iv) hydroelectric power, (v) solar energy, (vi) marine power and (vii) anaerobic energy in each of the last 20 years.

Mike O'Brien: holding answer 26 January 2009
	I have today placed in the Libraries of the House the information about known activities funded by DECC, BERR, DEFRA and DIUS.

Renewable Energy: Finance

Greg Clark: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change what the budget for the Renewables Advisory Board in  (a) 2008-09 and  (b) each of the next five financial years is.

Mike O'Brien: The budget for the RAB for the financial year 2008-09 is £301,366.
	Budgets are currently being reviewed for the Department and the RAB annual budget for future years is yet to be allocated.

Renewable Energy: Urban Areas

Chris Ruane: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change how many renewable energy plants serving urban areas there are in the UK.

Mike O'Brien: In 2007 there were 1,436 renewable energy sites throughout the UK generating electricity (source RESTATS).
	Once generation, whether renewable or conventional, is connected to the transmission networks the location of that generator will not necessarily relate to where the electricity is ultimately consumed. Generation is supplied around the transmission network to Distribution Network Operators who will then distribute generation to businesses and consumers in their areas line with their demand. National Grid Electricity Transmission (NGET) will balance that supply and demand for the whole network.

Warm Front Scheme

Greg Clark: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change how many households received only energy efficient light bulbs under the Warm Front Scheme in each of the last 10 years.

Joan Ruddock: All eligible households that apply to Warm Front receive energy efficient light bulbs and energy efficiency advice from a Warm Front assessor in addition to appropriate heating and energy efficiency measures.
	The information requested is available from the current scheme manager from the introduction of the Warm Front scheme. Measures delivered by previous scheme managers working on Warm Front prior to 2005 are unavailable. The number of households that received only energy efficient light bulbs (alongside energy efficiency advice) in each scheme year is in the following table:
	
		
			  Number of households who received energy efficient light bulbs and no other measures under the Warm Front scheme (eaga only) 
			  Scheme year  Number of households 
			 2000-01 1,493.00 
			 2001-02 2,570.00 
			 2002-03 45,389.00 
			 2003-04 26,929.00 
			 2004-05 25,303.00 
			 2005-06 25,089.00 
			 2006-07 45,472.00 
			 2007-08 48,982.00 
			 2008-09 32,205.00 
			   
			 Total 253,432.00

Warm Front Scheme

Michael Penning: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change when the Parliamentary Under-Secretary of State plans to provide further clarification as referred to in his reply to the letter from the hon. Member for Hemel Hempstead of 4 February 2009 on Warm Front schemes.

Joan Ruddock: I replied to the hon. Member for Hemel Hempstead on 25 March 2009.

Warm Front Scheme

Charles Hendry: To ask the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change how many companies are registered to install energy efficiency products under the Warm Front scheme.

Joan Ruddock: holding answer 24 March 2009
	 There are currently 121 companies registered to install the range of energy efficient heating and insulation improvements delivered under the Warm Front Scheme. This figure excludes sub-contractors.

WOMEN AND EQUALITY

Departmental Ministerial Policy Advisers

Grant Shapps: To ask the Minister for Women and Equality how much was claimed in reimbursable expenses by special advisers in her Office in each year since its inception; and how much has been spent in 2008-09 to date.

Maria Eagle: Costs incurred on reimbursable expenses in 2008-09 will be available only when the Government Equalities Office' resource accounts are fully audited and laid before Parliament. This is expected to be before the 2009 summer recess.

Members: Correspondence

Clare Short: To ask the Minister for Women and Equality when she plans to reply to the letter of 26 January 2009 from the right hon. Member for Birmingham, Ladywood on equal pay for work of equal value.

Maria Eagle: A reply has been sent to the right hon. Member.

Regional Equality and Diversity Partnerships

Bob Neill: To ask the Minister for Women and Equality what  (a) funding and  (b) other resources the Government Equalities Office has provided to each Regional Equality and Diversity Partnership in the last 12 months.

Maria Eagle: The Government Equalities Office has not provided any funding or resources to Regional Equality and Diversity Partnerships over the past 12 months.

INNOVATION, UNIVERSITIES AND SKILLS

Economic Situation

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what  (a) summits,  (b) conferences and  (c) seminars his Department has hosted since January 2008 at which a primary subject for discussion was the impact of the economic situation on matters within his Department's responsibility.

Si�n Simon: DIUS hosted events at which a primary subject of discussion was the effect of the economic situation on matters within DIUS' responsibility are listed in the following table.
	
		
			  Event  Event type  Date 
			 DIUS Group meeting and DIUS Family (delivery partners) drinks reception to bring them on board with the narrative of how DIUS can help people and business through downturn. Seminar and reception 19 November 2008 
			 Small and Medium Enterprise (SME) Panel: Secretary of State discussing changes to Train to Gain funding with SMEs. Seminar 26 November 2008 
			 Local business seminar, in Hoylake, Wirral, focusing on DIUS and its role in supporting and facilitating the development of small businesses. Seminar 8 January 2009 
			 DIUS Family (delivery partners) Awayday to discuss the DIUS response to the downturn. Seminar 27 January 2009 
			 'Staying Aheadinvesting in science during the down-turn' at the Royal Academy of Engineering. Seminar 19 February 2009

Higher Education: Admissions

Jeff Ennis: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what percentage of young people living in  (a) Barnsley and  (b) Doncaster entered university in each of the last 10 years.

David Lammy: It is not possible to identify young people from Barnsley and Doncaster who did not enter university, therefore the percentage of young people from Barnsley and Doncaster who entered university cannot be calculated.
	The number of young undergraduate entrants from Barnsley and Doncaster is shown as an alternative. Figures for the 2008-09 academic year will be available in January 2010.
	
		
			  Young( 1)  undergraduate entrants( 2)  from Barnsley local authority( 3)  and Doncaster local authority( 3) , UK higher education institutions( 4) , academic years 1998-99 to 2007-08 
			  Academic year  Barnsley  Doncaster 
			 1998-99 460 830 
			 1999-2000 505 830 
			 2000-01 550 795 
			 2001-02 570 910 
			 2002-03 515 860 
			 2003-04 565 890 
			 2004-05 550 905 
			 2005-06 655 990 
			 2006-07 655 910 
			 2007-08 690 950 
			 (1) Young refers to undergraduates aged under 21. (2) Covers entrants to both full-time and part-time undergraduate courses. (3) Local authority is defined by full and valid home postcodes. (4) Excludes the Open University due to inconsistencies in their coding of entrants over the time series.  Note: Figures are on a snapshot basis as at 1 December and have been rounded to the nearest five.  Source: Higher Education Statistics Agency (HESA).

Higher Education: Admissions

David Drew: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what percentage of  (a) 18 and  (b) 19 year olds resident in each local authority area went into higher education in (i) 1997-98 and (ii) 2007-08.

David Lammy: The number of 18 and 19-year-old entrants to higher education from each local authority is shown in the following table.
	It is not possible to identify 18 and 19-year-olds who did not begin a course at a higher education institution in 2007-08. Therefore, it is not possible to calculate what percentage of 18 and 19-year-olds from each local authority went into higher education in 2007-08.
	The Higher Education Funding Council for England (HEFCE) published Young participation in higher education in January 2005, which is available from the HEFCE website at:
	http://www.hefce.ac.uk/pubs/hefce/2005/05_03/
	The HEFCE report shows participation rates for young people who entered higher education aged 18 or 19 disaggregated by local education authority (LEA) for the years 1997 to 2000.
	At national level, the higher education initial participation rate (HEIPR) covers English-domiciled 17 to 30-year-old first-time entrants to higher education courses, at UK higher education institutions and English, Scottish and Welsh further education colleges, who remain on their course for at least six months. The latest available figure is 39.8 per cent. in 2006/07. For 18 and 19-year-olds, the figures are 20.2 per cent. and 8.6 per cent. respectively.
	
		
			  18 and 19-year-old entrants( 1)  to higher education by local authority( 2) ,( ) UK higher education institutions( 3) , academic years 1997/98 and 2007/08 
			   1997/98  2007/08 
			  Local authority  18-year-old entrants  19-year-old entrants  18-year-old entrants  19-year-old entrants 
			 City of London 5 5 10 10 
			 Camden 230 300 395 390 
			 Greenwich 325 210 560 385 
			 Hackney 210 195 455 405 
			 Hammersmith and Fulham 185 210 315 315 
			 Islington 170 195 380 310 
			 Kensington and Chelsea 215 290 340 300 
			 Lambeth 295 280 580 510 
			 Lewisham 340 255 680 455 
			 Southwark 250 240 580 510 
			 Tower Hamlets 220 150 545 335 
			 Wandsworth 325 360 540 540 
			 Westminster 255 240 375 355 
			 Barking and Dagenham 160 85 380 220 
			 Barnet 945 670 1,325 930 
			 Bexley 405 200 720 295 
			 Brent 680 470 1,050 680 
			 Bromley 810 375 1,105 480 
			 Croydon 765 425 1,270 665 
			 Ealing 700 525 1,080 770 
			 Enfield 690 380 1,070 575 
			 Haringey 300 300 585 580 
			 Harrow 795 480 1,230 680 
			 Havering 425 155 680 240 
			 Hillingdon 535 235 850 425 
			 Hounslow 475 380 745 490 
			 Kingston upon Thames 330 195 575 355 
			 Merton 350 255 590 375 
			 Newham 380 330 975 590 
			 Redbridge 740 365 1,240 590 
			 Richmond upon Thames 435 350 620 515 
			 Sutton 410 175 615 310 
			 Waltham Forest 420 255 740 430 
			 Birmingham 1,940 1,235 2,700 1,600 
			 Coventry 660 315 775 405 
			 Dudley 670 250 850 295 
			 Sandwell 465 240 675 325 
			 Solihull 640 235 845 335 
			 Walsall 530 200 670 295 
			 Wolverhampton 625 250 740 330 
			 Knowsley 170 60 385 170 
			 Liverpool 620 225 1,105 510 
			 St. Helens 435 130 475 145 
			 Sefton 785 325 985 370 
			 Wirral 880 250 1,140 445 
			 Bolton 735 280 785 305 
			 Bury 460 190 665 245 
			 Manchester 510 330 810 585 
			 Oldham 440 170 665 240 
			 Rochdale 485 175 590 260 
			 Salford 295 135 415 205 
			 Stockport 755 280 960 385 
			 Tameside 385 175 550 165 
			 Trafford 695 240 900 380 
			 Wigan 585 190 705 240 
			 Barnsley 300 115 445 160 
			 Doncaster 530 145 660 190 
			 Rotherham 490 155 620 205 
			 Sheffield 800 405 1,145 660 
			 Bradford 950 460 1,300 585 
			 Calderdale 425 175 535 250 
			 Kirklees 995 430 1,235 490 
			 Leeds 1,320 580 1,725 825 
			 Wakefield 605 175 705 270 
			 Gateshead 420 130 495 175 
			 Newcastle upon Tyne 465 200 585 340 
			 North Tyneside 460 165 520 210 
			 South Tyneside 310 120 320 130 
			 Sunderland 565 170 625 285 
			 Isles Of Scilly 5 5 5 5 
			 Bath and North East Somerset 375 225 430 380 
			 Bristol, City of 535 435 550 540 
			 North Somerset 535 260 535 350 
			 South Gloucestershire 590 255 710 305 
			 Hartlepool 160 60 230 110 
			 Middlesbrough 270 135 410 210 
			 Redcar and Cleveland 355 135 390 165 
			 Stockton-on-Tees 465 210 620 250 
			 Kingston upon Hull, City of 260 135 390 200 
			 East Riding of Yorkshire 905 340 1,015 395 
			 North East Lincolnshire 305 105 295 140 
			 North Lincolnshire 400 120 425 170 
			 North Yorkshire 1,580 630 1,885 875 
			 York 375 205 465 215 
			 Bedfordshire 1,020 440 1,285 575 
			 Luton 355 235 615 300 
			 Buckinghamshire 1,555 885 1,955 1,030 
			 Milton Keynes 465 195 610 340 
			 Derbyshire 1,690 665 2,030 800 
			 Derby 485 235 605 260 
			 Dorset 830 460 985 680 
			 Poole 300 115 380 180 
			 Bournemouth 300 165 325 205 
			 Durham 1,090 350 1,160 445 
			 Darlington 195 85 305 105 
			 East Sussex 940 625 1,050 840 
			 Brighton and Hove 280 265 440 395 
			 Hampshire 3,310 1,450 3,625 2,045 
			 Portsmouth 210 135 300 215 
			 Southampton 305 185 345 290 
			 Leicestershire 1,755 700 2,010 910 
			 Leicester 540 400 845 565 
			 Rutland 115 70 120 90 
			 Staffordshire 1,990 780 2,525 970 
			 Stoke-on-Trent 335 135 470 185 
			 Wiltshire 1,025 565 1,135 785 
			 Swindon 250 115 350 210 
			 Bracknell Forest 235 100 305 155 
			 Windsor and Maidenhead 375 240 495 240 
			 West Berkshire 395 190 435 225 
			 Reading 220 140 285 200 
			 Slough 195 160 375 215 
			 Wokingham 545 200 645 340 
			 Cambridgeshire 1,195 745 1,355 910 
			 Peterborough 315 145 420 185 
			 Cheshire 2,065 700 2,440 1,000 
			 Halton 205 70 305 130 
			 Warrington 445 150 680 245 
			 Devon 1,385 800 1,545 1,295 
			 Plymouth 440 175 510 310 
			 Torbay 235 105 285 125 
			 Essex 2,890 1,205 3,940 1,755 
			 Southend-on-Sea 340 150 435 200 
			 Thurrock 170 95 320 135 
			 Herefordshire 350 220 470 305 
			 Worcestershire 1,390 655 1,670 845 
			 Kent 3,045 1,450 4,010 2,045 
			 Medway 460 175 750 265 
			 Lancashire 2,920 1,135 3,140 1,190 
			 Blackburn and Darwen 295 120 345 145 
			 Blackpool 190 95 195 95 
			 Nottinghamshire 1,675 615 2,015 870 
			 Nottingham 275 185 445 280 
			 Shropshire 790 355 835 475 
			 Telford and Wrekin 335 135 405 170 
			 Cornwall 1,195 535 1,195 780 
			 Cumbria 1,060 480 1,320 540 
			 Gloucestershire 1,530 695 1,540 1,020 
			 Hertfordshire 2,885 1,310 3,815 1,765 
			 Isle of Wight 275 160 250 160 
			 Lincolnshire 1,490 530 1,845 715 
			 Norfolk 1,440 730 1,655 1,010 
			 Northamptonshire 1,400 635 1,800 920 
			 Northumberland 930 300 820 370 
			 Oxfordshire 1,390 950 1,585 1,270 
			 Somerset 1,115 655 1,235 900 
			 Suffolk 1,290 665 1,855 1,050 
			 Surrey 3,105 1,615 3,740 2,145 
			 Warwickshire 1,410 615 1,635 735 
			 West Sussex 1,800 960 1,815 1,180 
			 Total England 108,325 52,695 139,485 73,690 
			  
			 Isle of Anglesey 185 55 235 65 
			 Gwynedd 305 120 350 145 
			 Conwy 280 115 345 130 
			 Denbighshire 215 90 255 125 
			 Flintshire 355 120 400 175 
			 Wrexham 310 115 275 140 
			 Powys 375 135 415 205 
			 Ceredigion 205 80 245 85 
			 Pembrokeshire 370 175 405 140 
			 Carmarthenshire 550 215 575 235 
			 City and County of Swansea 615 300 675 315 
			 Neath Port Talbot 310 155 380 180 
			 Bridgend 335 140 470 175 
			 The Vale of Glamorgan 430 185 485 210 
			 Rhondda Cynon Taff 595 210 675 260 
			 Merthyr Tydfil 115 40 160 50 
			 Caerphilly 360 120 455 150 
			 Blaenau Gwent 115 45 135 55 
			 Torfaen 255 75 230 95 
			 Monmouthshire 320 125 360 155 
			 Newport 295 145 435 175 
			 Cardiff 690 320 945 500 
			 Total Wales 7,590 3,070 8,910 3,770 
			 Total England and Wales 115,915 55,765 148,395 77,455 
			  
			 Belfast 485 245 780 415 
			 Western 655 290 1,340 635 
			 North Eastern 920 370 1,640 700 
			 South Eastern 980 415 1,470 680 
			 Southern 755 405 1,560 745 
			 Total Northern Ireland 3,800 1,725 6,790 3,170 
			  
			 Channel Islands 30 20 665 250 
			  
			 Aberdeen City 350 105 405 155 
			 Aberdeenshire 550 140 590 190 
			 Angus 245 60 215 85 
			 Argyll and Bute 190 60 190 60 
			 Scottish Borders 240 85 225 100 
			 Clackmannanshire 85 15 80 30 
			 West Dunbartonshire 105 45 115 55 
			 Dumfries and Galloway 280 70 265 85 
			 Dundee City 200 75 220 105 
			 East Ayrshire 175 50 185 55 
			 East Dunbartonshire 355 100 305 85 
			 East Lothian 160 50 195 85 
			 East Renfrewshire 280 65 335 85 
			 City of Edinburgh 755 315 970 415 
			 Falkirk 180 50 165 40 
			 Fife 580 160 560 190 
			 Glasgow City 590 210 745 340 
			 Highland 355 130 520 215 
			 Inverclyde 145 35 150 55 
			 Midlothian 140 35 120 45 
			 Moray 140 45 200 100 
			 North Ayrshire 190 70 210 60 
			 North Lanarkshire 410 120 465 180 
			 Orkney Islands 45 20 65 20 
			 Perth and Kinross 300 85 370 155 
			 Renfrewshire 330 70 265 105 
			 Shetland Islands 35 15 75 15 
			 South Ayrshire 275 85 225 75 
			 South Lanarkshire 485 105 585 215 
			 Stirling 200 50 160 45 
			 West Lothian 250 75 225 65 
			 Eilean Siar 65 15 75 25 
			 Total Scotland 8,670 2,615 9,480 3,540 
			  
			 Total UK 128,415 60,125 165,330 84,410 
			 Missing 21,025 17,260 16,360 18,050 
			 (1 )Covers undergraduate and postgraduate entrants to full and part-time courses. (2 )Local authority is derived from postcode. Those with missing or invalid postcodes are defined as missing. (3 )Figures exclude the Open university due to inconsistencies in their coding of entrants across the time series.  Note: Figures are on a snapshot basis and as at 1 December. Figures have been rounded to the nearest five, so components may not sum to totals.  Source:  Higher Education Statistics Agency (HESA)

Higher Education: Finance

Grant Shapps: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what assessment he has made of the effect of the recession on the ability of higher education institutions to raise finance on private markets.

David Lammy: Financial institutions still see higher education as being a low risk sector and are keen to continue to lend. We will keep the situation under review in changing economic circumstances.

Renewable Energy: Research

Chris Ruane: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills how much funding was allocated for research and development by his Department and its agencies into renewable energy sources in each year for which figures are available.

David Lammy: The Department for Innovation Universities and Skills (DIUS) provides funding to the Technology Strategy Board and the Research Councils to support research and development. These bodies are each responsible for determining detailed distribution between priorities. The following table shows expenditure on research and development into renewable energy sources:
	
		
			   million 
			   Research Councils  TSB( 1) 
			 1997-98 4.41 4.449 
			 1998-99 5.64 3.334 
			 1999-2000 5.08 3.914 
			 2000-01 5.60 3.954 
			 2001-02 6.81 5.217 
			 2002-03 6.53 10.495 
			 2003-04 6.82 11.234 
			 2004-05 7.17 5.673 
			 2005-06 7.65 5.453 
			 2006-07 8.71 4.539 
			 2007-08 15.92 7.530 
			 (1) Responsibility for renewable energy R and D, previously funded by the Department for Trade and Industry, was transferred to the Technology Strategy Board in 2007-08. 
		
	
	In addition, the Research Councils are providing funding of 13.88 million over the period 2004-09 for the UK Energy Research Centre (which undertakes a range of research relating to renewable energy) and energy is included in the work of the Tyndall Centre for Climate Change Research (which has some 15.8 million funding from the Research Councils over 2000-08).

Students: Finance

David Willetts: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills what steps he is taking to ensure the Government's policy on public funding for students taking equivalent or lower qualifications takes into account the needs of employers during the recession.

David Lammy: The ELQ policy fundamentally addresses the perennial need of employers for a greater proportion of the population to acquire higher level skills because it represents a redistribution of funding from those who have already benefited from higher education to first time entrants. The policy also seeks to supply employers with more of the graduates they need most. Students co-funded by employers and those studying for foundation degrees are exempt from the policy and strategically important science, technology, engineering and mathematics subjects still attract institutional funding when studied as an ELQ. To discern whether there is more the policy can do we have instructed HEFCE in their current review of the impact of the ELQ policy that, while they should continue to prioritise first time students, they should seek to assist universities in responding to the economic circumstances if appropriate changes are suggested by the evidence.

Students: Loans

David Willetts: To ask the Secretary of State for Innovation, Universities and Skills how many complaints have been made against the Student Loans Company by people on the Repayment of Teachers' Loans Scheme.

Jim Knight: I have been asked to reply.
	The information is as follows:
	
		
			  Year complaints were received  Number of people on the scheme  Number of complaints registered with SLC 
			 2004 11,200 34 
			 2005 18,600 83 
			 2006 24,100 63 
			 2007 22,500 67 
			 2008 21,700 57 
			 2009 Total not yet available 13 
		
	
	Some of these complaints were about the rules of the scheme (as designed by the Government) and others were about the way the SLC had delivered the required administration service. It is not possible to disaggregate these.

HEALTH

Accident and Emergency Departments

Derek Twigg: To ask the Secretary of State for Health how many patients were treated in accident and emergency departments in England and Wales in each month since January 2007.

Ben Bradshaw: Information is not available in the format requested, as data on the number of patients attending accident and emergency (AE) departments are published quarterly via the Department's QMAE dataset, and only cover England.
	The following table shows the number of attendances at major AE departments in England for each quarter for the time period requested.
	
		
			  Attendances at major accident and emergency departments, England, Q4 2006-07 to 03 2008-09 
			   Quarter  Attendances 
			 2006-07 4 3,292,269 
			 2007-08 1 3,462,893 
			 2007-08 2 3,397,889 
			 2007-08 3 3,305,222 
			 2007-08 4 3,227,550 
			 2008-09 1 3,422,326 
			 2008-09 2 3,363,031 
			 2008-09 3 3,351,365 
			  Source: Department of Health dataset QMAE

Antidepressants: Children

Michael Penning: To ask the Secretary of State for Health how many children aged under 16 years were prescribed anti-depressant medication in  (a) Hemel Hempstead and  (b) Hertfordshire in each of the last five years.

Ann Keen: This information is not collected centrally.

Dental Services

Norman Lamb: To ask the Secretary of State for Health what recent estimate he has made of levels of access to NHS dentistry in England.

Ann Keen: The number of patients seen by an NHS dentist in the previous 24 months in England, at quarterly intervals, from 31 March 2006 to 30 September 2008 is available in Table D3 of Annex 3 of the 'NHS Dental Statistics, Quarter 2: 30 September 2008' report. This information is also available as a percentage of the population in Table D4 of Annex 3. The information is provided by primary care trust and by strategic health authority.
	This report has already been placed in the Library and is also available on the NHS Information Centre website at:
	www.ic.nhs.uk/pubs/dentalstats0809q2

Departmental Electricity Generation

Simon Hughes: To ask the Secretary of State for Health what  (a) capital and  (b) maintenance expenditure his Department has incurred on standby diesel generators for back-up electricity supply of his Department's estate in each year since March 1997.

Ben Bradshaw: The capital and maintenance expenditure the Department has incurred on stand-by diesel generators for back-up electricity supply of the Department's London estate in each year since March 1997 is as follows:
	
		
			   
			   Capital  Maintenance expenditure 
			 1996-97 0 1,550.00 
			 1997-98 0 1,627.50 
			 1998-99 0 1,708.88 
			 1999-2000 0 1,794.32 
			 2000-01 0 1,884.04 
			 2001-02 0 1,978.24 
			 2002-03 0 2,077.15 
			 2003-04 0 2,181.01 
			 2004-05 15,000.00 2,769.32 
			 2005-06 0 2,915.08 
			 2006-07 0 3,068.50 
			 2007-08 0 3,230.00 
			 2008-09 0 3,400.00

Health Centres

Andrew Lansley: To ask the Secretary of State for Health what percentage of primary care trusts he expects will have a GP-led health centre open by 1 April 2009.

Ben Bradshaw: Based on current primary care trust plans, we expect a third of the 152 general practitioner-led health centres (33 per cent.) will be open by 1 April 2009 with the majority opening by the end of 2009.

Hospitals: Children

Norman Lamb: To ask the Secretary of State for Health pursuant to the answer to the hon. Member for South Cambridgeshire (Mr. Lansley) of 10 March 2009,  Official Report, column 377W, on hospitals: children, how many children aged  (a) under 10 years and  (b) 10 years and over were admitted to hospital with a diagnosis of type 2 diabetes in each year since 1997-98.

Ann Keen: Data for the number of children admitted to hospital with type 2 diabetes are not available. However, the following table represents the counts of total admissions of children to hospital due to type 2 diabetes (a child may be admitted on more than one occasion).
	
		
			  Count of finished admission episodes where primary diagnosis is non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus for under 10 years and 10 to 18 years from 1997-98 to 2007-08 in English national health service hospitals and English NHS commissioned activity in the independent sector 
			   Under 10 years  10 to 18 years 
			 1997-98 25 88 
			 1998-99 34 70 
			 1999-2000 36 85 
			 2000-01 32 68 
			 2001-02 45 100 
			 2002-03 32 116 
			 2003-04 34 154 
			 2004-05 39 161 
			 2005-06 40 159 
			 2006-07 32 141 
			 2007-08 29 181 
			  Notes:  Finished admission episodes A finished admission episode is the first period of inpatient care under one consultant within one healthcare provider. Finished admission episodes are counted against the year in which the admission episode finishes. Admissions do not represent the number of inpatients, as a person may have more than one admission within the year.  Primary diagnosis The primary diagnosis is the first of up to 20 (14 from 2002-03 to 2006-07 and seven prior to 2002-03) diagnosis fields in the Hospital Episode Statistics (HES) data set and provides the main reason why the patient was admitted to hospital.  Assessing growth through time HES figures are available from 1989-90 onwards. The quality and coverage of the data have improved over time. These improvements in information submitted by the NHS have been particularly marked in the earlier years and need to be borne in mind when analysing time series. Some of the increase in figures for later years (particularly 2006-07 onwards) may be due to the improvement in the coverage of independent sector activity. Changes in NHS practice also need to be borne in mind when analysing time series. For example, a number of procedures may now be undertaken in outpatient settings and may no longer be accounted for in the HES data. This may account for any reductions in activity over time.  Ungrossed data Figures have not been adjusted for shortfalls in the data, i.e. the data are ungrossed.  Source: Hospital Episode Statistics (HES), The NHS Information Centre for health and social care

Hospitals: Food

Anne McIntosh: To ask the Secretary of State for Health 
	(1)  what his policy is on assisting hospital patients to eat at mealtimes; and what his policy is on families being present at patients' mealtimes to encourage patients to eat;
	(2)  what system is in place in the NHS to monitor and observe a hospital patient's intake of food at mealtimes.

Ann Keen: A significant contribution to assisting patients to eat at mealtimes is the Protected Mealtimes Initiative (PMI), which was introduced by NHS Estates in partnership with the Royal College of Nursing in 2004, as part of the Better Hospital Food programme. The initiative is now led by the National Patient Safety Agency (NPSA) which has been working with key stakeholders in the development of a toolkit to assist national health service organisations in the implementation of the '10 Key Characteristics of Good Nutritional Care'. A factsheet relating to Protected Mealtimes was developed and launched in April 2008 and the NPSA will be launching the complete toolkit later this year.
	Policy regarding families being present at patients' mealtimes is determined by local NHS organisations. Such organisations often establish action plans aimed at improving access to their meal services. A frequently used element of such plans is the 'red tray scheme', which identifies to ward staff, those patients at risk of poor nutrition.

Infant Mortality

Derek Twigg: To ask the Secretary of State for Health what recent assessment he has made of the main causes of infant mortality.

Dawn Primarolo: The most recent assessment of the main causes of infant mortality was set out in the Review of the Health Inequalities Infant Mortality PSA Target published in by the Department in 2007. These causes are immaturity related conditions (babies born of less than 37 weeks gestation), congenital anomalies and conditions, and sudden and unexpected deaths in infancy.
	A copy of the review has already been placed in the Library.

Miscarriage: Alcoholic Drinks

Norman Lamb: To ask the Secretary of State for Health how many alcohol-related miscarriages were recorded in each strategic health authority area in each of the last five years.

Dawn Primarolo: The following table provides estimates of the number of alcohol-related admissions to hospital for miscarriage. These estimates have been calculated by multiplying the total number of admissions to hospital miscarriages within each age group by the fraction of cases that, according to epidemiological research, can be attributed to alcohol. Additionally, it is important to note that not all miscarriages result in admission to hospital.
	
		
			  Finished alcohol-related admissions of patients for miscarriage 2003-04 to 2007-08 
			  Strategic  health authority  2003-04  2004-05  2005-06  2006-07  2007-08 
			 North East 443 454 448 457 460 
			 North West 1,290 1,422 1,627 1,506 1,448 
			 Yorkshire and the Humber 1,065 1,161 1,184 1,068 1,158 
			 West Midlands 1,075 1,069 1,108 974 952 
			 East Midlands 809 740 720 647 866 
			 East of England 786 782 820 687 709 
			 South Central 868 1,031 1,032 451 481 
			 South East Coast474 499 
			 London 1,469 1,573 1,717 1,804 1,606 
			 South West 715 736 797 780 739 
			 Unknown / No fixed abode 242 144 187 272 169 
			 England 8,763 9,112 9,639 9,120 9,086 
			  Notes:  General Strategic health authorities were reconfigured between 2005-06 and 2006-07. Separate figures for South Central and South East Coast SHAs are only available for the period from 2006-07. A total for the South East is provided for the period up to 2005-06. Includes activity in English national health service hospitals and English NHS commissioned activity in the independent sector.  Alcohol-related admissions The number of alcohol-related admissions is based on the methodology developed by the North West Public Health Observatory (NWPHO). Following international best practice, the NWPHO methodology estimates the proportion of cases that are attributable to the consumption of alcohol. Details of the proportions can be found in the report Jones et al. (2008) Alcohol-attributable fractions for England: Alcohol-attributable mortality and hospital admissions. Figures for under 16s are excluded because the research on which the attributable fractions are based does not cover under 16s.  Number of episodes in which the patient had an alcohol-related primary or secondary diagnosis These figures represent the number of episodes where an alcohol-related diagnosis was recorded in any of the 20 (14 from 2002-03 to 2006-07 and seven prior to 2002-03) primary and secondary diagnosis fields in a hospital episode statistics (HES) record. Each episode is only counted once in each count, even if an alcohol-related diagnosis is recorded in more than one diagnosis field of the record.  Ungrossed data Figures have not been adjusted for shortfalls in data (i.e. the data are ungrossed).  Finished admission episodes A finished admission episode is the first period of in-patient care under one consultant within one healthcare provider. Finished admission episodes are counted against the year in which the admission episode finishes. Admissions do not represent the number of in-patients, as a person may have more than one admission within the year.  Primary diagnosis The primary diagnosis is the first of up to 20 (14 from 2002-03 to 2006-07 and seven prior to 2002-03) diagnosis fields in the hospital episode statistics (HES) data set and provides the main reason why the patient was admitted to hospital.  Secondary diagnosis As well as the primary diagnosis, there are up to 19 (13 from 2002-03 to 2007-08 and six prior to 2002-03) secondary diagnosis fields in hospital episode statistics (HES) that show other diagnoses relevant to the episode of care.  Data quality HES are compiled from data sent by more than 300 NHS trusts and primary care trusts (PCTs) in England. Data are also received from a number of independent sector organisations for activity commissioned by the English NHS. The NHS Information Centre for health and social care liaises closely with these organisations to encourage submission of complete and valid data and seeks to minimise inaccuracies and the effect of missing and invalid data via HES processes. While this brings about improvement over time, some shortcomings remain.  Assessing growth through time HES figures are available from 1989-90 onwards. The quality and coverage of the data have improved over time. These improvements in information submitted by the NHS have been particularly marked in the earlier years and need to be borne in mind when analysing time series.  Some of the increase in figures for later years (particularly 2006-07 onwards) may be due to the improvement in the coverage of independent sector activity. Changes in NHS practice also need to be borne in mind when analysing time series. For example, a number of procedures may now be undertaken in out-patient settings and may no longer be accounted for in the HES data. This may account for any reductions in activity over time.  Assignment of episodes to years Years are assigned by the end of the first period of care in a patient's hospital stay.  Source:  Hospital episode statistics (HES), The NHS Information Centre for health and social care

NHS Foundation Trusts

Frank Dobson: To ask the Secretary of State for Health what criteria Monitor uses to assess applications for foundation status by NHS hospital trusts.

Ben Bradshaw: We are informed by the chairman of Monitor (the statutory name of which is the independent regulator of NHS foundation trusts) that a detailed description of the assessment process for NHS foundation trust (NHS FT) applicants is set out in the document 'Applying for NHS Foundation Trust StatusGuide for Applicants' (Monitor and the Department of Health, November 2008). A copy of this document has been placed in the Library and is also available from Monitor's website:
	www.monitor-nhsft.gov.uk/home/becoming-nhs-foundation-trust
	Monitor has three main criteria which it applies to all applicants for NHS FT status. The applicant trust must be:
	Legally constituted;
	Well governed; and
	Financially viable.
	Monitor's intensive assessment process takes approximately three months. Trusts must submit a wide range of information as evidence to support each category. Monitor reviews all the evidence submitted and conducts interviews with key stakeholders including primary care trusts, strategic health authorities, and the Healthcare Commission. Monitor probes the boards of each applicant trust to examine their capability to operate autonomously by questioning different aspects of their application, examples of which include:
	Does the board have arrangements in place for monitoring and continually improving the quality of healthcare provided to its patients?
	How is the board assured that it has action plans in place to meet existing targets and national core standards?
	Are there clear structures and comprehensive procedures in place for the effective working of the NHS FT board?
	Is the board confident that the senior management has the capability to and experience necessary to deliver the strategy set out in its business plan?

NHS: Counselling

Tim Farron: To ask the Secretary of State for Health 
	(1)  what professional counselling his Department provides for NHS employees suffering from psychological illness;
	(2)  how many members of staff from the NHS were absent from work for at least  (a) 30,  (b) 50 and  (c) 99 days as a result of psychological illness in each of the last five years;
	(3)  how many staff have left the NHS as a result of psychological illness in each of the last five years.

Ann Keen: National health service employees are employed by individual NHS bodies such as NHS trusts and NHS foundation trusts. These autonomous employers have a legal responsibility for ensuring the health and well-being of their staff. This includes providing any appropriate professional counselling or other occupational health support to employees with psychological or mental health problems.
	Specific guidance on this was issued to the service by NHS Employers (part of the NHS Confederation), in line with the Department's policy, in The healthy workplaces handbook in 2007.
	The broad responsibility is underscored within the recently published NHS Constitution which includes a pledge to staff that The NHS commits to provide support and opportunities for staff to maintain their health, well-being and safety.
	On the numbers of staff absent on the grounds of psychological illness and leaving the NHS as a result of psychological illness, the information requested is not available centrally. However, the number of people granted ill-health retirement from the NHS in the last five years is shown in the following table together with the numbers of acceptances for ill-health retirement on psychiatric grounds.
	
		
			  Year ending 31 March  Total number of ill health retirements  Number of acceptances for ill health retirement on psychiatric grounds 
			 2003 3,462 657 
			 2004 3,374 558 
			 2005 2,954 408 
			 2006 2,590 379 
			 2007 2,422 391 
			 2008 2,201 249 
			  Source: NHS Pensions

NHS: Manpower

Andrew Lansley: To ask the Secretary of State for Health how many full-time equivalent  (a) physiotherapists and  (b) speech therapists have been working in (i) the NHS in each year since 1997 and (ii) each NHS organisation in the last three years.

Ann Keen: The number of physiotherapists and speech therapists employed in the national health service in the years requested has been placed in the Library.

NHS: Working Hours

Norman Lamb: To ask the Secretary of State for Health 
	(1)  how much has been allocated by his Department to ensure compliance with the European Working Time Directive in the NHS;
	(2)  what guidelines his Department has provided to primary care trusts on the use of funding for compliance with the European Working Time Directive;
	(3)  how much money has been allocated by his Department to each primary care trust to aid compliance with the European Working Time Directive.

Ann Keen: The Department is making a total of 310 million available by 2009-10 to support the European Working Time Directive implementation in recurrent primary care trust (PCT) allocations.
	In 2008-09 110 million was included in the quantum allocation funding that resulted in all PCTs receiving revenue growth of 5.5 per cent. This is recurrent in PCT baselines going into 2009-10.
	In 2009-10, a further 2 million has been included in PCT revenue allocations that continue to grow by an average of 5.5 per cent. This is recurrent funding. Of this we expect 150 million to flow through tariff income to trusts as we have incorporated this sum into 2009-10 uplift applied to all tariff prices.
	The remaining 50 million in PCT allocations will be targeted to trusts according to strategic health authority (SHA) direction and is intended to support trained doctor solutions particularly in paediatrics and obstetrics services.
	SHAs are making clear to the boards of their PCTs and relevant trusts that 310 million has been made available recurrently and how it should be moved around the system in 2009-10.
	The funding should be targeted to services only where they meet one or more of the following conditions:
	The services are planning to be compliant by 1 August 2009;
	The services have sustainable plan to meet compliance after 1 August 2009 and it has been agreed that their special difficulties warrant inclusion in the Working Time regulation schedule; and
	The services are already compliant but require ongoing support for this to continue.

BUSINESS, ENTERPRISE AND REGULATORY REFORM

Beijing

David Heathcoat-Amory: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform how many visits were made by staff of his Department to Beijing in the financial year 2007-08.

Patrick McFadden: The Department made 12 visits to Beijing in the financial year 2007-08.
	All travel is undertaken in accordance with the Civil Service code and Civil Service Management Code. In BERR the criteria for booking travel is value for money based on cost and convenience.

Corporate Governance Unit

Greg Hands: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform when his predecessor Department's Corporate Governance Unit was  (a) established and  (b) disbanded; what the remit of the Unit was; what the cost to the public purse was of the Unit in each year of its operation; and what the job title was of each member of staff of the Unit.

Patrick McFadden: This Department's Corporate Law and Governance Directorate, which deals with corporate governance issues, has not been disbanded.

Departmental Billing

Mark Oaten: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform what percentage of invoices from his Department's suppliers have been paid using a Government procurement card in each of the last six months.

Patrick McFadden: holding answer 23 March 2009
	Information on the number of invoices paid by a Government Procurement Card can be obtained only at disproportionate cost. However, over the last six months (September 2008 to February 2009) the percentages of Government Procurement Card payments (including both invoices and at the point-of-sale) as a proportion of the total number of transactions for all payment methods, is as follows:
	
		
			   Total number of transactions  Number paid by GPC  Percentage 
			 September 2008 3,489 883 25.3 
			 October 2008 5,121 1,165 22.7 
			 November 2008 3,887 994 25.6 
			 December 2008 3,478 84 24.2 
			 January 2009 3,628 997 27.5 
			 February 2009 3,468 1,076 31.0

Departmental Rail Travel

Nick Hurd: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform what guidance his Department issues on whether staff may claim for first class rail travel if there are no seats available in standard class.

Patrick McFadden: BERR encourages staff to make use of cheaper types of tickets wherever possible. No matter what class of travel is used, staff travelling on official business must take advantage of any cheap facilities which maybe available (e.g. special offers, restricted tickets) wherever practical.
	The rail booking system used by BERR pre-books seats if they are available for the journeys specified.
	If the traveller does not have a pre-booked seat, and no seats in standard class are available (except on suburban lines), then the traveller may transfer to a first class carriage.
	All travel is undertaken in accordance with the Civil Service Management code and the Ministerial Code.

Departmental Visits Abroad

Anne Main: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform 
	(1)  which hotels the Secretary of State for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform stayed in during the World Economic Forum between 28 January and 1 February 2009; and at what cost;
	(2)  which hotel the Minister for Small Business and Competitiveness stayed in during the World Economic Forum between 28 January and 1 February 2009; and at what cost.

Patrick McFadden: I refer the hon. Member to the answer I gave to the hon. Member for Cotswold (Mr. Clifton-Brown) on 4 March 2009,  Official Report, column 1701W.

Departmental Visits Abroad

David Simpson: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform how much expenditure was incurred in respect of overseas visits which  (a) he,  (b) other Ministers in his Department and  (c) his Department's senior officials undertook in 2008.

Patrick McFadden: Since 1999, the Government have published a list of all overseas travel by Cabinet Ministers costing over 500. Information for the financial year 2007-08 was published on 22 July 2008,  Official Report, column 102WS, and for the first time included details of overseas visits undertaken by all Ministers. All travel by Ministers is undertaken in accordance with the Ministerial Code.
	Details for the 2008-09 period including details for the period 1 April to 31 December 2008 will be published as soon as possible after the end of the financial year.
	The total amount of expenditure incurred in respect of overseas visits by BERR senior officials for the period January 2008 to December 2008 was 534,357; this figure includes air, rail and hotel accommodation.
	All travel is undertaken in accordance with the Civil Service Management Code. In BERR the criteria for booking travel is value for money based on cost and convenience.

Departmental Written Questions

Shailesh Vara: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform on how many occasions in the last 12 months Ministers in his Department have used their discretion to rule that a parliamentary question for written answer should be answered because it would be in the public interest to do so, even though to do so would exceed the disproportionate cost threshold of 700.

Patrick McFadden: Information relating to Ministers' consideration of parliamentary questions is not held in the format requested. As a general principle, the Department aims to provide as much information as possible when answering written questions and would consider providing an answer, even were it to exceed the disproportionate cost threshold, where Ministers consider it to be in the public interest.
	In a ministerial written statement on 8 December 2008,  Official Report, column 24WS, the Exchequer Secretary to the Treasury informed the House that the disproportionate cost threshold increased to 750 with effect from 3 December 2008.

Fire Services: Working Hours

Alistair Carmichael: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform what recent assessment he has made of the potential effect on levels of fire cover provided by retained fire fighters of the provisions of the EU Working Time Directive in each fire service region in Scotland; and if he will make a statement.

Patrick McFadden: The UK Government recognise that losing the individual's right to opt-out of the 48 hour working week, as set by the Working Time Directive, would have a detrimental effect on the hours which firefighters working the Retained Duty System could be available for duty, especially the substantial numbers who work full time for their primary employer. Many other workers also use this important flexibility and so we are firmly of the view that this right should remain. We will continue to insist on this point throughout the process of conciliation with the European Parliament on the revision of the directive.
	I am aware of the widespread concern on this issue among retained firefighters, and both from this Department and the Department for Communities and Local Government have worked very closely with the Retained Firefighters' Union and will continue to keep them informed throughout the negotiations.

Fire Services: Working Hours

Anne McIntosh: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform what recent discussions he has had with the European Commission on the effects of the individual opt-out from the European Working Time Directive on the working practices of  (a) junior hospital doctors and  (b) part-time firemen; and if he will make a statement.

Patrick McFadden: The UK Government recognise the importance of the individual's right to opt-out of the 48 hour working week as set by the Working Time Directive. It is a right that many workers choose to exercise and an essential part of the UK's labour market flexibility. We remain firmly of the view that workers should be able to work longer hours should they choose to do so and so, through Council, are pressing this point during the formal conciliation discussions with the European Parliament.
	I am aware of the widespread concern on this issue among retained firefighters, and officials both from this Department and the Department for Communities and Local Government have worked very closely with the Retained Firefighters' Union and will continue to keep them informed throughout the negotiations.
	The individual opt out is pertinent to the NHS workforce and we continue to work closely with the Department of Health and will continue to keep them informed also.

Insolvency: Complaints

Austin Mitchell: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform if he will appoint an independent ombudsman to investigate complaints against insolvency practitioners.

Patrick McFadden: There are no legislative powers available to enable my noble Friend, the Secretary of State to appoint someone such as an ombudsman, to review the decisions of a recognised professional body (RPB) with respect to a particular complaint against an insolvency practitioner. The Secretary of State is satisfied that the RPBs have the proper procedures in place to ensure that only fit and proper persons who meet the requirements for authorisation are granted a licence to act as an insolvency practitioner. The Secretary of State is also assured that the RPBs have procedures in place to ensure that complaints against their members are investigated properly; all of the RPBs have review processes.

Members: Correspondence

Gregory Campbell: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform when the Secretary of State plans to reply to the letter sent by the hon. Member for East Londonderry on 24 October 2008, reference number JH/102550.

Patrick McFadden: holding answer 13 March 2009
	 I responded to the hon. Member on 11 March.

Members: Correspondence

Simon Burns: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform when he will respond to the letter from the hon. Member for West Chelmsford of 19 December 2008 concerning a constituent, Mr. Paul Atkinson of Chelmsford.

Patrick McFadden: holding answer 20 March 2009
	 I responded to the hon. Member on 13 March.

Minimum Wage

Paddy Tipping: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform what estimate he has made of the number of people receiving a higher take home pay as a result of national minimum wage legislation in  (a) Nottinghamshire,  (b) the East Midlands and  (c) nationally.

Patrick McFadden: It is difficult to isolate the effect of the NMW on take home pay as take home pay is affected by hours worked and other sources of income such as tax credits and taxes. However, evidence suggests that since its introduction the NMW is affecting more people and the hourly wage is rising faster than average earnings and prices benefiting the lowest paid in the economy. The adult NMW has risen by around 59 per cent. since its introduction in 1999 from 3.60 to 5.73 per hour. The rise in the NMW has been greater than average earnings (around 46 per cent.) and retail price inflation (around 32 per cent. over the same period (April 1999 to October 2008).
	Evidence from the Annual Survey of Hours and Earnings (ASHE) shows that a growing number of people are affected by the National Minimum Wage (NMW). BERR estimates that around 1.1 million people in the UK were covered by the October 2008 uprating of the NMW.
	Information below Government office region is not readily available from the ASHE dataset. However, using spring 2008 ASHE data we estimate that around 93,000 employees were covered in East Midlands by the latest October 2008 NMW upratings.

Moscow

David Heathcoat-Amory: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform how many visits were made by staff of his Department to Moscow in the financial year 2007-08.

Patrick McFadden: The Department made 33 visits to Moscow in the financial year 2007-08.
	All travel is untaken in accordance with the Civil Service Code and Civil Service Management Code. In BERR the criteria for booking travel is value for money based on cost and convenience.

Performing Arts

John Mason: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform whether his Department has engaged any  (a) actors,  (b) musicians and  (c) other performers to support its initiatives over the last five years.

Patrick McFadden: Yes.

Post Offices

Lorely Burt: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform what recent representations have been made to his Department on the creation of a Post Bank.

Patrick McFadden: In addition to representations from hon. Members, I have recently received representations from the Post Bank Coalition and the National Federation of Sub-Postmasters about the creation of a Post Bank.

Post Offices

Lorely Burt: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform pursuant to the Statement of 16 December 2008,  Official Report, columns 964-66, on Royal Mail, what recent discussions the Secretary of State has had with ministerial colleagues on providing more services through the Post Office network.

Patrick McFadden: My right hon. and noble Friend the Secretary of State recently chaired an interdepartmental ministerial meeting to examine potential new business opportunities for the Post Office across Government.

Postal Services

Gordon Prentice: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform which organisations for which his Department has responsibility and oversight contract with postal service providers other than the Royal Mail; and if he will make a statement.

Patrick McFadden: The following tables include the details of the Regional Development Agencies (RDAs) postal service providers other than Royal Mail.
	
		
			  Advantage West Midlands 
			  Postal Provider  Type of Service 
			 TNT Special Delivery 
		
	
	
		
			  East of England Development Agency 
			  Postal Provider  Type of Service 
			 AC Couriers Special Delivery 
			 Grabbit and Run Couriers Ltd Special Delivery 
			 Hummingbird Express/Earlybird Special Delivery 
			 JAG Express Special Delivery 
			 Mr J's Cycle Messenger Service Special Delivery 
			 Quicksilver Messenger Service Special Delivery 
			 Team C Couriers Special Delivery 
			 TNT Special Delivery 
		
	
	
		
			  East Midlands Development Agency 
			  Postal Provider  Type of Service 
			 Pedal Express Special Delivery 
			 DHL Special Delivery 
		
	
	
		
			  London Development Agency 
			  Postal Provider  Type of Service 
			 Courier Systems Special Delivery 
		
	
	
		
			  North West Development Agency 
			  Postal Provider  Type of Service 
			 Reflex Couriers Special Delivery 
		
	
	
		
			  One North East 
			  Postal Provider  Type of Service 
			 Fast Way Couriers Special Delivery 
			 Challenge Couriers Special Delivery 
			 SJ Logistics Special Delivery 
			 TNT Special Delivery 
			 DHL Special Delivery 
		
	
	
		
			  South East Development Agency 
			  Postal Provider  Type of Service 
			 CCL Express Ltd Special Delivery 
			 Dash Couriers Special Delivery 
			 Direct Mail Works Special Delivery 
			 Federal Express Special Delivery 
			 Golden Arrow Couriers Special Delivery 
			 Owen Marine Marketing Special Delivery 
			 Parcelforce Special Delivery 
			 Pitney Bowes Ltd UK Mailing Special Delivery 
			 Pitney Bowes Plc Special Delivery 
			 PODs Ltd Special Delivery 
		
	
	
		
			  South West England Regional Development Agency 
			  Postal Provider  Type of Service 
			 DHL Express UK Ltd Special Delivery 
			 DHL International UK Ltd Special Delivery 
			 MPH Transport Solutions Special Delivery 
			 Parcelforce Special Delivery 
			 Priority Express Special Delivery 
			 TNT Special Delivery 
		
	
	
		
			  Yorkshire Forward 
			  Postal Provider  Type of Service 
			 Go Getters Cycle Couriers Special Delivery 
			 Mailbox Special Delivery 
		
	
	Companies House has a contract with DX for mail collection and delivery both in Cardiff and in Edinburgh.
	The Insolvency Service has a contract with Parcelforce.
	The Export Credits Guarantee Department (ECGD) do not have any contracts with any postal service providers.
	The Department does not hold centrally the information relating to our other non-departmental public bodies (NDPBs) and this could be provided only at disproportionate costs.

Regional Development Agencies: Finance

Caroline Spelman: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform how much each regional development agency allocated to regeneration programmes in the last year for which figures are available.

Patrick McFadden: The table shows RDAs' expenditure on regeneration programmes in 2007-08.
	
		
			  RDA  Regeneration programme spend in 2007-08 ( million) 
			 Advantage West Midlands 124 
			 East of England Development Agency 54 
			 East Midlands Development Agency 92 
			 London Development Agency (1)529 
			 Northwest Regional Development Agency 177 
			 South East England Development Agency 65 
			 South West of England Regional Development Agency 62 
			 One NorthEast 100 
			 Yorkshire Forward 109 
			 (1) This figure is inclusive of the Olympic land team's budget for regeneration programmes in 2007-08.

Royal Mail: Reorganisation

Jon Cruddas: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform what recent estimate he has made of  (a) staff time in hours expended and  (b) expenditure incurred by Royal Mail on preparations for the proposed sale of parts of its operations.

Patrick McFadden: Any staff time expended or expenditure incurred by Royal Mail is a matter for the company's management and I have asked Adam Crozier to respond directly to my hon. Friend on this.
	I will place a copy of his reply in the Libraries of the House.

Royal Mail: Reorganisation

Jon Cruddas: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform when he expects to announce his decision on which parts of Royal Mail are to be offered for sale; and whether he plans to include information on the  (a) monetary value and  (b) profitability of each section to be offered for sale in such an announcement.

Patrick McFadden: The Government are looking for a strategic partner for Royal Mail Group with the expectation that this will involve a sale of shares in the region of 30 per cent. at the Royal Mail Group Ltd. level.
	I will announce details of any partnership agreement when this is finalised with the partner. We have not set a rigid timetable for this negotiation. Any announcement will include details of any consideration to be received in respect of the partnership arrangement.
	The profitability of each of Royal Mail's main business units will be available in the company's published annual report and accounts for 2008-09.

Trade Unions

David Drew: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform if he will take steps to encourage people to join trade unions.

Patrick McFadden: The Government value the role which trade unions can play at the workplace, but it sees recruitment as a matter for trade unions themselves to organise.

Union Modernisation Fund

Francis Maude: To ask the Minister of State, Department for Business, Enterprise and Regulatory Reform how much had been spent from the Union Modernisation Fund on grants to each trade union at the latest date for which figures are available; and how much of the available funding had not been allocated.

Patrick McFadden: holding answer 13 March 2009
	Projects under rounds 1 and 2 of the Union Modernisation Fund have been allocated from a commitment of 6,393,024. Round 3 of the UMF, which is open to applications until 5 June, has an indicative budget of 3 million, the allocations will be determined once the round has closed and the process to assess the bids has taken place and awards have been made to successful bids.
	The following tables give the amounts accrued for each trade union for rounds 1 and 2.
	
		
			  Round 1 
			  Union   
			 Accord, Connect, Musicians Union 29,150.00 
			 Amicus 147,000.00 
			 ASLEF 71,477.72 
			 Bakers, Food and Allied Workers Union 33,405.00 
			 Bakers, Food and Allied Workers Union 17,241.06 
			 British Dental Association 40,122.00 
			 Ceramic and Allied Trades Union 26,783.00 
			 Communication Workers Union 183,500.00 
			 Community 87,085.39 
			 Community and District Nursing Association 14,544.02 
			 Community and Youth Workers Union 16,915.96 
			 Connect 65,038.00 
			 Equity 43,500.00 
			 General Federation of Trade Unions 79,039.77 
			 GMB 206,380.34 
			 Lloyds TSB Group Union 22,322.60 
			 National Union of Journalists 55,080.00 
			 National Union of Rail, Maritime and Transport Workers 193,737.50 
			 National Union of Teachers 63,954.25 
			 Nationwide Group Staff Union 5,875.00 
			 Portman Group Staff Association 23,389.00 
			 Prospect 187,735.00 
			 Retained Firefighters Union 60,000.00 
			 Royal College of Midwives 163,330.00 
			 Society of Chiropodists and Podiatrists 52,399.00 
			 Trades Union Congress 62,695.00 
			 Transport and General Workers Union 162,125.00 
			 Transport and General Workers Union 161,757.00 
			 Transport and General Workers Union 48,150.00 
			 Transport Salaried Staffs' Association 123,636.00 
			 Union of Finance Staff 48,860.00 
			 United Road Transport Union 84,645.00 
			 USDAW 203,291.27 
			 Wales TUC 197,763.08 
			 WBBS Staff Union 4,546.80 
			 Total 2,986,473.76 
		
	
	
		
			  Round 2 
			  Union   
			 Accord 114,762.00 
			 Amicus the union 89,309.18 
			 Association of Professionals in Education and Children's Trusts (Aspect) 9,185.60 
			 Association of Teachers and Lecturers (ATL) 52,197.10 
			 Bakers, Food and Allied Workers Union (BFAWU) 43,742.10 
			 Broadcasting Entertainment Cinematograph and Theatre Union (BECTU) 140,000.00 
			 Chartered Society of Physiotherapy 43,005.00 
			 Communication Workers Union 30,000.00 
			 Communication Workers Union 35,927.97 
			 Community 33,322.47 
			 Equity 58,794.01 
			 First Division Association (FDA) 97,717.00 
			 General Federation of Trade Unions (GFTU) 93,916.60 
			 General Federation of Trade Unions (GFTU) 67,149.35 
			 GMBBritain's General Union 109,992.80 
			 Musicians' Union 44,214.00 
			 National Association of Schoolmasters, Union of Women Teachers (NASUWT) 0.00 
			 National Union of Teachers 42,489.08 
			 Nautilus UK 36,046,64 
			 Prospect 82,331.00 
			 Public and Commercial Services Union (PCS) 26,293.55 
			 Public and Commercial Services Union (PCS) 53,323.32 
			 Trades Union Congress (TUC) 102,020.20 
			 Trades Union Congress (TUC) 89,602.00 
			 Transport and General Workers Union (TG) 70,956.00 
			 Union of Construction Allied Trades and Technicians (UCATT) 52,957.50 
			 Union of Shop, Distributive and Allied Workers 95,154.00 
			 Unison 77,982.25 
			 Unison 56,339.00 
			 Unison 169,306.25 
			 Transport Salaried Staffs' Association 30,999.48 
			 Total 2,049,035.45

CHILDREN, SCHOOLS AND FAMILIES

Academies: Sponsorship

Paul Holmes: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families who the sponsor is of each academy which has opened in England; how much each sponsor was scheduled to contribute; how much has been received from each  (a) in cash and  (b) in kind; how much is still expected from each and over what period; whether his Department has written off any expected financial contribution from a sponsor; and if he will make a statement.

Jim Knight: Two tables have been placed in the Libraries and show the sponsorship arrangements for each of the academies open in March 2009. The first, headed Traditional Procurement Academies shows for each academy where sponsorship is a contribution to capital costs, the total pledged, the amount for which the Department has evidence of receipt, and the amount still expected. In some cases further sponsorship payments may have already been received by the Academy Trust but not yet reported to the Department. The second table, headed Endowment Sponsorship Academies shows for each academy where sponsorship is in the form of contributions to an endowment fund, the amounts pledged, the amounts reported so far to the Department as received and the amount still expected. As with the first category, there may be cases where further sponsorship has already been received by the Academy Trust but not yet reported to the Department.
	Sponsorship in kind is additional to formal sponsorship requirements, the Department does not therefore keep records of it.
	In the case of Traditional Procurement Academies the timing of the receipt of cash sponsorship varies from academy to academy and is agreed as part of the Funding agreement between the Department and the academy.
	In the case of the Endowment Model, receipts commence only after the academy has opened, and usually over a period of five years.
	Sponsors have withdrawn from projects in a handful of cases, which has led to reduced sponsorship amounts. There have also been a small number of requests for deferment of sponsor contributions, which have been considered on a case by case basis.

Children: Cancer

Tim Loughton: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families 
	(1)  what steps he is taking to increase awareness of childhood cancer among teachers in schools and education authorities; and if he will make a statement;
	(2)  what guidance is made available for schools to help them support children who have been diagnosed with cancer.

Sarah McCarthy-Fry: There is no legal duty on schools or their staff to support a pupil with medical needs or to administer or supervise the taking of medicines. However, schools are encouraged to develop policies on managing medicines and supporting pupils with medical needs.
	The Department has issued guidance to schools to help them support their pupils. Our guidance to schools, 'Managing Medicines in Schools and Early Years Settings', issued jointly with the Department of Health in 2005, gives advice to schools on how they can support pupils with medical needs. It also encourages schools to draw up, in consultation with parents and medical professionals, individual Health Care Plans for children with medical needs. We produced sister guidance in the same year, entitled 'Including me: managing complex health needs in schools and early years settings'.
	In addition, since September 2007, schools have a duty to promote the well-being of all pupils, including those with long term medical conditions. This duty defines well-being as the five outcomes of the Every Child Matters, including being healthy and staying safe.
	The Child Health Strategy, Better Health: Brighter Futures, published on 12 February, announced that we will be revising the guidance to schools on managing medicines which will include clear statements of expectations of those involved in supporting pupils with medical conditions, such as schools and PCTs. This work will be done in consultation with expert organisations and will be supported with an awareness raising campaign.

Children: Day Care

Fraser Kemp: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families how many childcare places there were in Houghton and Washington East constituency in  (a) 1997 and  (b) 2008.

Beverley Hughes: The information requested is not available by parliamentary constituency. The following tables show the number of child care places in Sunderland local authority for 1997 and 2008.
	
		
			  Table 1: Number( 1,2,3)  of day care places for children under eight years of age by type of provider, Sunderland local authority area, position at 31 March 1997 
			  Type of provider  Number 
			 Day nurseries 700 
			 Playgroups and pre-schools 500 
			 Childminders n/a 
			 Out of school clubs 300 
			 Holiday schemes 200 
			   
			 Total (4)1,700 
			 n/a = not available (1) Figures have been rounded to the nearest 10 if under 100, and to the nearest 100 if over 100. (2) Data Source: Children's Day Care Facilities Survey. (3) Figures may not add up to total due to rounding. (4) Figure excludes childminders. 
		
	
	
		
			  Table 2: Number( 1,2,3 ) of registered child care places for children under eight years of age by type of care, Sunderland local authority area, position at 31 March 2008 
			  Type of care  Number 
			 Full day care 2,800 
			 Sessional day care 100 
			 Childminders 1,300 
			 Out of school day care 1,700 
			 Crche day care 300 
			   
			 Total 6,200 
			 (1) Figures have been rounded to the nearest 10 if under 100, and to the nearest 100 if over 100. (2) Data Source: Ofsted. (3) Figures may not add up to total due to rounding. 
		
	
	Since 2003 Ofsted has been responsible for the registration and inspection of child care providers. Ofsted has produced figures on the numbers of registered child care providers and places on a quarterly basis from March 2003. Its latest figures were published in their report 'Registered Childcare Providers and Places, August 2008', which is available on its website
	www.Ofsted.gov.uk/

Children: Protection

Tim Loughton: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families when he expects the feasibility study on a revised integrated children's system to be completed.

Beverley Hughes: Lord Laming has recommended that the Department should complete such a study within six months of his progress report this month on the protection of children in England. The Government have accepted this recommendation, and we expect the feasibility study to be completed by the date Lord Laming has set. Our approach to the study will be informed by the advice of the Social Work Taskforce, which is due to report their view on the Integrated Children's System at the end of April.

Children: Protection

Tim Loughton: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families how many  (a) child assessment,  (b) care,  (c) supervision and  (d) emergency protection orders have been issued in each local authority area in each of the last five years.

Bridget Prentice: I have been asked to reply.
	Information at local authority level can be provided only at disproportionate cost. However, information is available for HM Courts Service (HMCS) administrative areas.
	These figures relate to the number of orders made counted on a 'per child' basis, meaning that where an order affects two children it will be counted twice. They cover all tiers of the family court system in England and Wales (High Court, county courts and family proceedings courts (FPCs)).
	Between 2004 and 2006, activity in the FPCs was reported on manual statistical returns. The figures were subject to an adjustment to take account of non-response to this data collection exercise. Figures for these years should be treated as estimates for this reason.
	The England and Wales totals may differ from those previously published in the annual Judicial and Court Statistics command paper due to updates made within the FamilyMan system used in the courts since publication.
	The number of child assessment orders are not shown at HMCS area level due to the very small numbers made each year. Annual totals for England and Wales are shown in the following table:
	
		
			   Number of  o rders 
			 2004 7 
			 2005 25 
			 2006 16 
			 2007 14 
			 2008 12 
		
	
	Figures for care orders, supervision orders and emergency protection orders are shown in the following tables:
	
		
			  Number of care orders made annually by HMCS area, 2004-08 
			  Area  2004  2005  2006  2007  2008 
			 Avon and Somerset 168 186 162 172 220 
			 Bedfordshire, Essex and Herts 404 403 379 336 308 
			 Birmingham, Coventry, Solihull and Warwickshire 327 326 358 298 290 
			 Black Country, Staffordshire and West Mercia 445 525 484 526 415 
			 Cambridgeshire, Norfolk and Suffolk 282 305 319 318 310 
			 Cheshire and Merseyside 353 480 458 521 431 
			 Cleveland, Durham and Northumbria 527 394 358 452 710 
			 Cumbria and Lancashire 399 454 311 408 280 
			 Derbyshire and Nottinghamshire 203 210 214 204 259 
			 Devon and Cornwall 243 188 158 200 204 
			 Dorset, Gloucestershire and Wiltshire 158 149 224 106 123 
			 Greater Manchester 657 570 651 706 553 
			 Hampshire and Isle of Wight 145 154 147 172 181 
			 Humber and South Yorkshire 312 426 441 431 355 
			 Kent 209 186 208 173 154 
			 Lincolnshire, Leicestershire and Rutland and Northamptonshire 157 164 175 184 199 
			 London 896 880 936 938 775 
			 Mid and West Wales 121 127 93 162 110 
			 North and West Yorkshire 554 438 456 577 544 
			 North Wales 110 86 81 139 168 
			 South East Wales 389 347 318 296 254 
			 Surrey and Sussex 287 266 261 273 227 
			 Thames Valley 245 163 167 159 140 
			 England and Wales 7,591 7,427 7,359 7,751 7,210 
		
	
	
		
			  Number of supervision orders made annually by HMCS area, 2004-08 
			  Area  2004  2005  2006  2007  2008 
			 Avon and Somerset 147 97 98 94 171 
			 Bedfordshire, Essex and Herts 156 135 167 137 190 
			 Birmingham, Coventry, Solihull and Warwickshire 156 137 172 130 138 
			 Black Country, Staffordshire and West Mercia 150 167 107 85 131 
			 Cambridgeshire, Norfolk and Suffolk 117 89 167 149 154 
			 Cheshire and Merseyside 63 101 85 103 152 
			 Cleveland, Durham and Northumbria 265 272 299 369 340 
			 Cumbria and Lancashire 66 53 82 82 86 
			 Derbyshire and Nottinghamshire 106 162 103 67 173 
			 Devon and Cornwall 65 112 97 96 110 
			 Dorset, Gloucestershire and Wiltshire 72 42 55 49 57 
			 Greater Manchester 162 123 153 125 138 
			 Hampshire and Isle of Wight 75 65 77 129 123 
			 Humber and South Yorkshire 230 231 330 257 274 
			 Kent 64 80 78 101 102 
			 Lincolnshire, Leicestershire and Rutland and Northamptonshire 98 74 94 69 83 
			 London 534 530 582 548 613 
			 Mid and West Wales (1) 13 26 14 7 
			 North and West Yorkshire 137 154 154 186 189 
			 North Wales (1) 6 11 35 44 
			 South East Wales 111 82 95 93 85 
			 Surrey and Sussex 133 146 127 139 143 
			 Thames Valley 96 57 135 72 135 
			 England and Wales 3,024 2,928 3,294 3,129 3,638 
			 (1)Numbers less than five are withheld in order to preserve the confidentiality of those involved in the cases. 
		
	
	
		
			  Number of emergency protection orders made annually by HMCS area, 2004-2008 
			  Area  2004  2005  2006  2007  2008 
			 Avon and Somerset 76 56 55 22 63 
			 Bedfordshire, Essex and Herts 108 109 69 51 45 
			 Birmingham, Coventry, Solihull and Warwickshire 132 135 49 30 27 
			 Black Country, Staffordshire and West Mercia 293 240 170 143 101 
			 Cambridgeshire, Norfolk and Suffolk 37 75 29 14 (1) 
			 Cheshire and Merseyside 79 47 24 25 46 
			 Cleveland, Durham and Northumbria 101 60 78 41 60 
			 Cumbria and Lancashire 110 90 33 35 20 
			 Derbyshire and Nottinghamshire 20 71 37 (1) 15 
			 Devon and Cornwall 60 82 37 29 35 
			 Dorset, Gloucestershire and Wiltshire 58 60 44 32 29 
			 Greater Manchester 198 117 56 66 99 
			 Hampshire and Isle of Wight 50 60 72 42 40 
			 Humber and South Yorkshire 120 75 80 21 48 
			 Kent 62 100 41 19 14 
			 Lincolnshire, Leicestershire and Rutland and Northamptonshire 6 10 (1) 15 16 
			 London 376 429 366 188 150 
			 Mid and West Wales 25 28 32 (1) (1) 
			 North and West Yorkshire 162 140 76 96 122 
			 North Wales 23 13 (1) (1) 13 
			 South East Wales 115 91 49 37 43 
			 Surrey and Sussex 89 83 54 39 42 
			 Thames Valley 62 55 48 16 63 
			 England and Wales 2,362 2,226 1,520 983 1,107 
			 (1) Numbers less than five are withheld in order to preserve the confidentiality of those involved in the cases.

Education: Assessments

Michael Gove: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families how many pupils in  (a) comprehensive and  (b) independent schools began studying for pre-U examinations in September 2008.

Jim Knight: holding answer 17 March 2009
	 The Department does not hold this information.

Educational Psychologists

Geoffrey Cox: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families what arrangements his Department has in place for the long-term training and funding of educational psychologists.

Sarah McCarthy-Fry: Educational psychologists (EPs) are local authority employees. It is for individual local authorities to determine, in the light of their assessment of needs and their own circumstances, the number of EPs required and their input in terms of training costs, placements, and eventual deployment.
	The Children's Workforce Development Council (CWDC) is working with interested parties in order to develop a long-term and sustainable, employer-led funding and training scheme, while administering the current training arrangements. In doing so, the CWDC will continue actively to seek the views and engagement of all key stakeholders, through its Educational Psychology National Forum, and carefully examine options for future funding while working with local authorities to secure their agreement to pay into the current subscription scheme.
	To assist this process, the CWDC has commissioned a workforce development model to support future planning. This will be used to help decide the number of training places needed nationally and regionally for the 2010/11 intake of students.
	Further research into the role of EPs in the children's workforce of the future is also being commissioned to inform planning.

Fast Track Teaching Programme

Anthony Steen: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families how many  (a) teachers responded to advertisements for the Fast Track Teaching programme and  (b) retention allowances were paid to teachers in each year since the programme's inception.

Jim Knight: The information is not available in the format requested. The programme received approximately eight times as many inquiries as the number of people accepted onto the programme.
	Recruitment/retention allowances were paid to the schools of all Fast Track Teachers (FTTs) recruited from 2000-05.
	
		
			   Non teachers recruited  Teachers recruited 
			 2001/02 90 23 
			 2002/03 117 34 
			 2003/04 308 218 
			 2004/05 431 351 
			 2005/06 432 114 
		
	
	From 2006/07 payments continued to the qualifying schools.
	
		
			   FTTs entitled to payments 
			 2006/07 1,032 
			 2007/08 1,273 
			 2008/09 967 
			  Notes: 1. Figures are approximate, as some teachers left the programme early. 2. Recruitment/retention allowance was not paid in the NQT year for FTTs who joined as non-teachers and completed their PGCE as part of the programme between 2000 and 2005.

Fast Track Teaching Programme

Anthony Steen: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families for what reasons the Fast Track Teaching programme has been terminated; and whether he plans to compensate financially those already participating in the programme.

Jim Knight: The Fast Track Teaching programme was designed in 2000 and since that time the educational context and the role of school leaders has changed significantly. There is now a greater need for provision which offers those with high potential for headship a personalised, accelerated route direct to the National Professional Qualification for Headship (NPQH). The Fast Track Teaching programme will be replaced with a new programme intended to meet better the needs of the system. The National College for School Leadership (NCSL) will continue to fund schools for the cost of the additional pay point awarded to eligible teachers who joined the Fast Track Teaching before September 2005. Fast Track teachers' basic salaries will not be affected by the programme coming to an end. From 1 September 2009, NCSL will no longer fund schools for the recruitment/retention allowance linked to participation in the programme.

Fast Track Teaching Programme

Anthony Steen: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families if he will take steps to ensure that Mr. Thomas Graham of Kingsbridge Community College receives his Fast Track Teaching programme retention allowance until 2010; and if he will make a statement.

Jim Knight: The National College for School Leadership (NCSL) will cease funding Mr. Graham's school for the retention allowance, once the programme closes, on 31 August 2009. It is for the school to decide whether it continues to pay Mr. Graham the allowance.
	In 2008, the Secretary of State accepted advice from the NCSL that the funding of schools for the cost of the allowances should cease when the programme closed.

Foundation Schools

Graham Stuart: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families under what circumstances the Secretary of State can intervene to order the closure of a foundation school; and if he will make a statement.

Sarah McCarthy-Fry: The Secretary of State may intervene to direct the closure of a foundation school only where Ofsted has placed the school in special measures. This direction must be following consultation with the local authority, the governing body of the school and the appropriate appointing body, the appropriate diocesan authority for a Church of England or Roman Catholic school or the person who appoints the foundation governors for other foundation schools. Where a school is not in special measures proposals for the closure of a foundation school would be brought forward and decided under local decision-making arrangements.

GCSEs: Chelmsford

Simon Burns: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families what percentage of pupils resident in West Chelmsford constituency achieved more than five A* to C grades at GCSE in each year since 1997.

Jim Knight: Information by pupil residence is only possible from 2002/03 onwards. The information shown in the table is for the last three years as a full time series going back to 2002/03 can be provided only at disproportionate cost.
	
		
			  Percentage of pupils( 1,2 ) resident in West Chelmsford constituency achieving more than five A*-C grades at GCSE and equivalents, 2005/06 to 2007/08( 3) 
			   Percentage 
			 2005/06 58.8 
			 2006/07 62.6 
			 2007/08 63.3 
			 (1) Pupils at the end of Key Stage 4. (2) Includes pupils attending maintained schools only. (3) Figures are based on final data in 2005/06 and 2006/07, and provisional data in 2007/08.  Source: National Pupil Database

Integrated Children's System

Tim Loughton: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families what criteria were used to determine the specifications for the Integrated Children's System; and who prepared the specifications.

Beverley Hughes: The Waterhouse report, published in February 2000, identified a number of shortcomings in children's social services, including the failure to record, retrieve and understand the significance of information about children. The Department of Health (DH) published the conceptual framework for the Integrated Children's System (ICS) as a consultation document in December 2002. It consisted of an integration of the Framework for the Assessment of Children in Need and their Families (issued under section 7 of the Local Authority Social Services Act 1970) and the Looking After Children guidance, to provide an assessment, planning, intervention and reviewing model for all children in need. The conceptual framework was used to develop a set of requirements for local authorities to procure systems from IT suppliers to support the delivery of the model.
	These requirements were subsequently specified in further detail by the Department, in response to a progress review of implementation by all local authorities in 2006. Each requirement was reviewed with reference to industry standard attributes intended to make it unambiguous, traceable, testable and measurable for compliance.
	The published requirements documents detail in full the statutory and regulatory sources of each requirement. An additional source of requirements includes new criteria requested in consultation by local authorities in 2008. These documents are obtainable from the following public sources.
	 Integrated Children's Sys tem Minimum Compliance Criteria
	www.everychildmatters.gov.uk/resources-and-practice/IG00189/
	 Integrated Children's SystemPhase 1B Business Requirements Specification
	www.everychildmatters.gov.uk/resources-and-practice/IG00228/
	 Integrated Children's System Phase1C Business Requirements Specification
	www.everychildmatters.gov.uk/ics/

Pregnant Women: Suicide

John Hemming: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families how many cases have been reported to his Department of pregnant women committing suicide as a consequence of stress caused by public family law interventions in the last 12 months.

Beverley Hughes: This information is not collected centrally.

Primary Education: Greater London

David Evennett: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families how much was spent per pupil in primary education in  (a) the London Borough of Bexley,  (b) the London Borough of Greenwich and  (c) the London Borough of Bromley in 2008-09.

Jim Knight: The available information on how much was spent per pupil in primary education in the London boroughs of Bexley, Greenwich and Bromley is for 2007-08 and this is shown in the following table. The information for 2008-09 is due to be submitted to the Department by 25 August 2009.
	
		
			   School based expenditure per pupil by local authority maintained primary schools ( per pupil) 
			 England 3,580 
			 Bexley 3,440 
			 Bromley 3,300 
			 Greenwich 4,440 
			  Notes: 1. School based expenditure includes only revenue expenditure incurred directly by the schools. This includes the pay of teachers and school-based support staff, school premises costs, books and equipment, and certain other supplies and services, less any capital items funded from recurrent spending and income from sales, fees and charges and rents and rates. This excludes the central cost of support services such as home to school transport, local authority administration and the financing of capital expenditure. 2. Pupil numbers include only those pupils attending local authority maintained primary schools and are drawn from the DCSF Schools Census adjusted to be on a financial year basis. 3. Figures are rounded to the nearest 10. 4. Cash terms figures as reported by local authorities as at 18 March 2008.

Primary Education: Per Capita Costs

Brian Jenkins: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families how much was spent per pupil in primary education in Staffordshire in 2008-09.

Jim Knight: The available information on how much was spent per pupil in primary education in Staffordshire is for 2007-08 and this is shown in the following table. The information for 2008-09 is due to be submitted to the Department by 25 August 2009.
	
		
			   School based expenditure per pupil by local authority maintained primary schools ( per pupil) 
			 England 3,580 
			 Staffordshire LA 3,270 
			  Notes: 1. School based expenditure includes only revenue expenditure incurred directly by the schools. This includes the pay of teachers and school-based support staff, school premises costs, books and equipment, and certain other supplies and services, less any capital items funded from recurrent spending and income from sales, fees and charges and rents and rates. This excludes the central cost of support services such as home to school transport, local authority administration and the financing of capital expenditure. 2. Pupil numbers include only those pupils attending local authority maintained primary schools and are drawn from the DCSF Schools Census adjusted to be on a financial year basis. 3. Figures are rounded to the nearest 10. 4. Cash terms figures as reported by local authorities as at 18 March 2008.

Pupils: Health

Jim Cunningham: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families what guidance is made available for schools to support children who have been diagnosed with a health condition.

Sarah McCarthy-Fry: Schools are encouraged to develop policies on managing medicines and supporting pupils with medical needs.
	The Department has issued guidance to schools to help them support their pupils. Our guidance to schools, 'Managing Medicines in Schools and Early Years Settings', issued jointly with the Department of Health in 2005, gives advice to schools on how they can support pupils with medical needs. It encourages schools to draw up, in consultation with parents and medical professionals, individual Health Care Plans for children with medical needs. Sister guidance was published in the same year, entitled 'Including me: managing complex health needs in schools and early years settings'.
	Since September 2007, schools have a duty to promote the well-being of all pupils, including those with long term medical conditions. This duty defines well-being as the five outcomes of the Every Child Matters, including being healthy and staying safe.
	The Child Health Strategy, Better Health: Brighter Futures, published on 12 February, announced that the Department will be revising the guidance to schools on managing medicines which will include clear statements of expectations of those involved in supporting pupils with medical conditions, such as schools and primary care trusts. It is our intention that this work will be done in consultation with expert organisations and will be supported with an awareness raising campaign.

Parents: Hearing Impaired

Annette Brooke: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families 
	(1)  what support is available from his Department to deaf parents and their families;
	(2)  what support is available from his Department to encourage deaf parents to participate in their children's education;
	(3)  what recent assessment he has made of his Department's performance against the requirements of the Disability Discrimination Act 1995 in respect of deaf parents and the education of their children.

Beverley Hughes: The Government acknowledge the difficulties disabled parents, including deaf parents, face. The most recent assessment made by the Secretary of State on the Department for Children, Schools and Families' report on progress towards disability equality under the Disability Discrimination Act 1995, was published in December 2008. It describes both what is happening within the DCSF to promote disability equality and what the entire sector is doing and how we are working together to achieve this.
	In December 2008 DCSF published its first Secretary of State report on progress towards disability equality across the children's and education sector. Although there is no specific reference to deafness, or indeed other impairments with the exception of learning difficulties, this impairment is part of this report in as much as it is about disability and this of course comes within that definition.
	In 2006 we asked each local authority to develop a parenting strategy within their children and young people's planthese set out how the authority and its partners will make sure that parents get the services they need, including parents with disabilities. Most local authorities have developed strategies and have now moved into implementation.
	To further support successful implementation of these strategies our parenting implementation project is working with 18 local authorities to test and develop new and innovative approaches to effective delivery of support services to parents and families. One of the project's work streams is considering the needs of parents with disabilities. The learning from the project will be shared with all local authorities in summer 2009.
	We will continue to engage with stakeholders, including examining wider research relating to disabled parents' involvement in their children's education, to identify barriers to their effective engagement.
	The Secretary of State's report on disability equality can be found at the Department's website:
	http://www.dcsf.gov.uk/des/sosreport.shtml.
	DCSF's Single Equality Scheme can be found at:
	http://www.dcsf.gov.uk/publications/des/docs/single_equalityscheme.doc.
	With regard to services for parents, our Parent Know How Programme provides funding to a range of third sector partners to provide information and advice services for all parents. Within this ParentlinePlus provides a confidential textphone service for parents and carers who are deaf, hard of hearing or have speech impairment. It is available on 0800 783 6783 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. As part of the ParentCast project we are preparing two videos targeted specifically at deaf parentsboth are in British sign language (with an option for subtitles in English) which emphasise the need for deaf parents to have access to the same services as all other parents. The first video is about how two deaf parents got engaged in school activities and the second promotes the use of extended schools to deaf parents.
	We encourage schools to use a range of ways to enhance the partnership with parents and carers, including advising schools to find out from parents what they would find helpful and what would encourage them to come into the school and participate at parents' evenings.
	The Children's Plan, 2007, highlighted a partnership with parents as a 'unifying theme' across the whole plan and promised action on three fronts:
	an enhanced dialogue between the school and parents;
	parental involvement in school governance;
	and an expansion of family learning opportunities.
	We have promoted parental engagement in learning in other waysfor example, through encouraging parents and children to read together by providing free books to all families with young children through Bookstart, by improving access to information through Parent Know How, and by putting parent support advisers in place in many schools.
	These measures have made a difference. Evidence shows that mothers and fathers now feel more involved in their child's school lifeup from 29 per cent. in 2001 to 51 per cent. in 2007and have an increasing appetite for involvement. But these figures also show that more can be done to bring parents centre stage in their child's learning.
	To drive this forward, we proposed in The Children's Plan: Progress Report, published in December 2008, an approach which both empowers parents to engage and places parental engagement more centrally in the school and early years system. We made it clear that we will issue guidance to schools on working in partnership with parents and that that this guidance will cover how schools work with disabled, including deaf, parents.

Schools: Closures

Michael Gove: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families pursuant to the answer of 4 March 2009,  Official Report, column 1685W, on schools: closures, which schools have closed; in which year each closed; and in which local authority area each was located.

Jim Knight: The following table sets out which schools have closed in each year since 2000, and the local authority area in which the schools are located.
	
		
			  Rural school closures since 2000 
			  Local authority  School name 
			  2000  
			 Lancashire Gisburn Forest Tosside Parochial VC School 
			 Leicestershire Tilton CE Primary School 
			   
			  2001  
			 Rutland Ferrers Primary School 
			   
			  2002  
			 East Riding of Yorkshire Beverley Walkergate Infant School 
			 Herefordshire Wormbridge C of E Primary School 
			 Shropshire Chelmarsh C of E Primary School 
			 Warrington St. Oliver Plunkett Catholic Primary School 
			 York, City of Oaken Grove Primary School 
			   
			  2003  
			 Bedfordshire Colmworth C of E VC Lower SchoolBedfordshire 
			 Cheshire Neston St. Mary's 
			 East Riding of Yorkshire Bewholme Primary School 
			 Northumberland Kirknewton CE VA First School 
			 Nottinghamshire Rufford Community Comprehensive School 
			 Worcestershire Pensax C of E Primary School 
			   
			  2004  
			 Cheshire Ashley CE Primary School 
			 Cornwall Tresillian Infant School 
			 Cumbria St. Cuthbert's CE (VC) Primary School 
			 Cumbria Lowick C of E School 
			 Durham Haswell Primary School 
			 East Riding of Yorkshire Withernwick Primary School 
			 Lincolnshire Goodfellow's C of E Primary School 
			 Suffolk Gazeley CE VC Primary School 
			 Wiltshire St. Mary's C of E Primary School 
			 Wiltshire Nadder Middle School 
			 Wiltshire Leigh C of E Primary School 
			   
			  2005  
			 Cumbria Bampton Endowed (VA) Primary School 
			 Herefordshire St. Mary's of Hope C of E Primary School 
			 Lincolnshire North Kyme Primary School 
			 Northamptonshire Barnwell CE (A) Primary School 
			 Northumberland Byrness First School 
			 Northumberland Lowgate First School 
			 Northumberland Horncliffe First School 
			 Wiltshire Wilton CE Middle School 
			 Wiltshire Farley All Saints Church of England VA School 
			 Wiltshire Maud Heath County Primary School 
			  2006  
			 Cheshire Buerton Primary School 
			 Cumbria Satterthwaite and Rusland CE (VC) Primary 
			 Kent Doddington Primary School 
			 Lincolnshire St. Luke's Church of England Primary School 
			 Norfolk The Douglas Bader School, RAF Coltishall 
			 North Yorkshire Womersley Church of England VC Primary School 
			 Somerset Northmoor Green Community Primary School 
			 Staffordshire St. Mildred's CE (VA) Primary School 
			 Staffordshire St. John the Baptist (VA) Catholic Primary School 
			 Wiltshire Redlynch Church of England VA Primary School 
			   
			  2007  
			 Cornwall Lanreath C of E VC Primary School 
			 Devon Chawleigh Primary School 
			 Gloucestershire Twigworth Church of England Primary School 
			 Herefordshire Brilley Church of England Primary School 
			 Kent The Ripple School 
			 Kent Hothfield Village Primary School 
			 Kent Detling C of E Primary School 
			 Lincolnshire Rippingale Church of England Primary School 
			 North Yorkshire Sutton-under-Whitestonecliffe C of E VC Primary School 
			 North Yorkshire Langcliffe Community Primary School 
			 Nottinghamshire Colston Bassett Primary School 
			 Staffordshire Our Lady's Catholic Primary School 
			 Wiltshire Avebury C of E Primary School 
			 Wiltshire Corsley C of E Primary School 
			   
			  2008  
			 Bolton Scot Lane End C of E Primary School 
			 Cheshire Harthill Primary School 
			 Cheshire Dunham Hill Primary School 
			 Cumbria Lochinvar Community Secondary School 
			 Derbyshire Apperknowle Community Primary School 
			 Durham Hamsteels Primary School 
			 Gloucestershire Joys Green Primary School 
			 Kent Dunkirk Village School 
			 North Yorkshire Low Bentham Community Primary School 
			 Northumberland Chatton Church of England First School 
			 Nottinghamshire Besthorpe Primary School 
			 Shropshire Childs Ercall C of E Primary School 
			 Suffolk Cookley and Walpole C of E VC Primary School 
		
	
	The tables show closures where the schools ceased to be maintained and were not replaced. There are other circumstances involving school closure which have been excluded from the table because replacement provision was established, for example in the case of a change to a school's religious character or an amalgamation of an infant and junior school to form a primary school.
	Figures given in an earlier response differ slightly to those given in the following tables. Some double counting of secondary school closures meant a higher number of closures were previously recorded.

Schools: Standards

David Drew: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families if he will take steps to ensure that primary schools which are rebuilt incorporate the same design standards as secondary schools in the Building Schools for the Future programme in respect of  (a) drinking water and  (b) toilet facilities.

Jim Knight: The Department has already taken a number of steps to ensure that new and re-modelled primary school buildingsincluding drinking water and toilet facilitiesare built to a good design standard. This includes using the Primary Capital Programme website to promote the Department's existing guidance and to showcase case study examples of good practice.
	The Department is aware of the importance of well designed primary school toilets and is continuing to work with its partners to produce case study examples on this. It would not, however, be appropriate for primary school toilets to be built to exactly the same design standards as secondary school toilets.

Schools: Standards

David Drew: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families if he will make it his policy to encourage secondary schools not participating in the Building Schools for the Future programme to allocate funds for improving  (a) drinking water and  (b) toilet facilities for pupils.

Jim Knight: Devolved Formula Capital (DFC) is allocated at school level, to be spent on whichever capital improvement a school considers to be the most beneficial, based on local priorities. Other funds can also be added to DFC, from the local authority and elsewhere, to improve facilities. The purposes for which DFC is used vary widely, from improving drinking water and toilet facilities, to other infrastructure improvement, ICT, sports facilities, even transport such as a school minibus.
	Given the wide variety of need, I think it best to continue to allow schools and local authorities discretion in deciding how resources are spent, rather than to steer schools towards expenditure on improving specific facilities such as  (a) drinking water or  (b) toilet facilities for pupils.

Social Workers: Children

Tim Loughton: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families when he plans to introduce a children's social work postgraduate qualification for experienced children's social workers.

Beverley Hughes: Lord Laming's report recommends the introduction of a fully-funded, practice-focused children's social work postgraduate qualification for experienced children's social workers. The Government are committed to ensuring social work is a high quality, high status profession committed to excellent practice and respected by clients and the wider public. We agree with Lord Laming that social work should become a Masters-level profession. We expect this to be an important element of the long-term and comprehensive reform programme for social work which will be informed by the advice of the Social Work Task Force and which we will set out in the autumn.
	In immediate response to Lord Laming's recommendations, we have asked the General Social Care Council (GSCC) and the Children's Workforce Development Council (CWDC) to work together to define and consult on the content and implementation of a practice-based Masters for qualified children and families social workers.
	This work builds on our current investment of over 73 million to improve the quality of social worker training, tackle recruitment and retention shortages and to improve the quality of practice and leadership.

Teachers: Males

Tim Loughton: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families with reference to his letter of correction of 4 December 2008 to the hon. Member for East Worthing and Shoreham, Deposited Paper DEP2008-2997, to the answer of 28 October 2008,  Official Report, column 596W, on teachers: males, what the 2008 figures are, broken down by local authority area.

Jim Knight: The following table provides the full-time qualified number of male teachers employed in local authority maintained nursery/primary and secondary schools broken down by individual local authorities in England, January 2008.
	
		
			  Full-time qualified males in local authority maintained nursery/primary and secondary schools: January 2008Coverage: Local authorities in England 
			   Nursery/primary  Secondary( 1) 
			 England 25,180 78,750 
			 City of London   
			 Camden 70 220 
			 Greenwich 130 360 
			 Hackney 170 130 
			 Hammersmith and Fulham 60 160 
			 Islington 120 240 
			 Kensington and Chelsea 40 80 
			 Lambeth 140 230 
			 Lewisham 150 230 
			 Southwark 200 180 
			 Tower Hamlets 180 470 
			 Wandsworth 110 270 
			 Westminster 80 180 
			 Barking and Dagenham 120 370 
			 Barnet 150 480 
			 Bexley 90 470 
			 Brent 160 450 
			 Bromley 130 550 
			 Croydon 130 410 
			 Ealing 150 350 
			 Enfield 160 580 
			 Haringey 150 340 
			 Harrow 90 200 
			 Havering 120 380 
			 Hillingdon 140 400 
			 Hounslow 90 390 
			 Kingston upon Thames 50 230 
			 Merton 80 160 
			 Newham 240 460 
			 Redbridge 130 540 
			 Richmond upon Thames 80 140 
			 Sutton 60 390 
			 Waltham Forest 130 340 
			 Birmingham 680 1,810 
			 Coventry 140 500 
			 Dudley 180 490 
			 Sandwell 180 450 
			 Solihull 130 320 
			 Walsall 160 520 
			 Wolverhampton 160 440 
			 Knowsley 90 250 
			 Liverpool 250 780 
			 St. Helens 110 280 
			 Sefton 130 470 
			 Wirral 160 630 
			 Bolton 150 460 
			 Bury 120 270 
			 Manchester 260 510 
			 Oldham 130 440 
			 Rochdale 110 350 
			 Salford 110 290 
			 Stockport 120 330 
			 Tameside 110 390 
			 Trafford 110 370 
			 Wigan 150 500 
			 Barnsley 120 340 
			 Doncaster 150 520 
			 Rotherham 130 570 
			 Sheffield 270 730 
			 Bradford 310 850 
			 Calderdale 140 380 
			 Kirklees 200 650 
			 Leeds 380 1,130 
			 Wakefield 180 540 
			 Gateshead 110 310 
			 Newcastle upon Tyne 120 440 
			 North Tyneside 90 350 
			 South Tyneside 80 280 
			 Sunderland 140 520 
			 Isles of Scilly 10  
			 Bath and North East Somerset 100 300 
			 Bristol, City of 240 330 
			 North Somerset 90 330 
			 South Gloucestershire 150 450 
			 Hartlepool 60 170 
			 Middlesbrough 80 150 
			 Redcar and Cleveland 60 260 
			 Stockton-on-Tees 100 330 
			 Kingston Upon Hull, City of 150 370 
			 East Riding of Yorkshire 150 550 
			 North East Lincolnshire 90 200 
			 North Lincolnshire 60 250 
			 North Yorkshire 290 1,070 
			 York 100 240 
			 Bedfordshire 70 720 
			 Luton 100 240 
			 Buckinghamshire 200 710 
			 Milton Keynes 110 370 
			 Derbyshire 370 1,210 
			 Derby 120 410 
			 Dorset 170 720 
			 Poole 70 240 
			 Bournemouth 70 240 
			 Durham 240 830 
			 Darlington 50 130 
			 East Sussex 220 710 
			 Brighton and Hove 130 350 
			 Hampshire 570 1,580 
			 Portsmouth 80 200 
			 Southampton 100 280 
			 Leicestershire 290 990 
			 Leicester 150 420 
			 Rutland 10 50 
			 Staffordshire 370 1,460 
			 Stoke-on-Trent 120 360 
			 Wiltshire 220 710 
			 Swindon 80 240 
			 Bracknell Forest 40 130 
			 Windsor and Maidenhead 30 210 
			 West Berkshire 50 300 
			 Reading 50 120 
			 Slough 60 210 
			 Wokingham 60 240 
			 Cambridgeshire 240 730 
			 Peterborough 90 260 
			 Cheshire 340 1,060 
			 Halton 70 200 
			 Warrington 100 330 
			 Devon 440 1,080 
			 Plymouth 160 460 
			 Torbay 70 250 
			 Essex 570 2,150 
			 Southend-on-Sea 90 310 
			 Thurrock 60 170 
			 Herefordshire 100 260 
			 Worcestershire 240 890 
			 Kent 680 2,230 
			 Medway 110 480 
			 Lancashire 620 1,800 
			 Blackburn with Darwen 90 240 
			 Blackpool 80 190 
			 Nottinghamshire 450 1,390 
			 Nottingham 150 360 
			 Shropshire 130 410 
			 Telford and Wrekin 70 240 
			 Cornwall 340 850 
			 Cumbria 260 910 
			 Gloucestershire 310 1,000 
			 Hertfordshire 390 1,900 
			 Isle of Wight 40 270 
			 Lincolnshire 370 1,240 
			 Norfolk 490 1,250 
			 Northamptonshire 320 1,010 
			 Northumberland 60 620 
			 Oxfordshire 240 780 
			 Somerset 260 780 
			 Suffolk 240 1,270 
			 Surrey 340 1,320 
			 Warwickshire 210 760 
			 West Sussex 380 1,050 
			 School Census   
			 (1) Excludes academies. Figures are rounded to the nearest 10.  nil or negligible  Source: School Census

Teachers: Males

Tim Loughton: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families with reference to his letter of correction of 4 December 2008 to the hon. Member for East Worthing and Shoreham, Deposited Paper DEP2008-2997, to the Answer of 28 October 2008,  Official Report, column 596W, on teachers: males, what the 2008 figures are, broken down by decile of income deprivation affecting children indices.

Jim Knight: The following table shows the number of qualified full-time male teachers in local authority maintained nursery/primary and secondary schools broken down by decile of income deprivation affecting children indices (IDACI) in 2008.
	
		
			  Qualified full-time male teachers in local authority maintained nursery/primary and secondary schools broken down by decile of income deprivation affecting children indices(ADACI)Year: 2008 Coverage: England 
			  Deciles of rank of deprivation  Nursery/primary  Secondary 
			 0-10 per cent. (most deprived) 3,260 5,680 
			 10-20 per cent. 2,650 5,840 
			 20-30 per cent. 2,600 8,180 
			 30-40 per cent. 2,520 7,830 
			 40-50 per cent. 2,490 9,540 
			 50-60 per cent. 2,510 7,500 
			 60-70 per cent. 2,350 9,250 
			 70-80 per cent. 2,450 8,300 
			 80-90 per cent. 2,310 8,400 
			 90-100 per cent. (least deprived) 2,030 8,230 
			 Total 25,180 78,750 
			  Note: Figures are rounded to the nearest 10.  Source: School Census and Department for Communities and Local Government (DCLG)

Teachers: Postgraduate Education

David Laws: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families what provision for financial assistance is planned for schools to provide teaching cover for teachers who are studying for the new MA in Teaching and Learning; and if he will make a statement.

Jim Knight: The Government have made 30 million available in 2008-11 for the initial rollout of the Masters in Teaching and Learning (MTL), and up to an additional 25 million will be made available to fund MTL for teachers in National Challenge schools in 2009-11. The funding will pay for teaching cover for teachers participating in the programme and their in-school coaches. It will also pay for the development of the programme; higher education institutions' ongoing costs; for the training of in-school coaches; and for the time of tutors from higher education institutions to support teachers in their learning. Funding for schools will be ring-fenced.

Teachers: Postgraduate Education

David Laws: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families how many teachers he expects to enrol on courses for the MA in Teaching and Learning in  (a) September 2009 and  (b) January 2010; and if he will make a statement.

Jim Knight: The Masters in Teaching and Learning (MTL) will be available to all Newly Qualified Teachers (NQTs) taking up post in schools in the North West region from September 2009, and to NQTs in National Challenge Schools, and in secondary schools where 30 per cent. or more of pupils are eligible for Free School Meals and where the leadership is rated good or better by Ofsted, from January 2010. We will only know how many NQTs are entitled to take up the MTL, and how many choose to do so, when they take up posts in schools from September 2009. However, we estimate that at least 4,000 NQTs could take up the offer of the MTL in 2009/10.

Teachers: Postgraduate Education

David Laws: To ask the Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families how much time he expects newly-qualified teachers enrolled on the new MA in Teaching and Learning to spend outside the classroom as part of their course; and if he will make a statement.

Jim Knight: The Masters in Teaching and Learning (MTL) programme is currently being developed by MTL providers, which are schools and higher education institutions working together, and the Training and Development Agency for Schools. One of the aims is to develop a flexible programme, which can be personalised to meet each teacher's learning needs, reflecting the role being undertaken by that teacher. It is therefore not possible to provide details of time commitments for individual teachers at this stage. It is important to remember that, although teachers may need to undertake some study in their own time, the programme will be practice-based, with learning centred around what is happening in the classroom.

DUCHY OF LANCASTER

Departmental Correspondence

Andrew Turner: To ask the Chancellor of the Duchy of Lancaster how many letters from hon. Members were received by  (a) the Prime Minister's Office and  (b) the Cabinet Office in (i) January and (ii) February 2009; and how many letters from hon. Members received in 2008 were responded to (A) in less than two weeks, (B) in between two weeks and one month, (C) in between one and two months and (D) in over two months.

Tom Watson: The Cabinet Office, on an annual basis, publishes a report to Parliament on the performance of Departments in replying to Members' correspondence. The report for 2008 will be published shortly.

Departmental Disciplinary Proceedings

David Simpson: To ask the Chancellor of the Duchy of Lancaster 
	(1)  how many staff in the Cabinet Office  (a) were disciplined and  (b) had their employment terminated as a result of a poor sickness record in each of the last 12 months;
	(2)  how many staff in the Prime Minister's Office  (a) were disciplined and  (b) had their employment terminated as a result of a poor sickness record in each of the last 12 months.

Tom Watson: Data regarding sickness absence at the Cabinet Office, including the Prime Minister's Office are published on the Cabinet Office website.
	This information has been placed in the Library of the House.

Disclosure of Information: Mass Media

Peter Bone: To ask the Chancellor of the Duchy of Lancaster how many leaks of Government information to the media the Cabinet Office has investigated in the last year.

Tom Watson: The Cabinet Office, on behalf of the Cabinet Secretary as Head of the Home Civil Service and as Chair of the Official Committee on Security, has responsibility for co-ordinating security matters across Government. Each Department is obliged to inform the Cabinet Office when leak investigations are instigated. It is for departmental permanent secretaries to take decisions on whether leak investigations into the unauthorised disclosure of information originating in their Departments should be carried out.
	The Cabinet Office has undertaken no leak investigations in the last year. In its role co-ordinating security matters, the Cabinet Office has provided advice and assistance to other Government Departments on inquiries and policy.

Government Departments: Data Protection

Philip Hollobone: To ask the Chancellor of the Duchy of Lancaster what assistance his Department has given to other Departments in the investigation of unauthorised disclosures of information in the last 12 months.

Tom Watson: In the last 12 months, the Cabinet Office has provided advice and assistance to a number of Government Departments on matters relating to policy and practice concerning the investigation of unauthorised disclosures of information, as well as making investigators available from the central list that we manage.

Infant Mortality

Derek Twigg: To ask the Chancellor of the Duchy of Lancaster how many children under the age of one year died in each year since 1997, broken down by primary care trust.

Kevin Brennan: The information requested falls within the responsibility of the UK Statistics Authority. I have asked the authority to reply.
	 Letter from Karen Dunnell, dated March 2009:
	As National Statistician, I have been asked to reply to your recent question asking how many children under the age of one year have died in each year since 1997, broken down by primary care trust. (263660)
	The table attached provides the number of deaths of children aged under one year, in each primary care organisation in England, from 1997 to 2007 (the latest figures available).
	
		
			  Table 1. Number of deaths of children aged under one year, primary care organisations in England( 1,2) ,1997 to 2007( 3) 
			  Deaths 
			  Area  1997  1998  1999  2000  2001  2002  2003  2004  2005  2006  2007 
			  England 3,591 3,371 3,379 3,203 3,063 3,002 3,145 3,069 3,078 3,192 3,127 
			 
			  North East SHA 170 145 152 172 145 131 126 136 126 158 139 
			 County Durham 32 27 37 34 33 25 21 25 31 33 23 
			 Darlington 2 8 9 5 7 4 5 6 7 13 6 
			 Gateshead 14 10 16 11 7 7 12 7 13 16 13 
			 Hartlepool 8 7 6 6 7 5 6 6 2 10 12 
			 Middlesbrough 10 12 8 9 14 14 10 8 15 7 8 
			 Newcastle 13 16 10 20 12 16 13 18 14 11 9 
			 North Tees 15 10 8 16 14 8 8 15 7 14 10 
			 North Tyneside 15 10 8 12 8 12 8 8 7 8 8 
			 Northumberland 21 13 25 18 10 13 9 6 10 8 23 
			 Redcar and Cleveland 7 8 4 8 8 4 9 11 7 12 5 
			 South Tyneside 10 6 5 10 12 6 5 5 7 11 7 
			 Sunderland Teaching 23 18 16 23 13 17 20 21 6 15 15 
			 
			  North West SHA 563 498 525 476 442 405 462 435 474 470 433 
			 Ashton, Leigh and Wigan 23 15 22 22 20 15 19 13 16 25 17 
			 Blackburn with Darwen 21 20 14 20 14 15 14 9 19 13 17 
			 Blackpool 16 8 12 9 9 5 11 7 9 18 12 
			 Bolton 20 22 23 16 16 21 20 20 24 27 18 
			 Bury 11 12 9 20 6 10 8 13 9 11 10 
			 Central and Eastern Cheshire 24 18 29 22 20 29 17 23 20 16 14 
			 Central Lancashire 32 38 35 30 27 26 31 30 28 31 26 
			 Cumbria 33 28 27 16 22 13 28 23 21 23 22 
			 East Lancashire 42 24 34 38 38 18 37 31 34 28 29 
			 Halton and St. Helens 34 26 22 25 19 18 22 23 26 30 25 
			 Heywood, Middleton and Rochdale 25 13 29 16 18 17 20 14 15 17 18 
			 Knowsley 17 15 11 12 13 8 7 10 10 5 9 
			 Liverpool 41 38 34 37 31 30 27 28 44 32 30 
			 Manchester 51 41 52 51 51 52 41 54 48 36 55 
			 North Lancashire 17 17 18 16 17 15 15 13 18 20 12 
			 Oldham 22 24 22 25 16 25 22 26 17 23 18 
			 Salford 18 21 9 13 18 15 15 15 15 17 19 
			 Sefton 20 21 26 10 9 16 11 7 19 14 7 
			 Stockport 23 16 19 12 21 8 20 18 18 8 14 
			 Tameside and Glossop 15 15 15 15 15 12 18 10 9 20 8 
			 Trafford 18 14 16 14 12 9 10 6 9 13 13 
			 Warrington 12 11 13 11 8 11 16 11 12 11 10 
			 Western Cheshire 12 14 12 4 10 10 16 15 13 20 15 
			 Wirral 18 29 23 25 14 9 18 16 21 15 15 
			 
			  Yorkshire and the Humber SHA 393 410 359 407 324 345 337 334 372 360 362 
			 Barnsley 13 22 10 22 12 9 13 16 10 16 10 
			 Bradford and Airedale 54 64 59 72 63 68 68 41 69 62 73 
			 Calderdale 18 22 20 16 13 13 16 17 16 12 15 
			 Doncaster 29 26 21 18 16 22 17 18 27 26 23 
			 East Riding of Yorkshire 14 18 18 8 16 16 13 15 11 8 9 
			 Hull 29 26 16 19 15 11 17 15 14 24 12 
			 Kirklees 40 29 35 33 35 46 42 40 37 39 35 
			 Leeds 52 64 50 57 40 41 48 45 59 53 49 
			 North East Lincolnshire Care Trust Plus 9 11 10 12 14 14 8 4 10 10 17 
			 North Lincolnshire 12 10 8 16 10 7 7 11 13 10 5 
			 North Yorkshire and York 41 .39 36 45 21 21 18 30 39 31 32 
			 Rotherham 24 24 19 13 14 11 20 25 16 14 19 
			 Sheffield 34 33 41 42 34 48 34 34 30 39 46 
			 Wakefield District 22 22 16 33 21 18 16 23 21 16 17 
			 
			  East Midlands SHA 277 267 288 251 221 252 278 248 229 276 276 
			 Bassetlaw 13 6 6 8 11 5 4 10 5 7 7 
			 Derby City 22 19 20 18 20 17 18 15 14 10 24 
			 Derbyshire County 33 44 41 36 26 37 35 45 29 32 30 
			 Leicester City 25 34 35 31 26 23 32 27 24 36 41 
			 Leicestershire County and Rutland 36 30 42 22 29 23 37 15 38 40 31 
			 Lincolnshire 47 40 41 29 24 39 45 39 31 36 41 
			 Northamptonshire 43 39 49 38 25 38 49 47 32 46 38 
			 Nottingham City 26 25 24 24 31 33 32 21 28 34 26 
			 Nottinghamshire County 32 28 29 43 27 35 25 28 28 32 38 
			 
			  West Midlands SHA 472 418 440 427 390 399 463 445 425 432 415 
			 Birmingham East and North 50 46 52 45 56 54 68 52 49 59 59 
			 Coventry Teaching 30 35 28 24 26 31 27 35 17 17 23 
			 Dudley 24 20 32 16 13 12 14 12 24 23 13 
			 Heart of Birmingham Teaching 54 43 38 52 50 65 67 56 48 52 51 
			 Herefordshire 8 10 8 1 4 6 4 9 12 7 5 
			 North Staffordshire 7 10 15 13 10 6 10 11 8 5 17 
			 Sandwell 31 34 25 29 25 32 32 28 32 37 33 
			 Shropshire County 16 16 7 13 12 17 18 10 11 13 12 
			 Solihull 12 6 11 13 10 8 5 8 9 12 9 
			 South Birmingham 24 29 29 32 20 27 34 26 27 42 19 
			 South Staffordshire 40 24 42 42 33 29 50 31 37 40 45 
			 Stoke on Trent 28 21 26 28 21 32 23 31 30 23 20 
			 Telford and Wrekin 14 16 11 16 16 6 10 11 9 13 5 
			 Walsall Teaching 36 26 29 17 19 18 19 31 35 23 30 
			 Warwickshire 30 35 28 27 24 13 27 35 23 19 25 
			 Wolverhampton City 29 16 27 27 26 18 27 26 20 22 17 
			 Worcestershire 39 31 32 32 25 25 28 33 34 25 32 
			 
			  East of England SHA 310 325 291 268 273 266 280 271 260 273 299 
			 Bedfordshire 21 18 24 17 25 17 23 21 22 18 17 
			 Cambridgeshire 46 30 27 22 30 24 29 26 25 28 26 
			 East and North Hertfordshire 29 24 25 32 23 30 22 21 26 23 27 
			 Great Yarmouth and Waveney 12 11 12 9 11 8 9 8 6 5 10 
			 Luton 23 20 25 27 18 24 12 20 18 22 20 
			 Mid Essex 26 15 23 16 15 15 15 15 13 15 27 
			 Norfolk 41 48 31 24 25 28 31 31 35 41 38 
			 North East Essex 12 19 16 9 14 14 11 15 15 14 17 
			 Peterborough 14 12 13 11 14 12 19 7 17 17 12 
			 South East Essex 4 21 12 12 10 12 16 14 12 16 14 
			 South West Essex 19 21 18 24 19 29 21 20 15 25 24 
			 Suffolk 19 34 29 29 23 14 28 38 20 20 34 
			 West Essex 16 15 13 14 12 18 20 10 11 12 12 
			 West Hertfordshire 28 37 23 22 34 21 24 25 25 17 21 
			 
			  London SHA 615 624 636 570 633 594 600 588 587 593 571 
			 Barking and Dagenham 18 14 18 8 8 11 13 18 11 15 16 
			 Barnet 22 23 25 14 12 19 17 15 32 14 17 
			 Bexley 5 11 10 10 15 9 16 14 13 12 10 
			 Brent Teaching 24 22 34 27 35 44 21 20 22 31 23 
			 Bromley 19 16 13 16 11 14 17 18 10 13 10 
			 Camden 10 12 20 11 17 18 13 20 14 11 11 
			 City and Hackney Teaching 45 22 35 27 33 36 32 15 24 20 29 
			 Croydon 29 32 36 40 20 31 20 20 37 30 26 
			 Ealing 20 15 23 23 26 33 19 17 21 23 15 
			 Enfield 25 17 22 20 20 13 33 23 30 33 30 
			 Greenwich Teaching 16 25 16 16 22 25 21 25 15 20 24 
			 Hammersmith and Fulham 14 15 15 13 12 12 13 9 10 12 7 
			 Haringey Teaching 17 21 25 29 29 20 36 30 31 26 18 
			 Harrow 12 24 22 16 11 12 16 17 28 14 14 
			 Havering 12 16 8 9 7 15 6 10 5 14 9 
			 Hillingdon 15 26 11 12 21 14 10 12 14 15 26 
			 Hounslow 19 14 17 16 29 4 17 20 23 12 20 
			 Islington 7 11 22 17 13 13 21 19 16 13 14 
			 Kensington and Chelsea 14 15 8 10 12 10 7 4 8 3 8 
			 Kingston 2 8 7 4 7 5 4 11 6 7 5 
			 Lambeth 36 25 35 29 30 33 34 27 29 28 25 
			 Lewisham 30 45 25 27 31 20 20 17 22 22 18 
			 Newham 41 38 32 33 33 37 39 45 24 40 37 
			 Redbridge 17 12 15 19 23 18 18 20 15 22 26 
			 Richmond and Twickenham 12 8 5 8 11 11 8 5 8 5 8 
			 Southwark 40 31 29 25 39 30 42 33 19 32 41 
			 Sutton and Merton 27 20 21 15 22 19 25 27 23 27 19 
			 Tower Hamlets 18 26 23 19 17 24 20 16 17 17 21 
			 Waltham Forest 18 23 32 24 32 19 18 31 18 29 20 
			 Wandsworth 13 19 21 20 17 9 18 14 27 18 16 
			 Westminster 18 18 11 13 18 16 6 16 15 15 8 
			 
			  South East Coast SHA 237 205 208 194 146 214 200 190 182 207 198 
			 Brighton and Hove City 20 14 15 20 7 18 16 21 19 20 17 
			 East Sussex Downs and Weald 24 17 20 19 17 . 9 15 13 6 18 12 
			 Eastern and Coastal Kent 46 33 39 25 30 43 42 32 43 39 49 
			 Hastings and Rother 6 6 8 10 7 6 9 10 7 11 9 
			 Medway 19 18 16 16 9 25 21 23 10 13 15 
			 Surrey 42 55 45 51 36 48 31 34 40 40 48 
			 West Kent 42 27 35 27 22 27 30 25 31 27 17 
			 West Sussex 38 34 29 26 18 38 36 32 26 39 31 
			 
			  South Central SHA 238 218 240 205 225 178 194 174 185 202 196 
			 Berkshire East 20 24 28 18 24 28 19 14 22 29 26 
			 Berkshire West 22 29 35 27 30 15 32 24 28 28 27 
			 Buckinghamshire 28 29 18 35 32 12 23 23 22 21 29 
			 Hampshire 80 52 71 52 53 46 48 44 40 45 49 
			 Isle of Wight National Health Service 6 4 6 2 3 5 3 5 0 3 5 
			 Milton Keynes 22 17 19 18 21 17 27 15 17 20 14 
			 Oxfordshire 26 31 41 23 28 26 27 32 32 33 25 
			 Portsmouth City Teaching 17 20 12 15 19 15 9 12 10 8 8 
			 Southampton City 17 13 11 15 15 14 6 5 14 14 13 
			 
			  South West SHA 316 261 240 233 264 218 205 248 238 221 238 
			 Bath and North East Somerset 2 8 9 4 6 7 6 9 3 10 8 
			 Bournemouth and Poole 21 15 19 11 17 16 7 14 17 16 13 
			 Bristol 31 32 21 27 31 26 23 28 27 25 27 
			 Cornwall and Isles of Scilly 42 14 23 18 23 24 19 29 22 22 23 
			 Devon 40 37 32 27 36 17 14 34 34 28 31 
			 Dorset 14 16 12 14 13 19 12 14 18 14 16 
			 Gloucestershire 35 37 32 23 27 21 27 28 29 25 32 
			 North Somerset 12 12 13 8 14 8 14 7 5 8 9 
			 Plymouth Teaching 22 13 12 16 11 13 19 14 15 12 19 
			 Somerset 24 25 23 26 26 20 19 23 22 21 23 
			 South Gloucestershire 21 6 13 12 16 11 9 13 8 10 6 
			 Swindon 15 13 9 15 16 9 14 17 11 10 13 
			 Torbay 9 6 5 7 3 8 6 5 9 5 5 
			 Wiltshire 28 27 17 25 25 19 16 13 18 16 13 
			 (1) Based on boundaries as of 2009. (2) All primary care organisations are Primary Care Trusts (PCTs) other than Bexley, Northumberland, Solihull and Torbay, which have Care Trust status, and North East Lincolnshire, which has Care Trust Plus status. Not all primary care organisations (PCOs) are entirely within the boundaries of the strategic health authorities (SHAs) to which they report, so the sum of the deaths in the PCOs included in an SHA do not always equal the total figure shown for that SHA. (3) Figures are for deaths registered in each calendar year.

State Retirement Pensions

Steve Webb: To ask the Chancellor of the Duchy of Lancaster pursuant to the written ministerial statement of 16 December 2008,  Official Report, columns 111-12WS, on guaranteed minimum pension calculations, for what reasons some pensioners have been underpaid since 1978; what estimate he has made of  (a) the number of people affected,  (b) the average annual underpayment and  (c) the cumulative underpayment; and what plans he has to repay such underpayments.

Liam Byrne: My written ministerial statement of 16 December 2008,  Official Report, columns 111-12WS, explained the circumstances in which some public service pensioners had been paid the incorrect pension. While the majority of those affected were overpaid a small number were underpaid. The National Audit Office (NAO) is investigating the causes of the error. I will update the House once the NAO has completed its work.
	The data requested by the hon. Member are not yet available. However, I can confirm that all those who have been underpaid will receive their pension arrears in full, with interest.